[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2024071903A1 - Head-mounted display apparatus, and method for detecting wearing state thereof - Google Patents

Head-mounted display apparatus, and method for detecting wearing state thereof Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024071903A1
WO2024071903A1 PCT/KR2023/014648 KR2023014648W WO2024071903A1 WO 2024071903 A1 WO2024071903 A1 WO 2024071903A1 KR 2023014648 W KR2023014648 W KR 2023014648W WO 2024071903 A1 WO2024071903 A1 WO 2024071903A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
touch
hmd
wearing
display device
mounted display
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/KR2023/014648
Other languages
French (fr)
Korean (ko)
Inventor
์ด์Šนํ—Œ
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Samsung Electronics Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Samsung Electronics Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from KR1020220138584A external-priority patent/KR20240043031A/en
Application filed by Samsung Electronics Co Ltd filed Critical Samsung Electronics Co Ltd
Publication of WO2024071903A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024071903A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B27/00Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B27/00Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
    • G02B27/01Head-up displays
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/041Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means

Definitions

  • Various embodiments of the present disclosure relate to a head mounted display device and technology for detecting a wearing state thereof.
  • wearable electronic devices that can be worn directly on the body have been actively distributed. Wearable electronic devices can improve mobility and portability because they can be used by being mounted on any part of the body, such as the wrist, ankle, neck, waist, or head.
  • a head-mounted display apparatus (hereinafter referred to as HMD) that is mounted on the user's head and displays images may be provided with a wearing portion so that it can be mounted on the head.
  • HMDs may include an AR device that implements augmented reality (AR) and a VR device that implements virtual reality (VR).
  • AR augmented reality
  • VR virtual reality
  • the HMD when the HMD is worn on the user's head, it can activate the display to display information such as AR content or VR content. Additionally, the HMD can disable the display when not worn on the user's head. To control the activation or deactivation of these displays, the HMD can detect the wearing state.
  • Existing HMDs may be equipped with separate sensors, such as proximity sensors, to detect the wearing state.
  • sensors such as proximity sensors
  • the HMD is equipped with a separate sensor, not only does the manufacturing cost increase, but the mounting space for other electronic components may become narrow due to the sensor mounting space.
  • space restrictions may be imposed because many electronic components are intensively mounted on the glasses frame, including the temples.
  • Various embodiments of the present disclosure can provide an HMD that detects a wearing state using a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the wearable unit without a separate sensor and a method for detecting the wearing state thereof.
  • a head mounted display device includes a frame including a first surface facing in a first direction and a second surface facing in a second direction opposite to the first direction, and a frame including a second surface facing in a second direction opposite to the first direction. It may include a display exposed to the outside, wearing parts respectively connected to both ends of the frame and extending in one direction, and a processor disposed inside at least one of the frame or the wearing parts.
  • Each of the wearing units may include an inner surface that is in contact with a portion of the head when the head mounted display device is worn on the user's head, and an outer surface that faces the inner surface.
  • At least one of the wearing parts may include a first touch circuit disposed on the inner surface.
  • the method for detecting the wearing state of a head mounted display device includes detecting the inner surface of at least one of the wearing parts connected to both ends of the frame of the head mounted display device and extending in one direction.
  • the wearing state is detected using a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the wearable unit without a separate sensor, thereby reducing manufacturing costs and making it easy to secure mounting space for electronic components. .
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram of an electronic device in a network environment according to various embodiments.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of an AR device among HMDs according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a touch circuit disposed in an AR device among HMDs according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • Figure 4 is a front perspective view of a VR device among HMDs according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • Figure 5 is a rear perspective view of a VR device among HMDs according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a touch circuit disposed on a wearable portion of an HMD according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a method of operating an HMD when worn, according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining another method of operating an HMD when worn, according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining a method of operating an HMD when removing the HMD according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a method of operating an HMD when the wearing parts of the HMD are separated according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining another method of operating the HMD when the wearing parts of the HMD are separated according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a method for detecting contact and separation of wearing parts of an HMD according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating another method for detecting contact and separation of wearing parts of an HMD according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining a method of operating an HMD when wearing parts of the HMD are in contact according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining another method of operating an HMD when wearing parts of the HMD are in contact, according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining a method of operating an HMD when the HMD enters a charger according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining a method of operating an HMD related to a wearing posture of the HMD according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining another method of operating an HMD related to the wearing posture of the HMD according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining another method of operating an HMD related to a wearing posture of the HMD according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram of an electronic device 101 in a network environment 100, according to various embodiments.
  • the electronic device 101 communicates with the electronic device 102 through a first network 198 (e.g., a short-range wireless communication network) or a second network 199. It is possible to communicate with at least one of the electronic device 104 or the server 108 through (e.g., a long-distance wireless communication network). According to one embodiment, the electronic device 101 may communicate with the electronic device 104 through the server 108.
  • a first network 198 e.g., a short-range wireless communication network
  • a second network 199 e.g., a second network 199.
  • the electronic device 101 may communicate with the electronic device 104 through the server 108.
  • the electronic device 101 includes a processor 120, a memory 130, an input module 150, an audio output module 155, a display module 160, an audio module 170, and a sensor module ( 176), interface 177, connection terminal 178, haptic module 179, camera module 180, power management module 188, battery 189, communication module 190, subscriber identification module 196 , or may include an antenna module 197.
  • at least one of these components eg, the connection terminal 178) may be omitted or one or more other components may be added to the electronic device 101.
  • some of these components e.g., sensor module 176, camera module 180, or antenna module 197) are integrated into one component (e.g., display module 160). It can be.
  • the processor 120 for example, executes software (e.g., program 140) to operate at least one other component (e.g., hardware or software component) of the electronic device 101 connected to the processor 120. It can be controlled and various data processing or calculations can be performed. According to one embodiment, as at least part of data processing or computation, the processor 120 stores instructions or data received from another component (e.g., sensor module 176 or communication module 190) in volatile memory 132. The commands or data stored in the volatile memory 132 can be processed, and the resulting data can be stored in the non-volatile memory 134.
  • software e.g., program 140
  • the processor 120 stores instructions or data received from another component (e.g., sensor module 176 or communication module 190) in volatile memory 132.
  • the commands or data stored in the volatile memory 132 can be processed, and the resulting data can be stored in the non-volatile memory 134.
  • the processor 120 includes the main processor 121 (e.g., a central processing unit or an application processor) or an auxiliary processor 123 that can operate independently or together (e.g., a graphics processing unit, a neural network processing unit ( It may include a neural processing unit (NPU), an image signal processor, a sensor hub processor, or a communication processor).
  • the main processor 121 e.g., a central processing unit or an application processor
  • an auxiliary processor 123 e.g., a graphics processing unit, a neural network processing unit ( It may include a neural processing unit (NPU), an image signal processor, a sensor hub processor, or a communication processor.
  • the electronic device 101 includes a main processor 121 and a secondary processor 123
  • the secondary processor 123 may be set to use lower power than the main processor 121 or be specialized for a designated function. You can.
  • the auxiliary processor 123 may be implemented separately from the main processor 121 or as part of it.
  • the auxiliary processor 123 may, for example, act on behalf of the main processor 121 while the main processor 121 is in an inactive (e.g., sleep) state, or while the main processor 121 is in an active (e.g., application execution) state. ), together with the main processor 121, at least one of the components of the electronic device 101 (e.g., the display module 160, the sensor module 176, or the communication module 190) At least some of the functions or states related to can be controlled.
  • co-processor 123 e.g., image signal processor or communication processor
  • may be implemented as part of another functionally related component e.g., camera module 180 or communication module 190. there is.
  • the auxiliary processor 123 may include a hardware structure specialized for processing artificial intelligence models.
  • Artificial intelligence models can be created through machine learning. For example, such learning may be performed in the electronic device 101 itself on which the artificial intelligence model is performed, or may be performed through a separate server (e.g., server 108).
  • Learning algorithms may include, for example, supervised learning, unsupervised learning, semi-supervised learning, or reinforcement learning, but It is not limited.
  • An artificial intelligence model may include multiple artificial neural network layers.
  • Artificial neural networks include deep neural network (DNN), convolutional neural network (CNN), recurrent neural network (RNN), restricted boltzmann machine (RBM), belief deep network (DBN), bidirectional recurrent deep neural network (BRDNN), It may be one of deep Q-networks or a combination of two or more of the above, but is not limited to the examples described above.
  • artificial intelligence models may additionally or alternatively include software structures.
  • the memory 130 may store various data used by at least one component (eg, the processor 120 or the sensor module 176) of the electronic device 101. Data may include, for example, input data or output data for software (e.g., program 140) and instructions related thereto.
  • Memory 130 may include volatile memory 132 or non-volatile memory 134.
  • the program 140 may be stored as software in the memory 130 and may include, for example, an operating system 142, middleware 144, or application 146.
  • the input module 150 may receive commands or data to be used in a component of the electronic device 101 (e.g., the processor 120) from outside the electronic device 101 (e.g., a user).
  • the input module 150 may include, for example, a microphone, mouse, keyboard, keys (eg, buttons), or digital pen (eg, stylus pen).
  • the sound output module 155 may output sound signals to the outside of the electronic device 101.
  • the sound output module 155 may include, for example, a speaker or a receiver. Speakers can be used for general purposes such as multimedia playback or recording playback.
  • the receiver can be used to receive incoming calls. According to one embodiment, the receiver may be implemented separately from the speaker or as part of it.
  • the display module 160 can visually provide information to the outside of the electronic device 101 (eg, a user).
  • the display module 160 may include, for example, a display, a hologram device, or a projector, and a control circuit for controlling the device.
  • the display module 160 may include a touch sensor configured to detect a touch, or a pressure sensor configured to measure the intensity of force generated by the touch.
  • the audio module 170 can convert sound into an electrical signal or, conversely, convert an electrical signal into sound. According to one embodiment, the audio module 170 acquires sound through the input module 150, the sound output module 155, or an external electronic device (e.g., directly or wirelessly connected to the electronic device 101). Sound may be output through the electronic device 102 (e.g., speaker or headphone).
  • the electronic device 102 e.g., speaker or headphone
  • the sensor module 176 detects the operating state (e.g., power or temperature) of the electronic device 101 or the external environmental state (e.g., user state) and generates an electrical signal or data value corresponding to the detected state. can do.
  • the sensor module 176 includes, for example, a gesture sensor, a gyro sensor, an air pressure sensor, a magnetic sensor, an acceleration sensor, a grip sensor, a proximity sensor, a color sensor, an IR (infrared) sensor, a biometric sensor, It may include a temperature sensor, humidity sensor, or light sensor.
  • the interface 177 may support one or more designated protocols that can be used to connect the electronic device 101 directly or wirelessly with an external electronic device (eg, the electronic device 102).
  • the interface 177 may include, for example, a high definition multimedia interface (HDMI), a universal serial bus (USB) interface, an SD card interface, or an audio interface.
  • HDMI high definition multimedia interface
  • USB universal serial bus
  • SD card interface Secure Digital Card interface
  • audio interface audio interface
  • connection terminal 178 may include a connector through which the electronic device 101 can be physically connected to an external electronic device (eg, the electronic device 102).
  • the connection terminal 178 may include, for example, an HDMI connector, a USB connector, an SD card connector, or an audio connector (eg, a headphone connector).
  • the haptic module 179 can convert electrical signals into mechanical stimulation (e.g., vibration or movement) or electrical stimulation that the user can perceive through tactile or kinesthetic senses.
  • the haptic module 179 may include, for example, a motor, a piezoelectric element, or an electrical stimulation device.
  • the camera module 180 can capture still images and moving images.
  • the camera module 180 may include one or more lenses, image sensors, image signal processors, or flashes.
  • the power management module 188 can manage power supplied to the electronic device 101.
  • the power management module 188 may be implemented as at least a part of, for example, a power management integrated circuit (PMIC).
  • PMIC power management integrated circuit
  • the battery 189 may supply power to at least one component of the electronic device 101.
  • the battery 189 may include, for example, a non-rechargeable primary battery, a rechargeable secondary battery, or a fuel cell.
  • Communication module 190 is configured to provide a direct (e.g., wired) communication channel or wireless communication channel between electronic device 101 and an external electronic device (e.g., electronic device 102, electronic device 104, or server 108). It can support establishment and communication through established communication channels. Communication module 190 operates independently of processor 120 (e.g., an application processor) and may include one or more communication processors that support direct (e.g., wired) communication or wireless communication.
  • processor 120 e.g., an application processor
  • the communication module 190 may be a wireless communication module 192 (e.g., a cellular communication module, a short-range wireless communication module, or a global navigation satellite system (GNSS) communication module) or a wired communication module 194 (e.g., : LAN (local area network) communication module, or power line communication module) may be included.
  • a wireless communication module 192 e.g., a cellular communication module, a short-range wireless communication module, or a global navigation satellite system (GNSS) communication module
  • GNSS global navigation satellite system
  • wired communication module 194 e.g., : LAN (local area network) communication module, or power line communication module
  • the corresponding communication module is a first network 198 (e.g., a short-range communication network such as Bluetooth, wireless fidelity (WiFi) direct, or infrared data association (IrDA)) or a second network 199 (e.g., legacy It may communicate with an external electronic device 104 through a telecommunication network such as a cellular network, a 5G network, a next-generation communication network, the Internet, or a computer network (e.g., LAN or WAN).
  • a telecommunication network such as a cellular network, a 5G network, a next-generation communication network, the Internet, or a computer network (e.g., LAN or WAN).
  • a telecommunication network such as a cellular network, a 5G network, a next-generation communication network, the Internet, or a computer network (e.g., LAN or WAN).
  • a telecommunication network such as a cellular network, a 5G network, a next-generation communication network
  • the wireless communication module 192 uses subscriber information (e.g., International Mobile Subscriber Identifier (IMSI)) stored in the subscriber identification module 196 to communicate within a communication network such as the first network 198 or the second network 199.
  • subscriber information e.g., International Mobile Subscriber Identifier (IMSI)
  • IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identifier
  • the wireless communication module 192 may support 5G networks after 4G networks and next-generation communication technologies, for example, NR access technology (new radio access technology).
  • NR access technology provides high-speed transmission of high-capacity data (eMBB (enhanced mobile broadband)), minimization of terminal power and access to multiple terminals (mMTC (massive machine type communications)), or high reliability and low latency (URLLC (ultra-reliable and low latency). -latency communications)) can be supported.
  • the wireless communication module 192 may support high frequency bands (eg, mmWave bands), for example, to achieve high data rates.
  • the wireless communication module 192 uses various technologies to secure performance in high frequency bands, for example, beamforming, massive array multiple-input and multiple-output (MIMO), and full-dimensional multiplexing. It can support technologies such as input/output (FD-MIMO: full dimensional MIMO), array antenna, analog beam-forming, or large scale antenna.
  • the wireless communication module 192 may support various requirements specified in the electronic device 101, an external electronic device (e.g., electronic device 104), or a network system (e.g., second network 199).
  • the wireless communication module 192 supports Peak data rate (e.g., 20 Gbps or more) for realizing eMBB, loss coverage (e.g., 164 dB or less) for realizing mmTC, or U-plane latency (e.g., 164 dB or less) for realizing URLLC.
  • Peak data rate e.g., 20 Gbps or more
  • loss coverage e.g., 164 dB or less
  • U-plane latency e.g., 164 dB or less
  • the antenna module 197 may transmit or receive signals or power to or from the outside (eg, an external electronic device).
  • the antenna module 197 may include an antenna including a radiator made of a conductor or a conductive pattern formed on a substrate (eg, PCB).
  • the antenna module 197 may include a plurality of antennas (eg, an array antenna). In this case, at least one antenna suitable for the communication method used in the communication network, such as the first network 198 or the second network 199, is connected to the plurality of antennas by, for example, the communication module 190. can be selected. Signals or power may be transmitted or received between the communication module 190 and an external electronic device through the at least one selected antenna.
  • other components eg, radio frequency integrated circuit (RFIC) may be additionally formed as part of the antenna module 197.
  • RFIC radio frequency integrated circuit
  • the antenna module 197 may form a mmWave antenna module.
  • a mmWave antenna module includes a printed circuit board, an RFIC disposed on or adjacent to a first side (e.g., bottom side) of the printed circuit board and capable of supporting a designated high-frequency band (e.g., mmWave band); And a plurality of antennas (e.g., array antennas) disposed on or adjacent to the second side (e.g., top or side) of the printed circuit board and capable of transmitting or receiving signals in the designated high frequency band. can do.
  • a mmWave antenna module includes a printed circuit board, an RFIC disposed on or adjacent to a first side (e.g., bottom side) of the printed circuit board and capable of supporting a designated high-frequency band (e.g., mmWave band); And a plurality of antennas (e.g., array antennas) disposed on or adjacent to the second side (e.g., top or side)
  • peripheral devices e.g., bus, general purpose input and output (GPIO), serial peripheral interface (SPI), or mobile industry processor interface (MIPI)
  • signal e.g. commands or data
  • commands or data may be transmitted or received between the electronic device 101 and the external electronic device 104 through the server 108 connected to the second network 199.
  • Each of the external electronic devices 102 or 104 may be of the same or different type as the electronic device 101.
  • all or part of the operations performed in the electronic device 101 may be executed in one or more of the external electronic devices 102, 104, or 108.
  • the electronic device 101 may perform the function or service instead of executing the function or service on its own.
  • one or more external electronic devices may be requested to perform at least part of the function or service.
  • One or more external electronic devices that have received the request may execute at least part of the requested function or service, or an additional function or service related to the request, and transmit the result of the execution to the electronic device 101.
  • the electronic device 101 may process the result as is or additionally and provide it as at least part of a response to the request.
  • cloud computing distributed computing, mobile edge computing (MEC), or client-server computing technology can be used.
  • the electronic device 101 may provide an ultra-low latency service using, for example, distributed computing or mobile edge computing.
  • the external electronic device 104 may include an Internet of Things (IoT) device.
  • Server 108 may be an intelligent server using machine learning and/or neural networks.
  • the external electronic device 104 or server 108 may be included in the second network 199.
  • the electronic device 101 may be applied to intelligent services (e.g., smart home, smart city, smart car, or healthcare) based on 5G communication technology and IoT-related technology.
  • the shape, structure, and operation (or operating method) of a head-mounted display apparatus (hereinafter referred to as HMD) that is mounted on the user's head and displays images is mentioned, but the configuration is It may be the same or similar to the configuration of the electronic device 101 of FIG. 1 described above.
  • the HMD may include an AR device that implements augmented reality and a VR device that implements virtual reality.
  • Figures 2 and 3 describe the shape and structure of the AR device among the HMD, and Figures 4 and 5 In this section, the shape and structure of the VR device among HMD devices will be explained.
  • the shape and structure of the HMD are not limited to those described in FIGS. 2 to 5, and may include a component for detecting the wearing state of the HMD, for example, a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the wearing portion of the HMD.
  • the shape and structure of the remaining components may be modified.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of an AR device among HMDs according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a touch circuit disposed in an AR device among HMDs according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. .
  • the HMD 200 may include a main frame 210, displays 211 and 212, and wearable units 221 and 222. there is.
  • the main frame 210 may be worn on at least part of the user's head (eg, face) and may be supported on the user's face by various components.
  • the main frame 210 may include a first surface facing in a first direction and a second surface facing in a second direction opposite to the first direction.
  • the main frame 210 may be made of a material light enough to allow the user to feel comfortable wearing it.
  • the main frame 210 may be made of plastic material.
  • the main frame 210 is made of at least one of various materials, such as glass, ceramic, metal (e.g., aluminum), or metal alloy (e.g., steel, stainless steel, titanium, or magnesium alloy) for strength or aesthetics. More may be included.
  • 2 and 3 show the HMD 200 in the form of glasses, and the main frame 210 represents a structure including a rim, bar, and bridge of the glasses, These HMDs 200 may be referred to as AR glasses.
  • the displays 211 and 212 may be exposed through the second side of the main frame 210.
  • the first display 211 of the displays 211 and 212 is disposed on the right edge of the main frame 210 to face the user's right eye
  • the first display 211 of the displays 211 and 212 is disposed on the right edge of the main frame 210 to face the user's right eye.
  • the display 212 may be placed on the left edge of the main frame 210 to face the user's left eye.
  • either the first display 211 or the second display 212 may be omitted.
  • the displays 211 and 212 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display (LCD), a digital mirror device (DMD), a liquid crystal on silicon (LCoS) device, or a liquid crystal display (LCoS). It may include a light emitting diode (LED) on silicon (LEDoS), an organic light emitting diode (OLED), or a micro LED (micro light emitting diode, micro LED).
  • LED light emitting diode
  • OLED organic light emitting diode
  • micro LED micro light emitting diode, micro LED
  • the HMD 200 transmits light to the screen output area of the displays 211 and 212. It may include a light source for irradiation.
  • the HMD 200 may emit light even if it does not include a separate light source. It is possible to provide good quality images to users.
  • the displays 211 and 212 are implemented with organic light emitting diodes or micro LEDs, a light source is not required, so the HMD 200 can be lightweight.
  • Transparent members 213 and 214 may be disposed on the first surface of the main frame 210.
  • the transparent members 213 and 214 may be formed of a glass plate, a plastic plate, or a polymer, and may be made transparent or translucent.
  • the first transparent member 213 among the transparent members 213 and 214 is disposed on the right edge of the main frame 210, and the second transparent member among the transparent members 213 and 214 ( 214) may be placed on the left edge of the main frame 210.
  • the transparent members 213 and 214 may be disposed at a position facing the user's eyes to form a screen display unit.
  • either the first transparent member 213 or the second transparent member 214 may be omitted.
  • the displays 211 and 212 may include an optical waveguide 215.
  • the optical waveguide 215 may serve to transmit the light source generated by the displays 211 and 212 to the user's eyes.
  • the optical waveguide 215 may be made of glass, plastic, or polymer, and may include a nanopattern formed on some of the interior or exterior surfaces, for example, a polygonal or curved grating structure. According to one embodiment, light incident on one end of the waveguide may be propagated inside the optical waveguide 215 by a nano-pattern and provided to the user. Additionally, the optical waveguide 215, which is composed of a free-form prism, can provide incident light to the user through a reflection mirror.
  • the optical waveguide 215 may include at least one of at least one diffractive element (eg, a diffractive optical element (DOE) or a holographic optical element (HOE)) or a reflective element (eg, a reflective mirror).
  • the optical waveguide 215 may guide the display light emitted from the light source unit to the user's eyes using at least one diffractive element or reflective element included in the optical waveguide 215.
  • the diffractive element may include an input optical member 216 and an output optical member (not shown).
  • the input optical member 216 may refer to an input grating area
  • the output optical member may refer to an output grating area.
  • the input grating area serves as an input terminal that diffracts (or reflects) the light output from the displays 211 and 212 (e.g., Micro LED) to transmit the light to the transparent members 213 and 214 of the screen display unit. You can.
  • the output grating area may serve as an outlet that diffracts (or reflects) light transmitted to the transparent members 213 and 214 of the optical waveguide 215 to the user's eyes.
  • the reflective element may include a total reflection optical element or a total reflection waveguide for total internal reflection (TIR).
  • TIR total internal reflection
  • total reflection is a method of guiding light, and an angle of incidence is created such that light (e.g., an image) input through the input grating area is 100% reflected from one side (e.g., a specific side) of the optical waveguide 215. , which may mean ensuring that 100% of the output is transmitted to the output grating area.
  • the light emitted from the displays 211 and 212 may be guided to an optical path through the input optical member 216 to the optical waveguide 215. Additionally, light moving inside the optical waveguide 215 may be guided toward the user's eyes through the output optical member.
  • the screen display may be determined based on the light emitted in the eye direction.
  • the wearing parts 221 and 222 may be connected to a portion of the main frame 210 so that the user can wear the HMD 200.
  • the first wearing part 221 of the wearing parts 221 and 222 is connected to an end of the right edge of the main frame 210 and extends in one direction (e.g., the second direction).
  • the second wearing part 222 of the wearing parts 221 and 222 may be connected to an end of the left edge of the main frame 210 and extend in one direction (eg, the second direction).
  • the wearing parts 221 and 222 may be connected to the main frame 210 through hinges 223 and 224. 2 and 3 show the HMD 200 in the form of glasses, and the wearing parts 221 and 222 may represent temples of the glasses.
  • Each of the wearing parts 221 and 222 includes an inner surface 221b and 222b that contact a part of the head (e.g., temple) when the HMD 200 is worn on the user's head. It may include outer surfaces 221a and 222a facing 222b).
  • touch circuits 291 and 292 may be disposed on the inner surfaces 221b and 222b of at least one of the wearable parts 221 and 222.
  • the touch circuits 291 and 292 may include touch cells.
  • the touch circuits 291 and 292 may have a plurality of touch cells arranged adjacent to each other.
  • the touch circuits 291 and 292 may include a touch processor that processes touch input.
  • the touch processor may include a microprocessor.
  • the touch circuits 291 and 292 may be used to detect the wearing state of the HMD 200. For example, when the HMD 200 is worn on the user's head, the touch circuits 291 and 292 disposed on the inner surfaces 221b and 222b of the wearing parts 221 and 222 are attached to a portion of the head. It can be contacted, and touch information corresponding to the touch input according to the contact can be obtained.
  • the touch information may include, for example, touch location (e.g., location of a touched touch cell among touch cells), touch area (e.g., total area of touched touch cells among touch cells), and touch type (e.g., touch among touch cells).
  • the touch information may be referred to as a touch pattern expressed by at least one of touch location, touch area, touch type, or number of touches.
  • the touch information may be expressed as a different touch pattern when at least one of the touch position, touch area, touch type, or number of touches is different.
  • the touch circuits 291 and 292 may detect the wearing state of the HMD 200 using the acquired touch information. For example, if the pattern of the touch input detected through the touch circuits 291 and 292 has a designated pattern (e.g., a first pattern), the touch circuits 291 and 292 allow the HMD 200 to be placed on the user's head. It can be judged that it has been worn.
  • the designated pattern may be, for example, the touch position is a first position, the touch area is a first size or more, the touch shape has a first shape, the number of touches is a first number or a combination thereof. It can indicate a state of being.
  • the state in which the touch position is the first position is the wearing part (221, 222) among the plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surfaces (221b, 222b) of the wearing part (221, 222).
  • At least one touch cell disposed in the end direction may indicate a state in which it is in contact with the user's ear or a portion of the temple adjacent to the ear.
  • the state in which the touch area is greater than or equal to the first size is when at least one touch cell is in contact among a plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surfaces 221b and 222b of the wearing units 221 and 222. It may indicate a state where the total area is greater than or equal to the first size.
  • the state in which the touch shape has the first shape is when at least one touch cell is contacted among a plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surfaces 221b and 222b of the wearing units 221 and 222.
  • the arrangement form may indicate a state corresponding to the first form.
  • the first shape may be, for example, a square or oval with one long side.
  • the state in which the number of touches is greater than the first number is when at least one touch cell touched among a plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surfaces 221b and 222b of the wearing units 221 and 222. It may indicate a state where the number is greater than or equal to the first number.
  • the touch circuits 291 and 292 may determine that the HMD 200 has been removed from the user's head.
  • the touch circuits 291 and 292 transmit the acquired touch information to a processor, and the processor can use the touch information to determine the wearing state of the HMD 200.
  • the HMD 200 may further include a lens (not shown).
  • the lens may serve to adjust the focus so that the screen output to the displays 211 and 212 can be viewed by the user's eyes.
  • the lens may be comprised of, for example, a Fresnel lens, a Pancake lens, or a multi-channel lens.
  • the HMD 200 may include at least one camera.
  • the at least one camera may include at least one of a first camera unit 231 and 232, a second camera unit 233 and 234, or a third camera unit 235.
  • the first camera units 231 and 232 may be used for 3Dof (degrees of freedom) or 6Dof head tracking, hand detection and tracking, and space recognition.
  • the first camera units 231 and 232 may perform at least one of a spatial recognition function for 6Dof, a simultaneous localization and mapping (SLAM) function through depth shooting, or a user gesture recognition function.
  • the first camera units 231 and 232 may be disposed on the first side of the main frame 210.
  • one camera 231 of the first camera units 231 and 232 is disposed on the right rim of the main frame 210, and the other camera 231 of the first camera units 231 and 232
  • the camera 232 may be placed on the left edge of the main frame 210.
  • the first camera units 231 and 232 may include global shutter cameras.
  • the second camera units 233 and 234 may be used to detect and track the user's pupils.
  • the second camera units 233 and 234 may be used to ensure that the center of the image projected on the AR glasses is located according to the direction in which the wearer's eyes are looking.
  • the second camera units 233 and 234 may be disposed on the second side of the main frame 210.
  • one camera 233 of the second camera units 233 and 234 is disposed on the right rim of the main frame 210, and the other camera 233 of the second camera units 233 and 234
  • the camera 234 may be placed on the left edge of the main frame 210.
  • the second camera units 233 and 234 may include global shutter cameras.
  • the third camera unit 235 may be used to photograph an external subject.
  • the third camera unit 235 may be disposed on the first side of the commercial main frame 210.
  • the third camera unit 235 may be placed on the bridge of the main frame 210.
  • the third camera unit 235 is called a high resolution (HR) or photo video (PV) camera and may include a high resolution camera.
  • the third camera unit 235 has at least one function for obtaining high-definition images, such as an auto focus (AF) function and/or an optical image stabilization (OIS) function. This may include a color camera.
  • the third camera unit 235 may include a global shutter camera or a rolling shutter camera.
  • the at least one camera may further include a fourth camera unit (not shown).
  • the fourth camera unit may be used to detect and track the user's facial expression.
  • the fourth camera may be disposed on the second side of the main frame 210.
  • the HMD 200 may include light emitting units 241 and 242 (eg, LED).
  • the light emitting units 241 and 242 may have different purposes depending on their placement location.
  • the light emitting units 241 and 242 detect movement of the user's eyes with the second camera units 233 and 234.
  • it can be used as an auxiliary means to facilitate line-of-sight detection, and in this case, IR LEDs with infrared wavelengths can be mainly used.
  • the light emitting units 241 and 242 are connected to cameras (e.g., the first camera unit 231) disposed around the hinges 223 and 224 connecting the main frame 210 and the wearing units 221 and 222. , 232)) or when disposed adjacent to a camera disposed around the bridge of the main frame 210 (e.g., the third camera unit 235), the light emitting units 241 and 242 are used to capture images of the camera. It can be used as a means of supplementing ambient brightness.
  • the light emitting units 241 and 242 may emit light when it is difficult to detect a subject in a dark environment.
  • the HMD 200 may include microphones 251, 252, and 253 and speakers 254 and 255.
  • the microphones 251, 252, and 253 can convert sound into electrical signals and transmit the converted electrical signals to the processor.
  • the speakers 254 and 255 can output voice signals.
  • the speakers 254 and 255 may convert electrical signals generated inside the HMD 200 into sound and output it to the outside.
  • the microphones 251, 252, and 253 may be placed on the main frame 210 to be placed close to the user's mouth, and the speakers 254, 255 may be placed close to the user's ears. In order to be placed in a close position, it may be placed on the wearing parts 221 and 222.
  • the HMD 200 may include printed circuit boards 261 and 262.
  • the printed circuit boards 261 and 262 may be placed inside the wearing portions 221 and 222, and various electronic components may be mounted thereon.
  • Electronic components mounted on the printed circuit boards 261 and 262 may include, for example, at least one of a processor, memory, or communication circuit.
  • the printed circuit boards 261 and 262 may include flexible printed circuit boards.
  • the printed circuit boards 261 and 262 are connected to at least one component of the HMD 200 (e.g., displays 211 and 212 or cameras 231, 232, 233, 234, and 235) through a flexible printed circuit board. ) can transmit electrical signals.
  • the printed circuit boards 261 and 262 may include a first substrate, a second substrate, and an interposer disposed between the first substrate and the second substrate.
  • the processor can control at least one component of the HMD 200 and perform various data processing or calculations. According to one embodiment, the processor may perform a function related to detecting a wearing state of the HMD 200 by executing instructions stored in the memory included in the HMD 200.
  • the memory may store various data used by at least one component of the HMD 200.
  • the memory may store commands and data related to detection of the wearing state of the HMD 200.
  • the instruction may be executed by the processor.
  • the communication circuit may support communication between the HMD 200 and an external electronic device.
  • the communication circuit may establish wired or wireless communication with the external electronic device according to a specified communication protocol, and may transmit and receive signals or data.
  • the HMD 200 may include batteries 271 and 272.
  • the batteries 271 and 272 may supply power to at least one component of the HMD 200.
  • the batteries 271 and 272 may be disposed inside the ends of the wearing parts 221 and 222.
  • the configuration of the HMD 200 is not limited to this. According to various embodiments, the HMD 200 may omit at least one of the above-described components and may further include at least one other component. As an example, the HMD 200 may further include at least one of an antenna or a sensor.
  • FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of a VR device among HMDs according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 5 is a rear perspective view of a VR device among HMDs according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the HMD 400 may include a main frame 410, a display (not shown), and wearable units 421 and 422. .
  • the main frame 410 may be worn on at least part of the user's head (eg, face) and may be supported on the user's face by various components.
  • the main frame 410 may include a first surface 410a facing in a first direction and a second surface 410b facing in a second direction opposite to the first direction.
  • the main frame 410 may be made of a material light enough to allow the user to feel comfortable wearing it.
  • the main frame 410 may be made of plastic material.
  • the main frame 410 is made of at least one of various materials, such as glass, ceramic, metal (e.g., aluminum), or metal alloy (e.g., steel, stainless steel, titanium, or magnesium alloy) for strength or aesthetics. More may be included.
  • the HMD 400 may further include a cover coupled to more firmly support the external electronic device to the main frame 410 while the external electronic device is fastened to the main frame 410. You can.
  • the cover may be physically coupled to the main frame 410 in the form of a hook, or may be coupled to the main frame 410 in a manner such as a magnet or electromagnet.
  • the cover can prevent the external electronic device from being separated from the main frame 410, and can also enhance the aesthetics by forming the appearance of the main frame 410.
  • the display is placed inside the main frame 410 and can be viewed through a lens 411. In one embodiment, the display may be exposed through the second side 410b of the main frame 410.
  • the display may include, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a digital mirror display device, a silicon liquid crystal display device, an organic light emitting diode, or a micro LED.
  • the HMD 400 may include a light source that radiates light to the screen output area of the display.
  • the HMD 400 when the display is capable of generating light on its own, for example, when it is made of one of organic light emitting diodes or micro LEDs, the HMD 400 provides good quality to the user even if it does not include a separate light source. Video can be provided. In one embodiment, if the display is implemented with organic light emitting diodes or micro LEDs, a light source is not required, so the HMD 400 can be lightweight.
  • the wearing parts 421 and 422 may be connected to a portion of the main frame 410 so that the user can wear the HMD 400.
  • the first wearing part 421 of the wearing parts 421 and 422 is connected to the right end of the main frame 410 and extends in one direction (e.g., the second direction),
  • the second wearing part 422 may be connected to the left end of the main frame 410 and extend in one direction (eg, the second direction).
  • the wearing parts 421 and 422 may be connected to the main frame 410 through a hinge. 4 and 5 show the wearing parts 421 and 422 in the form of glasses legs, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • the wearing parts 421 and 422 may be provided in the form of a band and may be fastened to the user's head in a manner that surrounds a portion of the user's head.
  • the wearing parts 421 and 422 may be provided in the form of a single band and may be fixed to the user's head so as to cross the temporal region, including the temples.
  • the wearing parts (421, 422) may be made of a material with elasticity of a specified size or more, and include a length adjustment part that can adjust the length of the wearing parts (421, 422) to fit the circumference of the user's head. can do.
  • the length of the wearing parts 421 and 422 can be adjusted through the length adjusting part, so that the main frame 410 can fit tightly around the eyes of the user's face.
  • the length adjusting part may include gears, Velcro, or magnets.
  • the wearing parts 421 and 422 are provided in the shape of temples of glasses will be described.
  • Each of the wearing parts 421 and 422 includes an inner surface 421b and 422b that contact a part of the head (e.g., temple) when the HMD 400 is worn on the user's head. It may include outer surfaces 421a and 422a facing 422b).
  • touch circuits 491 and 492 may be disposed on the inner surfaces 421b and 422b of at least one of the wearable parts 421 and 422.
  • the touch circuits 491 and 492 may include touch cells.
  • the touch circuits 491 and 492 may have a plurality of touch cells arranged adjacent to each other.
  • the touch circuits 491 and 492 may include a touch processor that processes touch input.
  • the touch processor may include a microprocessor.
  • the touch circuits 491 and 492 may be used to detect the wearing state of the HMD 400. For example, when the HMD 400 is worn on the user's head, the touch circuits 491 and 492 disposed on the inner surfaces 421b and 422b of the wearing parts 421 and 422 are attached to a portion of the head. It can be contacted, and touch information corresponding to the touch input according to the contact can be obtained.
  • the touch information may include, for example, touch location (e.g., location of a touched touch cell among touch cells), touch area (e.g., total area of touched touch cells among touch cells), and touch type (e.g., touch among touch cells).
  • the touch information may be referred to as a touch pattern expressed by at least one of touch location, touch area, touch type, or number of touches.
  • the touch information may be expressed as a different touch pattern when at least one of the touch position, touch area, touch type, or number of touches is different.
  • the touch circuits 491 and 492 may detect the wearing state of the HMD 400 using the acquired touch information. For example, if the pattern of the touch input detected through the touch circuits 491 and 492 has a designated pattern (e.g., the first pattern), the touch circuits 491 and 492 allow the HMD 400 to be placed on the user's head. It can be judged that it has been worn.
  • the designated pattern may be, for example, the touch position is a first position, the touch area is a first size or more, the touch shape has a first shape, the number of touches is a first number or a combination thereof. It can indicate a state of being.
  • the state in which the touch position is the first position is the wearing part (421, 422) among the plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surfaces (421b, 422b) of the wearing part (421, 422).
  • At least one touch cell disposed in the end direction may indicate a state in which it is in contact with the user's ear or a temple portion adjacent to the ear.
  • the state in which the touch area is greater than or equal to the first size is when at least one touch cell contacted among a plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surfaces 421b and 422b of the wearing units 421 and 422 It may indicate a state where the total area is greater than or equal to the first size.
  • the state in which the touch shape has the first shape is when at least one touch cell is contacted among a plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surfaces 421b and 422b of the wearing parts 421 and 422.
  • the arrangement form may indicate a state corresponding to the first form.
  • the first shape may be, for example, a square or oval with one long side.
  • the state in which the number of touches is greater than or equal to the first number is when at least one touch cell touched among a plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surfaces 421b and 422b of the wearing units 421 and 422. It may indicate a state where the number is greater than or equal to the first number.
  • the touch circuits 491 and 492 may determine that the HMD 400 has been removed from the user's head.
  • the touch circuits 491 and 492 transmit the acquired touch information to a processor, and the processor can use the touch information to determine the wearing state of the HMD 400.
  • the HMD 400 may include a lens 411.
  • the lens 411 may serve to adjust the focus so that the screen displayed on the display can be viewed by the user's eyes.
  • a lens assembly including at least one lens may be inserted inside the main frame 410 at a position facing the user's two eyes.
  • at least one surface of the lens 411 is provided through the second surface 410b of the main frame 410 so that the user can view the screen of the display with the user's eyes. This may be exposed.
  • the lens 411 may be composed of, for example, a Fresnel lens, a Pencake lens, or a multi-channel lens.
  • the HMD 400 may include at least one camera.
  • the at least one camera may include at least one of a first camera unit 431, a third camera unit 432, or a fourth camera unit 433.
  • the first camera unit 431 can be used for 3Dof or 6Dof head tracking, hand detection and tracking, and spatial recognition.
  • the first camera unit 431 may perform at least one of a spatial recognition function for 6Dof, a SLAM function through depth shooting, or a user gesture recognition function.
  • the first camera unit 431 may be disposed on the first surface 410a of the main frame 410.
  • the first camera unit 431 may include a global shutter camera.
  • the third camera unit 432 may be used to photograph an external subject.
  • the third camera unit 432 may be disposed on the first side 410a of the commercial main frame 410.
  • the third camera unit 432 is called HR or PV and may include a high-resolution camera.
  • the third camera unit 432 may include a color camera equipped with at least one function for acquiring high-definition images, such as an autofocus function and/or a shake correction function.
  • the third camera unit 432 may include a global shutter camera or a rolling shutter camera.
  • the fourth camera unit 433 may be used to detect and track the user's facial expression.
  • the fourth camera 433 may be disposed on the second side 410b of the main frame 410.
  • the HMD 400 may include a depth sensor 440.
  • the depth sensor 440 can be used to measure the distance to an object.
  • the depth sensor 440 may include a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and may be used to determine the distance to an object through a method of measuring time of flight (TOF).
  • TOF time of flight
  • the HMD 400 may further include a light emitting unit, microphone, speaker, printed circuit board, and battery.
  • the light emitting unit may be disposed adjacent to the at least one camera.
  • the microphone may be placed on the main frame 410 to be placed close to the user's mouth, and the speaker may be placed on the wearing unit 421 to be placed close to the user's ears. , 422).
  • the printed circuit board may be placed inside the main frame 410, and various electronic components may be mounted. Electronic components mounted on the printed circuit board may include, for example, at least one of a processor, memory, or communication circuit.
  • the battery may be placed inside the main frame 410.
  • the processor can control at least one component of the HMD 400 and perform various data processing or calculations. According to one embodiment, the processor may perform a function related to detecting a wearing state of the HMD 400 by executing instructions stored in the memory included in the HMD 400.
  • the memory may store various data used by at least one component of the HMD 400.
  • the memory may store commands and data related to detection of the wearing state of the HMD 400.
  • the instruction may be executed by the processor.
  • the communication circuit may support communication between the HMD 400 and an external electronic device.
  • the communication circuit may establish wired or wireless communication with the external electronic device according to a specified communication protocol, and may transmit and receive signals or data.
  • the configuration of the HMD 400 is not limited to this. According to various embodiments, the HMD 400 may omit at least one of the above-described components and may further include at least one other component. As an example, the HMD 400 may further include at least one of an antenna or a sensor.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a touch circuit disposed on a wearable portion of an HMD according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • an HMD (e.g., HMD 200 in Figures 2 and 3 or HMD 400 in Figures 4 and 5) includes a wearing unit 600 (e.g., HMD 400 in Figures 4 and 5) so that a user can wear the HMD. It may include the wearing parts 221 and 222 of FIGS. 2 and 3 or the wearing parts 421 and 422 of FIGS. 4 and 5.
  • the wearable unit 600 may be connected to a portion of the main frame of the HMD (eg, the main frame 210 in FIGS. 2 and 3 or the main frame 410 in FIGS. 4 and 5).
  • the wearing portion 600 includes an outer surface 601 (e.g., the outer surface of an eyeglass temple), an inner surface 603 opposing the outer surface 601 (e.g., an inner surface of a temple), and the outer surface. It may include an upper surface 602 (eg, the upper surface of a temple) extending from 601 to the inner surface 603.
  • the inner surface 603, which is the surface in contact with a part of the head (e.g., temple) is the inner surface 221b and 222b of FIGS. 2 and 3 or the inner surface 221b and 222b of FIGS. 4 and 3.
  • the outer surface 601 opposite to the inner surface 603 is the outer surface 221a and 222a of FIGS. 2 and 3 or the outer surfaces 221a and 222a of FIGS. 4 and 5. It may correspond to the outer surfaces 421a and 422a.
  • a first touch circuit 613 (e.g., the touch circuits 291 and 292 in FIG. 3 or the touch circuits 491 and 492 in FIGS. 4 and 5) is disposed on the inner surface 603 of the wearing unit 600. It can be.
  • the first touch circuit 613 can be used to detect the wearing state of the HMD. For example, when the HMD is worn on the user's head, the first touch circuit 613 disposed on the inner surface 603 of the wearing unit 600 may contact a portion of the head, and the contact Touch information according to can be acquired, and the wearing state of the HMD can be detected using the obtained touch information.
  • the first touch circuit 613 may include a touch cell.
  • the first touch circuit 613 may have a plurality of touch cells arranged adjacent to each other.
  • a second touch circuit 611 may be disposed on the outer surface 601 of the wearing unit 600.
  • the second touch circuit 611 may receive a user's input.
  • the second touch circuit 611 may receive a user input for controlling the HMD.
  • the user input may correspond to signals related to settings (e.g., sound settings or communication settings) and controls (e.g., sound control or video playback control) related to functions supported by the HMD.
  • the second touch circuit 611 may include a touch cell.
  • the second touch circuit 611 may have a plurality of touch cells arranged adjacent to each other.
  • the first touch circuit 613 and the second touch circuit 611 may be formed integrally.
  • one touch circuit 611, 612, and 613 may be disposed from the outer surface 601 to the inner surface 603 of the wearable unit 600.
  • the touch circuits 611, 612, and 613 are connected to the first part 631 disposed on the outer surface 601 of the wearing part 600, from a part of the first part 631 to the wearing part ( A second part 632 extending in the direction of the inner surface 603 of the 600, and a third part 633 connected to the second part 632 and disposed on the inner surface 603 of the wearing part 600. ) may include.
  • the third portion 633 of the touch circuits 611, 612, and 613 may be disposed over a smaller area than the first portion 631 of the touch circuits 611, 612, and 613.
  • the third portion 633 of the touch circuits 611, 612, and 613 is limited to the surface that contacts a part of the head (e.g., temple) when the HMD is worn on the user's head. can be placed.
  • a head mounted display device (e.g., HMD 200 of FIGS. 2 and 3 or HMD 400 of FIGS. 4 and 5) has a first surface facing in a first direction. and a frame including a second surface facing in a second direction opposite to the first direction (e.g., the main frame 210 in FIGS. 2 and 3 or the main frame 410 in FIGS. 4 and 5), A display exposed to the outside through the second side (e.g., the displays 211 and 212 in FIGS. 2 and 3 or the displays in FIGS. 4 and 5), respectively connected to both ends of the frame and extending in one direction. Parts (e.g., the wearing parts 221 and 222 of FIGS.
  • each of the wearing units has an inner surface (e.g., in FIGS. 2 and 3) that is in contact with a portion of the head when the head mounted display device is worn on the user's head.
  • a first touch circuit (e.g., the touch circuits 291 and 292 of FIG. 3, the touch circuits 491 and 492 of FIGS. 4 and 5, or the first touch circuit of FIG. 6 (or a third portion of the touch circuit formed integrally) )(613)) may be included.
  • the head mounted display device is provided in the form of glasses, and the wearing parts may form legs of the glasses.
  • the wearing parts may be integrally provided in the form of a band and tightened to surround a portion of the head.
  • the first touch circuit may have a plurality of touch cells arranged adjacent to each other.
  • the first touch circuit may be arranged to extend from the inner surface to the outer surface.
  • At least one of the wearing parts includes a second touch circuit (e.g., the second touch circuit of FIG. 6 (or the first part of the touch circuit formed integrally) 611 disposed on the outer surface. ) or the touch circuit 1221 of FIG. 12).
  • a second touch circuit e.g., the second touch circuit of FIG. 6 (or the first part of the touch circuit formed integrally) 611 disposed on the outer surface.
  • the touch circuit 1221 of FIG. 12 includes a second touch circuit (e.g., the second touch circuit of FIG. 6 (or the first part of the touch circuit formed integrally) 611 disposed on the outer surface. ) or the touch circuit 1221 of FIG. 12).
  • the wearing parts include a first wearing part connected to one end of the frame and a second wearing part connected to the other end of the frame, and the first touch circuit is connected to the first wearing part of the first wearing part. It may be disposed on the inner surface, and the second touch circuit may be disposed on the outer surface of the second wearing part.
  • At least one of the wearing parts may include a conductor (eg, the conductor 1321 in FIG. 13) disposed on the outer surface.
  • a conductor eg, the conductor 1321 in FIG. 13
  • the wearing parts include a first wearing part connected to one end of the frame and a second wearing part connected to the other end of the frame, and the first touch circuit is connected to the first wearing part of the first wearing part. It may be disposed on the inner surface, and the conductor may be disposed on the outer surface of the second wearing part.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a method of operating an HMD when worn, according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the HMD may determine whether the first touch input has been detected.
  • the HMD has a wearable part (e.g., FIG. 2 and It may include the wearing parts 221 and 222 of FIG. 3, the wearing parts 421 and 422 of FIGS. 4 and 5, or the wearing part 600 of FIG. 6. Additionally, the HMD can detect the user's finger touching the wearing unit. Here, when the user's finger touches the wearing part, the HMD can detect the first touch input.
  • a situation in which the user's finger touches the wearing part may include, for example, a situation in which the user pinches the wearing part with a finger to wear the HMD.
  • the HMD uses a touch circuit (e.g., the second touch circuit 611 of FIG. 6 (or the first part 631 of the touch circuit formed integrally)) disposed on the outer surface of the wearable unit.
  • the first touch input can be detected.
  • the touch circuit may include a touch processor that processes the first touch input.
  • the touch processor may include a microprocessor.
  • the HMD may re-perform operation 710. For example, the HMD may monitor detection of the first touch input continuously or at regular intervals until the first touch input is detected.
  • the HMD may perform preprocessing in operation 720.
  • the HMD may increase the activation level of the processor.
  • the HMD can control the processor to operate from a low-power mode to a normal mode.
  • the HMD can increase the driving frequency of the processor.
  • the processor may include, for example, an application processor.
  • the HMD may pre-load execution data of a designated application into memory to prevent additional delays such as memory load.
  • the HMD may determine whether a second touch input has been detected.
  • the HMD includes a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the wearable unit (e.g., the touch circuits 291 and 292 in FIG. 3, the touch circuits 491 and 492 in FIGS. 4 and 5, or the first touch circuit 613 in FIG. 6). (or the third part 633 of the touch circuit formed integrally)) can be used to detect the second touch input.
  • the touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the wearing unit may be in contact with a portion of the head and may detect the second touch input according to the contact.
  • the HMD may acquire touch information corresponding to the second touch input and detect the wearing state of the HMD using the acquired touch information.
  • the HMD may re-perform operation 710.
  • the HMD may activate the display and display information through the activated display in operation 740. For example, when the second touch input is detected, the HMD may determine that the HMD is worn on the user's head, and in order to perform an operation according to wearing the HMD, turn on the screen of the display and display the Information according to operation can be displayed.
  • the HMD may deactivate the display and lower the activation level of the processor. For example, the HMD can turn off the screen of the display. Additionally, the processor can be controlled to operate from a normal mode to a low-power mode. Alternatively, the HMD may lower the driving frequency of the processor.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining another method of operating an HMD when worn, according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the HMD may determine whether a first touch input has been detected.
  • the HMD has a wearable part (e.g., FIG. 2 and It may include the wearing parts 221 and 222 of FIG. 3, the wearing parts 421 and 422 of FIGS. 4 and 5, or the wearing part 600 of FIG. 6. Additionally, the HMD can detect the user's finger touching the wearing unit. Here, when the user's finger touches the wearing part, the HMD can detect the first touch input.
  • a situation in which the user's finger touches the wearing part may include, for example, a situation in which the user pinches the wearing part with a finger to wear the HMD.
  • the HMD uses a touch circuit (e.g., the second touch circuit 611 of FIG. 6 (or the first part 631 of the touch circuit formed integrally)) disposed on the outer surface of the wearable unit.
  • the first touch input can be detected.
  • the touch circuit may include a touch processor that processes the first touch input.
  • the touch processor may include a microprocessor.
  • the HMD may re-perform operation 810. For example, the HMD may monitor detection of the first touch input continuously or at regular intervals until the first touch input is detected.
  • the HMD may perform preprocessing and activate the display in operation 820.
  • the HMD may increase the activation level of the processor.
  • the HMD can control the processor to operate from a low-power mode to a normal mode.
  • the HMD can increase the driving frequency of the processor.
  • the processor may include, for example, an application processor.
  • the HMD may preload execution data of a designated application into memory to prevent additional delays such as memory loading. Additionally, the HMD can turn on the screen of the display.
  • the HMD may determine whether a second touch input has been detected.
  • the HMD includes a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the wearable unit (e.g., the touch circuits 291 and 292 in FIG. 3, the touch circuits 491 and 492 in FIGS. 4 and 5, or the first touch circuit 613 in FIG. 6). (or the third part 633 of the touch circuit formed integrally)) can be used to detect the second touch input.
  • the touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the wearing unit may be in contact with a portion of the head and may detect the second touch input according to the contact.
  • the HMD may acquire touch information corresponding to the second touch input and detect the wearing state of the HMD using the acquired touch information.
  • the HMD may re-perform operation 810.
  • the HMD may display information through the activated display in operation 840. For example, when the second touch input is detected, the HMD may determine that the HMD is worn on the user's head, and in order to perform an operation according to wearing the HMD, information according to the operation may be displayed on the screen of the display. It can be displayed.
  • the HMD may deactivate the display and lower the activation level of the processor. For example, the HMD can turn off the screen of the display. Additionally, the processor can be controlled to operate from a normal mode to a low-power mode. Alternatively, the HMD may lower the driving frequency of the processor.
  • the HMD may deactivate the display if the second touch input is not detected within a specified time (eg, 10 seconds) after the first touch input is detected.
  • a specified time eg, 10 seconds
  • the HMD can turn off the screen of the display.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining a method of operating an HMD when removing the HMD according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • an HMD (e.g., HMD 200 in Figures 2 and 3 or HMD 400 in Figures 4 and 5) has a main frame (e.g., HMD 200 in Figures 2 and 3) so that the user can wear it.
  • a wearing part e.g., the wearing parts 221 and 222 of FIGS. 2 and 3, the wearing parts of FIGS. 4 and 5) connected to a portion of the main frame 210 or the main frame 410 of FIGS. 4 and 5. It may include (421, 422) or the wearing part 600 of FIG. 6.
  • the HMD includes a touch circuit (e.g., the touch circuits 291 and 292 in FIG. 3, the touch circuits 491 and 492 in FIGS.
  • the wearing state of the HMD can be detected using 613) (or the third part 633 of the integrated touch circuit).
  • the touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the wearing unit may contact a portion of the head and detect a touch input according to the contact.
  • the HMD may acquire touch information corresponding to the touch input and detect the wearing state of the HMD using the acquired touch information.
  • the touch information may include, for example, touch location (e.g., location of a touched touch cell among touch cells), touch area (e.g., total area of touched touch cells among touch cells), and touch type (e.g., touch among touch cells).
  • the touch information may be referred to as a touch pattern expressed by at least one of touch location, touch area, touch type, or number of touches.
  • the touch information may be expressed as a different touch pattern when at least one of the touch position, touch area, touch type, or number of touches is different.
  • the HMD may determine that the HMD is worn on the user's head.
  • the first pattern may be, for example, the touch position is a first position, the touch area is a first size or more, the touch shape has a first shape, the number of touches is a first number or more, or It can represent a combination state.
  • the touch position is the first position, at least one touch cell arranged in the end direction of the wearable part among the plurality of touch cells arranged on the inner surface of the wearable part is connected to the user's ear or the ear. It may indicate contact with the adjacent temple area.
  • the state in which the touch area is greater than or equal to the first size indicates a state in which the total area of at least one touch cell contacted among the plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surface of the wearing unit is greater than or equal to the first size. You can.
  • the state in which the touch shape has the first shape is when the arrangement shape of at least one touched touch cell among the plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surface of the wearing unit corresponds to the first shape. It can indicate status.
  • the first shape may be, for example, a square or oval with one long side.
  • the state in which the number of touches is greater than or equal to the first number may indicate a state in which the number of at least one touched touch cell among a plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surface of the wearing unit is greater than or equal to the first number.
  • the HMD When the HMD is worn on the user's head (i.e., the pattern of the touch input has the first pattern), the HMD changes the pattern of the touch input from the first pattern to the second pattern in operation 910. You can determine whether it has been done.
  • the second pattern may be, for example, the touch position is a second position different from the first position, the touch area is less than the first size, or the touch shape has a second shape different from the first shape. Alternatively, it may indicate a state in which the number of touches is less than the first number, or a combination thereof.
  • the HMD may re-perform operation 910. For example, the HMD may monitor changes in the pattern of the touch input continuously or at regular intervals until the pattern of the touch input changes.
  • the HMD may maintain activation of the system of the HMD and deactivate the display in operation 920.
  • the HMD can maintain the processor's activation level and data loaded into memory. Additionally, the HMD can turn off the screen of the display.
  • the HMD may determine whether the touch input has ended. For example, the HMD can check whether the touch input is not detected through the touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the wearable unit.
  • the HMD may enter the HMD's system into a rest period in operation 940. For example, if the touch input is not detected through the touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the wearable unit, the HMD may determine that the HMD has been removed from the user's head. Accordingly, the HMD can control the processor to operate from a normal mode to a low-power mode, thereby lowering the activation level of the processor.
  • the HMD may determine whether the pattern of the touch input has changed from the second pattern to the first pattern in operation 950. For example, the HMD may determine whether a touch input detected through the touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the wearable unit has the first pattern again.
  • the HMD may re-perform operation 920. For example, the HMD may keep the HMD's system activated and the display deactivated.
  • the HMD may activate the display in operation 960. For example, if the touch input detected through the touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the wearing unit again has the first pattern, the HMD may determine that the HMD has been reworn on the user's head. Accordingly, the HMD can turn on the screen of the display again.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a method of operating an HMD when the wearing parts of the HMD are separated according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • an HMD (e.g., HMD 200 in Figures 2 and 3 or HMD 400 in Figures 4 and 5) has a main frame (e.g., HMD 200 in Figures 2 and 3) so that the user can wear it.
  • a wearing part e.g., the wearing parts 221 and 222 of FIGS. 2 and 3, the wearing parts of FIGS. 4 and 5) connected to a portion of the main frame 210 or the main frame 410 of FIGS. 4 and 5. It may include (421, 422) or the wearing part 600 of FIG. 6.
  • At least one of the wearable parts includes a touch circuit disposed on the inner side (e.g., the touch circuits 291 and 292 in FIG. 3, the touch circuits 491 and 492 in FIGS.
  • the wearing state of the HMD can be detected using 613) (or the third part 633 of the integrated touch circuit).
  • at least one of the wearable parts may have a touch circuit (e.g., the second touch circuit 611 of FIG. 6 (or the first part 631 of the integrated touch circuit 631)) or a conductor disposed on the outer surface. .
  • the HMD may determine whether separation of the wearing parts has been detected. For example, a situation in which the wearing parts are separated may indicate a situation in which the wearing parts are spaced apart from each other, and when the wearing parts are provided in the form of legs of glasses, it may represent a situation in which the legs of the glasses are spread out.
  • the HMD detects a first touch input through a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearable parts, and a touch circuit disposed on the outer surface of another one of the wearable parts. If the pattern of the first touch input and the second touch input is changed or terminated while the second touch input is detected, it may be determined that the wearable parts are separated.
  • the HMD has a first pattern of touch input detected through a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearable parts, and the pattern of the touch input is the first pattern.
  • the pattern is changed to the second pattern or the touch input is terminated, it may be determined that the wearing parts are separated.
  • a situation in which the pattern of the touch input has the first pattern is, for example, a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearable parts and a conductor disposed on the outer surface of the other one of the wearable parts. It can indicate a situation where a person is close to or in contact with a body.
  • a situation in which the pattern of the touch input has the second pattern is, for example, a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearable parts is disposed on the outer surface of the other one of the wearable parts. It can represent a situation where the conductor is separated by a certain distance or more.
  • the HMD may re-perform operation 1010. For example, the HMD may monitor the separation of the wearing parts continuously or at regular intervals until the separation of the wearing parts is detected.
  • the HMD may perform preprocessing in operation 1020.
  • the HMD may increase the activation level of the processor.
  • the HMD can control the processor to operate from a low-power mode to a normal mode.
  • the HMD can increase the driving frequency of the processor.
  • the processor may include, for example, an application processor.
  • the HMD may pre-load execution data of a designated application into memory to prevent additional delays such as memory loading.
  • the HMD may determine whether a touch input has been detected.
  • the HMD can detect the touch input using a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearable parts. For example, when an HMD is worn on a user's head, a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearing units may be in contact with a portion of the head and may detect the touch input according to the contact. there is. Additionally, the HMD may acquire touch information corresponding to the touch input and detect the wearing state of the HMD using the acquired touch information.
  • the HMD may re-perform operation 1010.
  • the HMD may activate the display in operation 1040 and display information through the activated display. For example, when the touch input is detected, the HMD may determine that the HMD is worn on the user's head, turn on the screen of the display to perform an operation according to wearing the HMD, and display the operation on the screen. Information can be displayed.
  • the HMD may deactivate the display and lower the activation level of the processor. For example, the HMD can turn off the screen of the display. Additionally, the processor can be controlled to operate from a normal mode to a low-power mode. Alternatively, the HMD may lower the driving frequency of the processor.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining another method of operating the HMD when the wearing parts of the HMD are separated according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • an HMD (e.g., HMD 200 in Figures 2 and 3 or HMD 400 in Figures 4 and 5) has a main frame (e.g., HMD 200 in Figures 2 and 3) so that the user can wear it.
  • a wearing part e.g., the wearing parts 221 and 222 of FIGS. 2 and 3, the wearing parts of FIGS. 4 and 5) connected to a portion of the main frame 210 or the main frame 410 of FIGS. 4 and 5. It may include (421, 422) or the wearing part 600 of FIG. 6.
  • At least one of the wearable parts includes a touch circuit disposed on the inner side (e.g., the touch circuits 291 and 292 in FIG. 3, the touch circuits 491 and 492 in FIGS.
  • the wearing state of the HMD can be detected using 613) (or the third part 633 of the integrated touch circuit).
  • at least one of the wearable parts may have a touch circuit (e.g., the second touch circuit 611 of FIG. 6 (or the first part 631 of the integrated touch circuit 631)) or a conductor disposed on the outer surface. .
  • the HMD may determine whether separation of the wearing parts has been detected. For example, a situation in which the wearing parts are separated may indicate a situation in which the wearing parts are spaced apart from each other, and when the wearing parts are provided in the form of legs of glasses, it may represent a situation in which the legs of the glasses are spread out.
  • the HMD detects a first touch input through a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearable parts, and a touch circuit disposed on the outer surface of another one of the wearable parts. If the pattern of the first touch input and the second touch input is changed or terminated while the second touch input is detected, it may be determined that the wearable parts are separated.
  • the HMD has a first pattern of touch input detected through a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearable parts, and the pattern of the touch input is the first pattern.
  • the pattern is changed to the second pattern or the touch input is terminated, it may be determined that the wearing parts are separated.
  • a situation in which the pattern of the touch input has the first pattern is, for example, a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearable parts and a conductor disposed on the outer surface of the other one of the wearable parts. It can indicate a situation where a person is close to or in contact with a body.
  • a situation in which the pattern of the touch input has the second pattern is, for example, a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearable parts is disposed on the outer surface of the other one of the wearable parts. It can represent a situation where the conductor is separated by a certain distance or more.
  • the HMD may re-perform operation 1110. For example, the HMD may monitor the separation of the wearing parts continuously or at regular intervals until the separation of the wearing parts is detected.
  • the HMD may perform preprocessing and activate the display in operation 1120.
  • the HMD may increase the activation level of the processor.
  • the HMD can control the processor to operate from a low-power mode to a normal mode.
  • the HMD can increase the driving frequency of the processor.
  • the processor may include, for example, an application processor.
  • the HMD may preload execution data of a designated application into memory to prevent additional delays such as memory loading. Additionally, the HMD can turn on the screen of the display.
  • the HMD may determine whether a touch input has been detected.
  • the HMD can detect the touch input using a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearable parts. For example, when an HMD is worn on a user's head, a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearing units may be in contact with a portion of the head and may detect the touch input according to the contact. there is. Additionally, the HMD may acquire touch information corresponding to the touch input and detect the wearing state of the HMD using the acquired touch information.
  • the HMD may re-perform operation 1110.
  • the HMD may display information through the activated display in operation 1140. For example, when the touch input is detected, the HMD may determine that the HMD is worn on the user's head, and in order to perform an operation according to wearing the HMD, information according to the operation may be displayed on the screen of the display. You can.
  • the HMD may deactivate the display and lower the activation level of the processor. For example, the HMD can turn off the screen of the display. Additionally, the processor can be controlled to operate from a normal mode to a low-power mode. Alternatively, the HMD may lower the driving frequency of the processor.
  • the HMD may deactivate the display if the touch input is not detected within a specified time (eg, 10 seconds) after the separation of the wearable parts is detected. For example, the HMD can turn off the screen of the display.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a method for detecting contact and separation of wearing parts of an HMD according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the HMD 1200 (e.g., the HMD 200 in Figures 2 and 3 or the HMD 400 in Figures 4 and 5) has a main frame (e.g., HMD 200 in Figures 2 and 5) so that the user can wear it.
  • Wearing parts 1210 and 1220 connected to a portion of the main frame 210 in Figure 3 or the main frame 410 in Figures 4 and 5 (e.g., wearing parts 221 and 222 in Figures 2 and 3, It may include the wearing parts 421 and 422 of FIGS. 4 and 5 or the wearing part 600 of FIG. 6 .
  • At least one of the wearing parts 1210 and 1220 has a touch circuit 1211 disposed on the inner side (e.g., the touch circuits 291 and 292 in FIG. 3, FIG. 4 and The wearing state of the HMD 1200 can be detected using the touch circuits 491 and 492 of FIG. 5 or the first touch circuit 613 of FIG. 6 (or the third part 633 of the touch circuit formed integrally). You can.
  • at least one of the wearing parts 1210 and 1220 e.g., the second wearing part 1220
  • has a touch circuit 1221 e.g., the second touch circuit 611 of FIG. 6 (or integrally) on the outer surface.
  • the first portion 631) of the formed touch circuit may be disposed.
  • the HMD 1200 when the HMD 1200 detects separation of the wearing parts 1210 and 1220, it may determine that the wearing parts 1210 and 1220 are spaced apart from each other. For example, as shown in FIG. 12 , when the wearing parts 1210 and 1220 are provided in the form of glasses legs, the HMD 1200 may determine that the glasses legs are spread.
  • the HMD 1200 includes a touch circuit (e.g., a first touch circuit) disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearable parts 1210 and 1220 (e.g., the first wearable part 1210).
  • a first touch input is detected through the circuit 1211, and a touch circuit (e.g., a touch circuit) disposed on the outer surface of another of the wearable parts 1210 and 1220 (e.g., the second wearing part 1220).
  • the wearing parts 1210 and 1220 are separated. It can be judged that it has been done.
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating another method for detecting contact and separation of wearing parts of an HMD according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the HMD 1300 (e.g., the HMD 200 in FIGS. 2 and 3 or the HMD 400 in FIGS. 4 and 5) has a main frame (e.g., HMD 200 in FIGS. 2 and 3) so that the user can wear it.
  • Wearing parts 1310 and 1320 connected to a portion of the main frame 210 in Figure 3 or the main frame 410 in Figures 4 and 5 (e.g., wearing parts 221 and 222 in Figures 2 and 3, It may include the wearing parts 421 and 422 of FIGS. 4 and 5 or the wearing part 600 of FIG. 6 .
  • At least one of the wearing parts 1310 and 1320 has a touch circuit 1311 disposed on the inner side (e.g., the touch circuits 291 and 292 in FIG. 3, FIG. 4 and The wearing state of the HMD 1300 can be detected using the touch circuits 491 and 492 of FIG. 5 or the first touch circuit 613 of FIG. 6 (or the third part 633 of the touch circuit formed integrally). You can. Additionally, a conductor 1321 may be disposed on the outer surface of at least one of the wearing parts 1310 and 1320 (eg, the second wearing part 1320).
  • the HMD 1300 when the HMD 1300 detects separation of the wearing parts 1310 and 1320, it may determine that the wearing parts 1310 and 1320 are spaced apart from each other. For example, as shown in FIG. 13 , when the wearing parts 1310 and 1320 are provided in the form of glasses legs, the HMD 1300 may determine that the glasses legs are spread.
  • the HMD 1300 detects the sensor through the touch circuit 1311 disposed on the inner surface of any one of the wearable parts 1310 and 1320 (e.g., the first wearing part 1310).
  • the pattern of the touch input has a first pattern
  • the pattern of the touch input changes from the first pattern to the second pattern or the touch input is terminated it is determined that the wearable parts 1310 and 1320 are separated. can do.
  • a situation in which the pattern of the touch input has the first pattern is, for example, a touch disposed on the inner surface of any one of the wearing parts 1310 and 1320 (e.g., the first wearing part 1310).
  • a situation in which the pattern of the touch input has the second pattern is, for example, disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearing parts 1310 and 1320 (e.g., the first wearing part 1310).
  • a situation in which the touch circuit 1311 is separated from the conductor 1321 disposed on the outer surface of another of the wearing parts 1310 and 1320 (e.g., the second wearing part 1320) by a certain distance or more. can indicate.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining a method of operating an HMD when wearing parts of the HMD are in contact according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the HMD (e.g., the HMD 200 in Figures 2 and 3, the HMD 400 in Figures 4 and 5, the HMD 1200 in Figure 12, or the HMD 1300 in Figure 13) is used by the user.
  • a wearing portion e.g., the main frame 210 in FIGS. 2 and 3 or the main frame 410 in FIGS. 4 and 5) is connected to a part of the main frame so that it can be worn.
  • Wearing parts 221 and 222, wearing parts 421 and 422 of FIGS. 4 and 5, wearing parts 600 of FIG. 6, wearing parts 1210 and 1220 of FIG. 12 or wearing parts 1310 of FIG. 13, 1320) may be included.
  • At least one of the wearable parts includes a touch circuit disposed on the inner side (e.g., the touch circuits 291 and 292 in FIG. 3, the touch circuits 491 and 492 in FIGS. 4 and 5, and the first touch circuit in FIG. 6 ( 613) (or the third part 633 of the integrated touch circuit), the first touch circuit 1211 of FIG. 12, or the touch circuit 1311 of FIG. 13) can be used to detect the wearing state of the HMD. .
  • at least one of the wearable parts has a touch circuit (e.g., the second touch circuit 611 of FIG. 6 (or the first part 631 of the integrated touch circuit) of FIG. 6 or the second touch circuit of FIG. 12) on the outer surface. (1221)) or a conductor (eg, conductor 1321 in FIG. 13) may be disposed.
  • the HMD may determine whether contact between the wearing parts is detected. For example, a situation in which the wearing parts are in contact may represent a situation in which the legs of the glasses are folded when the wearing parts are provided in the form of legs of glasses.
  • the HMD detects a first touch input through a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearable parts, and a touch circuit disposed on the outer surface of another one of the wearable parts. When a second touch input is detected, it may be determined that the wearing parts are in contact.
  • the HMD when the pattern of a touch input detected through a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of any one of the wearable parts has a designated pattern (e.g., a first pattern), the HMD makes contact with the wearable parts. It can be judged that it has been done.
  • a situation in which the pattern of the touch input has the specified pattern is, for example, a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearable parts and a conductor disposed on the outer surface of the other one of the wearable parts. It can indicate a situation where one is close to or in contact with.
  • the HMD may re-perform operation 1410. For example, the HMD may monitor the contact of the wearing parts continuously or at regular intervals until the contact of the wearing parts is detected.
  • the HMD may deactivate the display and lower the activation level of the processor in operation 1420. For example, the HMD can turn off the screen of the display. Additionally, the processor can be controlled to operate from a normal mode to a low-power mode. Alternatively, the HMD may lower the driving frequency of the processor.
  • FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining another method of operating an HMD when wearing parts of the HMD are in contact, according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the HMD (e.g., the HMD 200 in Figures 2 and 3, the HMD 400 in Figures 4 and 5, the HMD 1200 in Figure 12, or the HMD 1300 in Figure 13) is used by the user.
  • a wearing portion e.g., the main frame 210 in FIGS. 2 and 3 or the main frame 410 in FIGS. 4 and 5
  • wearing parts 600 of FIG. 6 wearing parts 1210 and 1220 of FIG. 12 or wearing parts 1310 of FIG. 13, 1320
  • At least one of the wearable parts includes a touch circuit disposed on the inner side (e.g., the touch circuits 291 and 292 in FIG. 3, the touch circuits 491 and 492 in FIGS. 4 and 5, and the first touch circuit in FIG. 6 ( 613) (or the third part 633 of the integrated touch circuit), the first touch circuit 1211 of FIG. 12, or the touch circuit 1311 of FIG. 13) can be used to detect the wearing state of the HMD. .
  • at least one of the wearable parts has a touch circuit (e.g., the second touch circuit 611 of FIG. 6 (or the first part 631 of the integrated touch circuit) of FIG. 6 or the second touch circuit of FIG. 12) on the outer surface. (1221)) or a conductor (eg, conductor 1321 in FIG. 13) may be disposed.
  • the HMD may determine whether contact between the wearing parts is detected. For example, a situation in which the wearing parts are in contact may represent a situation in which the legs of the glasses are folded when the wearing parts are provided in the form of legs of glasses. According to one embodiment, the HMD detects a first touch input through a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearable parts, and a touch circuit disposed on the outer surface of another one of the wearable parts. When a second touch input is detected, it may be determined that the wearing parts are in contact.
  • the HMD when the pattern of a touch input detected through a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of any one of the wearable parts has a designated pattern (e.g., a first pattern), the HMD makes contact with the wearable parts. It can be judged that it has been done.
  • a situation in which the pattern of the touch input has the specified pattern is, for example, a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearable parts and a conductor disposed on the outer surface of the other one of the wearable parts. It can indicate a situation where one is close to or in contact with.
  • the HMD may re-perform operation 1510. For example, the HMD may monitor the contact of the wearing parts continuously or at regular intervals until the contact of the wearing parts is detected.
  • the HMD may deactivate the display in operation 1520. For example, the HMD can turn off the screen of the display.
  • the HMD may determine whether the HMD is seated in the case.
  • the case can accommodate the HMD and protect the HMD from external shock.
  • the case may include a sensor that can check whether the HMD is seated.
  • the case may include a charging terminal, and when the HMD is seated, the HMD may be connected to the charging terminal. In this case, the case may charge the HMD.
  • the HMD may re-perform operation 1520. For example, the HMD may remain inactive with the display.
  • the HMD may lower the activation level of the processor in operation 1540.
  • the HMD can control the processor to operate from a normal mode to a low-power mode.
  • the HMD may lower the driving frequency of the processor.
  • FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining a method of operating an HMD when the HMD enters a charger according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the HMD (e.g., the HMD 200 in Figures 2 and 3, the HMD 400 in Figures 4 and 5, the HMD 1200 in Figure 12, or the HMD 1300 in Figure 13) is used by the user.
  • a wearing portion e.g., the main frame 210 in FIGS. 2 and 3 or the main frame 410 in FIGS. 4 and 5
  • wearing parts 600 of FIG. 6 wearing parts 1210 and 1220 of FIG. 12 or wearing parts 1310 of FIG. 13, 1320
  • At least one of the wearable parts includes a touch circuit disposed on the inner side (e.g., the touch circuits 291 and 292 in FIG. 3, the touch circuits 491 and 492 in FIGS. 4 and 5, and the first touch circuit in FIG. 6 ( 613) (or the third part 633 of the integrated touch circuit), the first touch circuit 1211 of FIG. 12, or the touch circuit 1311 of FIG. 13) can be used to detect the wearing state of the HMD. .
  • at least one of the wearable parts has a touch circuit (e.g., the second touch circuit 611 of FIG. 6 (or the first part 631 of the integrated touch circuit) of FIG. 6 or the second touch circuit of FIG. 12) on the outer surface. (1221)) or a conductor (eg, conductor 1321 in FIG. 13) may be disposed.
  • the HMD may determine whether the HMD has entered the charger. For example, when the HMD is connected to the charging terminal of the charger, the HMD and the charger may determine that the HMD has entered the charger.
  • the HMD may re-perform operation 1610. For example, the HMD may monitor entry into the charger continuously or at regular intervals until the HMD enters the charger.
  • the HMD may determine whether contact with the wearing parts has been detected in operation 1620. For example, a situation in which the wearing parts are in contact may represent a situation in which the legs of the glasses are folded when the wearing parts are provided in the form of legs of glasses. According to one embodiment, the HMD detects a first touch input through a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearable parts, and a touch circuit disposed on the outer surface of another one of the wearable parts. When a second touch input is detected, it may be determined that the wearing parts are in contact.
  • the HMD when the pattern of a touch input detected through a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of any one of the wearable parts has a designated pattern (e.g., a first pattern), the HMD makes contact with the wearable parts. It can be judged that it has been done.
  • a situation in which the pattern of the touch input has the specified pattern is, for example, a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearable parts and a conductor disposed on the outer surface of the other one of the wearable parts. It can indicate a situation where one is close to or in contact with.
  • the HMD may receive charging power from the charger in operation 1630.
  • the charger can charge an HMD.
  • the HMD may provide a notification in operation 1640. For example, if the HMD determines that no contact between the wearing parts is detected, it may determine that the glasses have entered the charger with the legs not properly stacked. That is, the HMD may determine that the HMD is incompletely connected to the charging terminal of the charger. Accordingly, the HMD can provide information indicating that the HMD has been incompletely inserted into the charger. According to one embodiment, the HMD may transmit the information to an external electronic device (e.g., a smartphone) connected through a communication circuit, and the external electronic device may output the information through at least one of a display or a speaker. .
  • an external electronic device e.g., a smartphone
  • the HMD may output the information through a speaker or output a signal corresponding to the information through a light emitting unit (eg, LED).
  • the charger may output the information through a speaker or output a signal corresponding to the information through a light emitting unit (eg, LED).
  • FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining a method of operating an HMD related to a wearing posture of the HMD according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the HMD (e.g., the HMD 200 in Figures 2 and 3, the HMD 400 in Figures 4 and 5, the HMD 1200 in Figure 12, or the HMD 1300 in Figure 13) is used by the user.
  • a wearing portion e.g., the main frame 210 in FIGS. 2 and 3 or the main frame 410 in FIGS. 4 and 5
  • wearing parts 221 and 222, wearing parts 421 and 422 of FIGS. 4 and 5, wearing parts 600 of FIG. 6, wearing parts 1210 and 1220 of FIG. 12 or wearing parts 1310 of FIG. 13, 1320) may be included.
  • At least one of the wearable parts includes a touch circuit disposed on the inner side (e.g., the touch circuits 291 and 292 in FIG. 3, the touch circuits 491 and 492 in FIGS. 4 and 5, and the first touch circuit in FIG. 6 ( 613) (or the third part 633 of the integrated touch circuit), the first touch circuit 1211 of FIG. 12, or the touch circuit 1311 of FIG. 13) can be used to detect the wearing state of the HMD. .
  • a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearing units may be in contact with a portion of the head and may detect a touch input according to the contact. .
  • the HMD may acquire touch information corresponding to the touch input and detect the wearing state of the HMD using the acquired touch information.
  • the touch information may include, for example, touch location (e.g., location of a touched touch cell among touch cells), touch area (e.g., total area of touched touch cells among touch cells), and touch type (e.g., touch among touch cells). It may include at least one of the arrangement type of the touch cells) or the number of touches (e.g., the number of touched touch cells among touch cells).
  • the touch information may be referred to as a touch pattern expressed by at least one of touch location, touch area, touch type, or number of touches. For example, the touch information may be expressed as a different touch pattern when at least one of the touch position, touch area, touch type, or number of touches is different.
  • the HMD may determine that the HMD is worn on the user's head.
  • the first pattern may be, for example, the touch position is a first position, the touch area is a first size or more, the touch shape has a first shape, the number of touches is a first number or more, or It can represent a combination state.
  • the touch position is the first position, at least one touch cell arranged in the end direction of the wearable part among the plurality of touch cells arranged on the inner surface of at least one of the wearable parts is used by the user. It may indicate contact with the ear or the part of the temple adjacent to the ear.
  • the state in which the touch area is equal to or greater than the first size means that the total area of at least one touch cell contacted among the plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearing units is the first size. It can indicate an abnormal state.
  • the state in which the touch shape has the first shape means that the arrangement shape of at least one touch cell contacted among the plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearable parts is the first shape. It can represent the state corresponding to the shape.
  • the first shape may be, for example, a square or oval with one long side.
  • the state in which the number of touches is greater than or equal to the first number means that the number of at least one touch cell contacted among a plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearing units is greater than or equal to the first number. It can indicate status.
  • the HMD may determine the distance between the lens of the HMD and the user's eyes.
  • the HMD can calculate the distance between the lens and the eye using the acquired touch information.
  • the HMD may determine the distance between the lens and the eye based on at least one of the touch location, the touch area, the touch type, or the number of touches.
  • the HMD may determine the distance between the lens and the eye using history information of touch input detected through the touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearable parts.
  • the touch input history information may include touch information corresponding to a touch input detected through the touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearing parts when the user previously wore the HMD. You can. That is, the touch input history information may include the touch information acquired at a previous time or accumulated up to a previous time.
  • the HMD may determine whether the determined distance is within a reference range. For example, the HMD may determine whether the distance between the lens and the eye is within the reference range.
  • the HMD may display information through the display in operation 1730. For example, if it is determined that the distance between the lens and the eye is within the reference range, the HMD may determine that the HMD is normally worn on the user's head. Accordingly, in order to perform an operation according to wearing the HMD, the HMD may display information according to the operation on the screen of the display.
  • the HMD may provide a notification in operation 1740. For example, if it is determined that the distance between the lens and the eye is not within the reference range, the HMD may determine that the HMD is abnormally worn on the user's head. Accordingly, the HMD can provide information indicating that the HMD is abnormally worn on the user's head. For example, the HMD can display the information on the display screen or output it through speakers. Afterwards, the HMD may re-perform operation 1720. For example, the HMD can continuously or at regular intervals monitor whether the HMD is properly worn on the user's head.
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining another method of operating an HMD related to the wearing posture of the HMD according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the HMD (e.g., the HMD 200 in Figures 2 and 3, the HMD 400 in Figures 4 and 5, the HMD 1200 in Figure 12, or the HMD 1300 in Figure 13) is used by the user.
  • a wearing portion e.g., the main frame 210 in FIGS. 2 and 3 or the main frame 410 in FIGS. 4 and 5
  • wearing parts 600 of FIG. 6 wearing parts 1210 and 1220 of FIG. 12 or wearing parts 1310 of FIG. 13, 1320
  • At least one of the wearable parts includes a touch circuit disposed on the inner side (e.g., the touch circuits 291 and 292 in FIG. 3, the touch circuits 491 and 492 in FIGS. 4 and 5, and the first touch circuit in FIG. 6 ( 613) (or the third part 633 of the integrated touch circuit), the first touch circuit 1211 of FIG. 12, or the touch circuit 1311 of FIG. 13) can be used to detect the wearing state of the HMD. .
  • a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearing units may be in contact with a portion of the head and may detect a touch input according to the contact. .
  • the HMD may acquire touch information corresponding to the touch input and detect the wearing state of the HMD using the acquired touch information.
  • the touch information may include, for example, touch location (e.g., location of a touched touch cell among touch cells), touch area (e.g., total area of touched touch cells among touch cells), and touch type (e.g., touch among touch cells). It may include at least one of the arrangement type of the touch cells) or the number of touches (e.g., the number of touched touch cells among touch cells).
  • the touch information may be referred to as a touch pattern expressed by at least one of touch location, touch area, touch type, or number of touches. For example, the touch information may be expressed as a different touch pattern when at least one of the touch position, touch area, touch type, or number of touches is different.
  • the HMD may determine that the HMD is worn on the user's head.
  • the first pattern may be, for example, the touch position is a first position, the touch area is a first size or more, the touch shape has a first shape, the number of touches is a first number or more, or It can represent a combination state.
  • the touch position is the first position, at least one touch cell arranged in the end direction of the wearable part among the plurality of touch cells arranged on the inner surface of at least one of the wearable parts is used by the user. It may indicate contact with the ear or the part of the temple adjacent to the ear.
  • the state in which the touch area is equal to or greater than the first size means that the total area of at least one touch cell contacted among the plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearing units is the first size. It can indicate an abnormal state.
  • the state in which the touch shape has the first shape means that the arrangement shape of at least one touch cell contacted among the plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearable parts is the first shape. It can represent the state corresponding to the shape.
  • the first shape may be, for example, a square or oval with one long side.
  • the state in which the number of touches is greater than or equal to the first number means that the number of at least one touch cell contacted among a plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearing units is greater than or equal to the first number. It can indicate status.
  • the HMD may determine the distance between the HMD's lenses and the user's eyes.
  • the HMD can calculate the distance between the lens and the eye using the acquired touch information.
  • the HMD may determine the distance between the lens and the eye based on at least one of the touch location, the touch area, the touch type, or the number of touches.
  • the HMD may determine the distance between the lens and the eye using history information of touch input detected through the touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearable parts.
  • the touch input history information may include touch information corresponding to a touch input detected through the touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearing parts when the user previously wore the HMD. You can. That is, the touch input history information may include the touch information acquired at a previous time or accumulated up to a previous time.
  • the HMD may determine whether the determined distance is within a reference range. For example, the HMD may determine whether the distance between the lens and the eye is within the reference range.
  • the HMD may display information through the display in operation 1830. For example, if it is determined that the distance between the lens and the eye is within the reference range, the HMD may determine that the HMD is normally worn on the user's head. Accordingly, in order to perform an operation according to wearing the HMD, the HMD may display information according to the operation on the screen of the display.
  • the HMD may adjust the focal length of the lens in operation 1840. For example, if the determined distance is smaller than the reference range, the HMD may determine that the distance between the lens and the eye is close. In this case, the HMD can closely adjust the focal length of the lens. As another example, if the determined distance is greater than the reference range, the HMD may determine that the distance between the lens and the eye is long. In this case, the HMD can adjust the focal length of the lens to a greater distance. Afterwards, the HMD may re-perform operation 1820. For example, the HMD can continuously or at regular intervals monitor whether the HMD is properly worn on the user's head.
  • FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining another method of operating an HMD related to a wearing posture of the HMD according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the HMD (e.g., the HMD 200 in Figures 2 and 3, the HMD 400 in Figures 4 and 5, the HMD 1200 in Figure 12, or the HMD 1300 in Figure 13) is used by the user.
  • a wearing portion e.g., the main frame 210 in FIGS. 2 and 3 or the main frame 410 in FIGS. 4 and 5) is connected to a part of the main frame so that it can be worn.
  • Wearing parts 221 and 222, wearing parts 421 and 422 of FIGS. 4 and 5, wearing parts 600 of FIG. 6, wearing parts 1210 and 1220 of FIG. 12 or wearing parts 1310 of FIG. 13, 1320) may be included.
  • the wearable parts include touch circuits disposed on the inner side (e.g., touch circuits 291 and 292 in Figure 3, touch circuits 491 and 492 in Figures 4 and 5, and first touch circuit 613 in Figure 6 ( Alternatively, the wearing state of the HMD can be detected using the third part 633 of the integrated touch circuit, the first touch circuit 1211 of FIG. 12, or the touch circuit 1311 of FIG. 13). For example, when the HMD is worn on the user's head, the touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the wearing parts may contact a portion of the head and detect a touch input according to the contact.
  • the first touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the first wearable part among the wearable parts detects the first touch input according to the contact
  • the second touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the second wearable part among the wearable parts Can detect a second touch input according to the contact.
  • the HMD may determine the wearing state of each of the wearing parts. For example, the HMD determines the wearing state of the first wearable part using the first touch information corresponding to the first touch input detected through the first touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the first wearable part among the wearable parts. And, the wearing state of the second wearing part can be determined using second touch information corresponding to the second touch input detected through the second touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the second wearing part among the wearing parts.
  • the first touch information and the second touch information include, for example, a touch location (e.g., the position of a touched touch cell among touch cells), a touch area (e.g., the total area of a touched touch cell among touch cells), and touch It may include at least one of a shape (e.g., arrangement form of touched touch cells among touch cells) or the number of touches (e.g., number of touch cells among touch cells).
  • the first touch information and the second touch information may be referred to as a touch pattern expressed by at least one of a touch location, touch area, touch shape, or number of touches. For example, when the first touch information and the second touch information are different in at least one of the touch location, touch area, touch type, or number of touches, the touch patterns may be expressed as being different.
  • the HMD may determine whether the deviation of the wearing positions of the wearing parts is within a reference range.
  • the HMD may determine the wearing position of the first wearing part using the first touch information, and determine the wearing position of the second wearing part using the second touch information.
  • the wearing position may correspond to the distance between the lens of the HMD and the user's eyes. For example, when the wearing positions of the wearing parts are pulled toward the user's eyes, the distance between the lens and the eye is smaller than the reference range, and when the wearing positions of the wearing parts are worn far from the user's eyes, the The distance between the lens and the eye may be greater than the reference range.
  • the deviation of the wearing positions of the wearing parts may be, for example, when the wearing position of the first wearing part is the first position and the wearing position of the second wearing part is the second position, the first position and the second position. It can correspond to the difference value of .
  • the HMD may display information through the display in operation 1930. For example, if it is determined that the deviation of the wearing positions of the wearing parts is within the reference range, the HMD may determine that the HMD is normally worn on the user's head. Accordingly, in order to perform an operation according to wearing the HMD, the HMD may display information according to the operation on the screen of the display.
  • the HMD may provide a notification in operation 1940. For example, if it is determined that the deviation of the wearing positions of the wearing parts is not within the reference range, the HMD may determine that the HMD is worn abnormally (eg, crookedly) on the user's head. Accordingly, the HMD can provide information indicating that the HMD is abnormally worn on the user's head. For example, the HMD can display the information on the display screen or output it through speakers. Afterwards, the HMD may re-perform operation 1920. For example, the HMD can continuously or at regular intervals monitor whether the HMD is properly worn on the user's head.
  • the HMD may determine that the HMD is worn abnormally (eg, crookedly) on the user's head. Accordingly, the HMD can provide information indicating that the HMD is abnormally worn on the user's head. For example, the HMD can display the information on the display screen or output it through speakers. Afterwards, the HMD may re-perform operation 1920. For example
  • a head mounted display device e.g., the HMD 200 of FIGS. 2 and 3, the HMD 400 of FIGS. 4 and 5, the HMD 1200 of FIG. 12, or the HMD 1200 of FIG. 13
  • the method of detecting the wearing state of the HMD (1300) includes wearing parts (e.g., wearing parts 221 and 222 in FIGS. 2 and 3) that are respectively connected to both ends of the frame of the head mounted display device and extend in one direction. , at least one of the wearing parts 421 and 422 of FIGS. 4 and 5, the wearing part 600 of FIG. 6, the wearing parts 1210 and 1220 of FIG. 12, or the wearing parts 1310 and 1320 of FIG. 13.
  • a first touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the wearing part e.g., the touch circuits 291 and 292 in FIG. 3, the touch circuits 491 and 492 in FIGS. 4 and 5, and the first touch circuit 613 in FIG. 6).
  • An operation of detecting a first touch input through (or the third part 633 of the touch circuit formed integrally), the first touch circuit 1211 of FIG. 12, or the touch circuit 1311 of FIG. 13 e.g., FIG. Operation 730 of 7, operation 830 of FIG. 8, operation 1030 of FIG. 10, or operation 1130 of FIG. 11
  • This may include an operation of determining a wearing state of the head mounted display device.
  • a method of detecting a wearing state of a head mounted display device includes, before detecting the first touch input, a second touch circuit disposed on the outer surface of at least one of the wearing parts (e.g., in FIG. 6).
  • an operation of activating the display of the head mounted display device eg, operation 740 of FIG. 7 may be further included.
  • a method of detecting a wearing state of a head mounted display device includes, before detecting the first touch input, a second touch circuit disposed on the outer surface of at least one of the wearing parts (e.g., in FIG. 6).
  • a method for detecting a wearing state of a head mounted display device maintains activation of the system of the head mounted display device when the pattern of the first touch input changes from a first pattern to a second pattern,
  • An operation of deactivating the display of the head mounted display device e.g., operation 920 of FIG. 9
  • a pattern of the first touch input in a state where the pattern of the first touch input is changed from the first pattern to the second pattern.
  • an operation of activating the display eg, operation 960 of FIG. 9 may be further included.
  • a method of detecting a wearing state of a head mounted display device includes, before detecting the first touch input, a second touch circuit disposed on an outer surface of at least one of the first touch circuit and the wearable portion. (e.g., the second touch circuit 611 of FIG. 6 (or the first part 631 of the touch circuit formed integrally) or the second touch circuit 1221 of FIG. 12) or a conductor (e.g., the conductor of FIG. 13)
  • An operation of detecting separation of the worn parts using a sieve 1321 e.g., operation 1010 of FIG. 10
  • an operation of increasing the activation level of the processor of the head mounted display device when the worn parts are separated e.g., operation 1010 of FIG. : Operation 1020 of FIG. 10
  • operation of activating the display of the head mounted display device e.g., operation 1040 of FIG. 10. More may be included.
  • a method of detecting a wearing state of a head mounted display device includes, before detecting the first touch input, a second touch circuit disposed on an outer surface of at least one of the first touch circuit and the wearable portion. (e.g., the second touch circuit 611 of FIG. 6 (or the first part 631 of the touch circuit formed integrally) or the second touch circuit 1221 of FIG. 12) or a conductor (e.g., the conductor of FIG. 13)
  • An operation of detecting separation of the worn parts using a sieve 1321 e.g., operation 1110 of FIG. 11).
  • the activation level of the processor of the head mounted display device is increased and the head mounted display device is activated.
  • the method may further include activating the display of the display device (e.g., operation 1120 of FIG. 11 ), and deactivating the display if the first touch input is not detected within a specified time after the wearable parts are separated. there is.
  • a method of detecting a wearing state of a head mounted display device includes the first touch circuit and a second touch circuit disposed on an outer surface of at least one of the wearing parts (e.g., the second touch in FIG. 6).
  • a circuit 611 or the first portion 631 of the integrated touch circuit or the second touch circuit 1221 of FIG. 12
  • a conductor e.g., the conductor 1321 of FIG. 13
  • An operation to detect contact of the wearable parts e.g., operation 1410 of FIG. 14
  • an operation to deactivate the display of the head mounted display device and lower the activation level of the processor of the head mounted display device e.g. operation 1420 of FIG. 14
  • a method of detecting a wearing state of a head mounted display device includes the first touch circuit and a second touch circuit disposed on an outer surface of at least one of the wearing parts (e.g., the second touch in FIG. 6).
  • the circuit 611 or the first portion 631 of the integrated touch circuit or the second touch circuit 1221 of FIG. 12
  • a conductor e.g., the conductor 1321 of FIG. 13
  • An operation of detecting contact of the wearable parts e.g., operation 1510 of FIG. 15
  • an operation of deactivating the display of the head mounted display device when the wearable parts are contacted e.g., operation 1520 of FIG.
  • a method of detecting a wearing state of a head mounted display device includes an operation of determining whether the head mounted display device is connected to a charging terminal of a charger (e.g., operation 1610 of FIG. 16), the first touch circuit, and An operation of detecting contact between the wearing parts using a second touch circuit or a conductor disposed on the outer surface of at least one of the wearing parts (e.g., operation 1620 of FIG. 16), when the wearing parts are contacted , an operation of charging the head-mounted display device (e.g., operation 1630 of FIG. 16), and an operation of providing information indicating that the head-mounted display device is incompletely inserted into the charger if the wearing parts are not in contact (e.g. : Operation 1630 of FIG. 16) may be further included.
  • a method for detecting a wearing state of a head mounted display device includes the operation of determining the distance between the lens of the head mounted display device and the user's eyes based on the first touch information (e.g., in FIG. 17 Operation 1710 or operation 1810 of FIG. 18), an operation of determining whether the determined distance is within the reference range (e.g., operation 1720 of FIG. 17 or operation 1820 of FIG. 18), and an operation of determining whether the determined distance is within the reference range. If it is determined that it is not included, information is provided indicating that the head mounted display device is abnormally worn on the head (e.g., operation 1740 of FIG. 17), or an operation of adjusting the focal length of the lens (e.g., operation of FIG. 18) 1840) may be further included.
  • the wearing parts include a first wearing part connected to one end of the frame and a second wearing part connected to the other end of the frame, and the first touch circuit is connected to the first wearing part.
  • a method for detecting a wearing state of a head mounted display device comprising a second touch circuit disposed on an inner surface and a third touch circuit disposed on an inner surface of the second wearing unit, the second touch circuit detected through the second touch circuit.
  • An operation of determining a wearing position of the first wearing unit based on second touch information corresponding to the touch input e.g., operation 1910 of FIG. 19
  • a third touch input corresponding to the third touch input detected through the third touch circuit e.g., operation 1910 of FIG.
  • An operation of determining the wearing position of the second wearing part based on touch information e.g., operation 1910 of FIG. 19
  • An operation of determining e.g., operation 1920 of FIG. 19
  • an operation of providing information indicating that the head mounted display device is abnormally worn on the head e.g., operation 1920 of FIG. Operation 1940 of 19 may further be included.
  • Electronic devices may be of various types.
  • Electronic devices may include, for example, portable communication devices (e.g., smartphones), computer devices, portable multimedia devices, portable medical devices, cameras, wearable devices, or home appliances.
  • Electronic devices according to embodiments of this document are not limited to the above-described devices.
  • first, second, or first or second may be used simply to distinguish one element from another, and may be used to distinguish such elements in other respects, such as importance or order) is not limited.
  • One (e.g. first) component is said to be โ€œcoupledโ€ or โ€œconnectedโ€ to another (e.g. second) component, with or without the terms โ€œfunctionallyโ€ or โ€œcommunicativelyโ€.
  • any of the components can be connected to the other components directly (e.g. wired), wirelessly, or through a third component.
  • module used in various embodiments of this document may include a unit implemented in hardware, software, or firmware, and is interchangeable with terms such as logic, logic block, component, or circuit, for example. It can be used as A module may be an integrated part or a minimum unit of the parts or a part thereof that performs one or more functions. For example, according to one embodiment, the module may be implemented in the form of an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC).
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
  • a storage medium e.g., built-in memory 136 or external memory 138
  • a machine e.g., electronic device 101
  • It may be implemented as software (e.g., program 140) including instructions.
  • a processor e.g., processor 120
  • the one or more instructions may include code generated by a compiler or code that can be executed by an interpreter.
  • a storage medium that can be read by a device may be provided in the form of a non-transitory storage medium.
  • 'non-transitory' only means that the storage medium is a tangible device and does not contain signals (e.g. electromagnetic waves), and this term refers to cases where data is semi-permanently stored in the storage medium. There is no distinction between temporary storage cases.
  • Computer program products are commodities and can be traded between sellers and buyers.
  • the computer program product may be distributed in the form of a machine-readable storage medium (e.g. compact disc read only memory (CD-ROM)), or through an application store (e.g. Play Store TM ) or on two user devices (e.g. It can be distributed (e.g. downloaded or uploaded) directly between smart phones) or online.
  • a machine-readable storage medium e.g. compact disc read only memory (CD-ROM)
  • an application store e.g. Play Store TM
  • two user devices e.g. It can be distributed (e.g. downloaded or uploaded) directly between smart phones) or online.
  • at least a portion of the computer program product may be at least temporarily stored or temporarily created in a machine-readable storage medium, such as the memory of a manufacturer's server, an application store's server, or a relay server.
  • each component (e.g., module or program) of the above-described components may include a single or plural entity, and some of the plurality of entities may be separately placed in other components. there is.
  • one or more of the components or operations described above may be omitted, or one or more other components or operations may be added.
  • multiple components eg, modules or programs
  • the integrated component may perform one or more functions of each component of the plurality of components in the same or similar manner as those performed by the corresponding component of the plurality of components prior to the integration. .
  • operations performed by a module, program, or other component may be executed sequentially, in parallel, iteratively, or heuristically, or one or more of the operations may be executed in a different order, or omitted. Alternatively, one or more other operations may be added.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • User Interface Of Digital Computer (AREA)

Abstract

Disclosed is a head-mounted display apparatus comprising: a frame including a first surface facing in a first direction and a second surface facing in a second direction opposite to the first direction; a display exposed to the outside through the second surface; wearing parts connected to respective ends of the frame and extending in one direction; and a processor disposed inside at least one of the frame and the wearing parts, wherein each of the wearing parts includes an inner surface that is in contact with a portion of the head when the head-mounted display apparatus is worn on a user's head, and an outer surface that faces the inner surface, and at least one wearing part from among the wearing parts includes a first touch circuit disposed on the inner surface. In addition, various embodiments identified through the present document are also possible.

Description

ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜ ๋ฐ ๊ทธ์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ ๊ฐ์ง€ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•Head mounted display device and method for detecting wearing state thereof

๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ๋“ค์€, ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜ ๋ฐ ๊ทธ์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๋Š” ๊ธฐ์ˆ ์— ๊ด€ํ•œ ๊ฒƒ์ด๋‹ค.Various embodiments of the present disclosure relate to a head mounted display device and technology for detecting a wearing state thereof.

์ตœ๊ทผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์‹ ์ฒด์— ์ง์ ‘ ์ฐฉ์šฉํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋Š” ์›จ์–ด๋Ÿฌ๋ธ”(wearable) ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ๋ณด๊ธ‰์ด ํ™œ๋ฐœํžˆ ์ด๋ฃจ์–ด์ง€๊ณ  ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์›จ์–ด๋Ÿฌ๋ธ” ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜๋Š” ์‹ ์ฒด์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€๋ถ„ ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์†๋ชฉ, ๋ฐœ๋ชฉ, ๋ชฉ, ํ—ˆ๋ฆฌ ๋˜๋Š” ๋จธ๋ฆฌ ๋“ฑ์— ์žฅ์ฐฉ๋˜์–ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ธฐ ๋•Œ๋ฌธ์— ์ด๋™์„ฑ ๋ฐ ํœด๋Œ€์„ฑ์ด ํ–ฅ์ƒ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ด๋Ÿฌํ•œ ์›จ์–ด๋Ÿฌ๋ธ” ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์ผ ์˜ˆ๋กœ์„œ, ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์žฅ์ฐฉ๋˜์–ด ์˜์ƒ์„ ํ‘œ์‹œํ•˜๋Š” ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜(head-mounted display apparatus, ์ดํ•˜ HMD๋ผ ํ•œ๋‹ค)๋Š” ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์žฅ์ฐฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋„๋ก ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋ฅผ ๊ตฌ๋น„ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ด๋Ÿฌํ•œ HMD๋Š” ์ฆ๊ฐ• ํ˜„์‹ค(augmented reality, AR)์„ ๊ตฌํ˜„ํ•˜๋Š” AR ์žฅ์น˜ ๋ฐ ๊ฐ€์ƒ ํ˜„์‹ค(virtual reality, VR)์„ ๊ตฌํ˜„ํ•˜๋Š” VR ์žฅ์น˜๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.Recently, wearable electronic devices that can be worn directly on the body have been actively distributed. Wearable electronic devices can improve mobility and portability because they can be used by being mounted on any part of the body, such as the wrist, ankle, neck, waist, or head. As an example of such a wearable electronic device, a head-mounted display apparatus (hereinafter referred to as HMD) that is mounted on the user's head and displays images may be provided with a wearing portion so that it can be mounted on the head. These HMDs may include an AR device that implements augmented reality (AR) and a VR device that implements virtual reality (VR).

ํ•œํŽธ, HMD๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋  ์‹œ, AR ์ปจํ…์ธ  ๋˜๋Š” VR ์ปจํ…์ธ ์™€ ๊ฐ™์€ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ํ‘œ์‹œํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, HMD๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋˜์ง€ ์•Š์„ ์‹œ์—๋Š”, ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ๋น„ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ด๋Ÿฌํ•œ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด์˜ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™” ๋˜๋Š” ๋น„ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”๋ฅผ ์ œ์–ดํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด, HMD๋Š” ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.Meanwhile, when the HMD is worn on the user's head, it can activate the display to display information such as AR content or VR content. Additionally, the HMD can disable the display when not worn on the user's head. To control the activation or deactivation of these displays, the HMD can detect the wearing state.

์ƒ์ˆ ํ•œ ์ •๋ณด๋Š” ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์— ๋Œ€ํ•œ ์ดํ•ด๋ฅผ ๋•๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋ชฉ์ ์œผ๋กœ ํ•˜๋Š” ๋ฐฐ๊ฒฝ ๊ธฐ์ˆ (related art)๋กœ ์ œ๊ณต๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ์ˆ ํ•œ ๋‚ด์šฉ ์ค‘ ์–ด๋А ๊ฒƒ๋„ ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์™€ ๊ด€๋ จ๋œ ์ข…๋ž˜ ๊ธฐ์ˆ (prior art)๋กœ์„œ ์ ์šฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋Š”์ง€์— ๋Œ€ํ•˜์—ฌ ์–ด๋– ํ•œ ์ฃผ์žฅ์ด๋‚˜ ๊ฒฐ์ •์ด ์ œ๊ธฐ๋˜์ง€ ์•Š๋Š”๋‹ค.The above information may be provided as background art for the purpose of aiding understanding of the present disclosure. No claim or determination is made as to whether any of the foregoing can be applied as prior art to the present disclosure.

๊ธฐ์กด์˜ HMD๋Š” ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด ๋ณ„๋„์˜ ์„ผ์„œ ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ๊ทผ์ ‘ ์„ผ์„œ๋ฅผ ๊ตฌ๋น„ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๊ทธ๋Ÿฌ๋‚˜, HMD๊ฐ€ ๋ณ„๋„์˜ ์„ผ์„œ๋ฅผ ๊ตฌ๋น„ํ•˜๋Š” ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ์ œ์กฐ ๋‹จ๊ฐ€์˜ ์ƒ์Šน์€ ๋ฌผ๋ก ์ด๊ณ , ์„ผ์„œ์˜ ์‹ค์žฅ ๊ณต๊ฐ„์— ์˜ํ•ด ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์ „์ž ๋ถ€ํ’ˆ์˜ ์‹ค์žฅ ๊ณต๊ฐ„์ด ํ˜‘์†Œํ•ด์งˆ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ํŠนํžˆ, ์•ˆ๊ฒฝ ํ˜•ํƒœ๋กœ ๋งˆ๋ จ๋œ HMD์˜ ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ์•ˆ๊ฒฝ ๋‹ค๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•œ ์•ˆ๊ฒฝ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„์— ๋งŽ์€ ์ „์ž ๋ถ€ํ’ˆ๋“ค์ด ์ง‘์•ฝ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์‹ค์žฅ๋˜๊ธฐ ๋•Œ๋ฌธ์—, ๊ณต๊ฐ„์  ์ œ์•ฝ์ด ๋”ฐ๋ฅผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.Existing HMDs may be equipped with separate sensors, such as proximity sensors, to detect the wearing state. However, if the HMD is equipped with a separate sensor, not only does the manufacturing cost increase, but the mounting space for other electronic components may become narrow due to the sensor mounting space. In particular, in the case of HMDs provided in the form of glasses, space restrictions may be imposed because many electronic components are intensively mounted on the glasses frame, including the temples.

๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ๋“ค์€, ๋ณ„๋„์˜ ์„ผ์„œ ์—†์ด ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๋Š” HMD ๋ฐ ๊ทธ์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ ๊ฐ์ง€ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์„ ์ œ๊ณตํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.Various embodiments of the present disclosure can provide an HMD that detects a wearing state using a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the wearable unit without a separate sensor and a method for detecting the wearing state thereof.

๋ณธ ๋ฌธ์„œ์— ๊ฐœ์‹œ๋œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ๋“ค์ด ํ•ด๊ฒฐํ•˜๋ ค๋Š” ๊ณผ์ œ๋Š” ์ƒ์ˆ ํ•œ ๋ฐ”์— ์ œํ•œ๋˜์ง€ ์•Š์œผ๋ฉฐ, ๋ณธ ๋ฌธ์„œ์— ๊ฐœ์‹œ๋œ ์‚ฌ์ƒ ๋ฐ ์˜์—ญ์œผ๋กœ๋ถ€ํ„ฐ ๋ฒ—์–ด๋‚˜์ง€ ์•Š๋Š” ๋ฒ”์œ„์—์„œ ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•˜๊ฒŒ ํ™•์žฅ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ์„ ๊ฒƒ์ด๋‹ค.The problems to be solved by the embodiments disclosed in this document are not limited to the above, and may be expanded in various ways without departing from the spirit and scope disclosed in this document.

๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜๋Š”, ์ œ1 ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ํ–ฅํ•˜๋Š” ์ œ1 ๋ฉด๊ณผ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์˜ ๋ฐ˜๋Œ€ ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์ธ ์ œ2 ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ํ–ฅํ•˜๋Š” ์ œ2 ๋ฉด์„ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๋Š” ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ๋ฉด์„ ํ†ตํ•ด ์™ธ๋ถ€๋กœ ๋…ธ์ถœ๋˜๋Š” ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„์˜ ์–‘ ๋‹จ๋ถ€์— ๊ฐ๊ฐ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๊ณ  ์ผ ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ์—ฐ์žฅ๋œ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค, ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„ ๋˜๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ๊ฐ๊ฐ์€, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋  ๋•Œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€๋ถ„์— ์ ‘์ด‰๋˜๋Š” ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋Œ€ํ–ฅํ•˜๋Š” ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋Š”, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋˜๋Š” ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.A head mounted display device according to various embodiments of the present disclosure includes a frame including a first surface facing in a first direction and a second surface facing in a second direction opposite to the first direction, and a frame including a second surface facing in a second direction opposite to the first direction. It may include a display exposed to the outside, wearing parts respectively connected to both ends of the frame and extending in one direction, and a processor disposed inside at least one of the frame or the wearing parts. Each of the wearing units may include an inner surface that is in contact with a portion of the head when the head mounted display device is worn on the user's head, and an outer surface that faces the inner surface. At least one of the wearing parts may include a first touch circuit disposed on the inner surface.

๋˜ํ•œ, ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ ๊ฐ์ง€ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์€, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„์˜ ์–‘ ๋‹จ๋ถ€์— ๊ฐ๊ฐ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๊ณ  ์ผ ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ์—ฐ์žฅ๋œ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘, ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ๊ฐ์ง€์— ์‘๋‹ตํ•˜์—ฌ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์— ๋Œ€์‘๋˜๋Š” ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด์— ๊ธฐ๋ฐ˜ํ•˜์—ฌ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.In addition, the method for detecting the wearing state of a head mounted display device according to various embodiments of the present disclosure includes detecting the inner surface of at least one of the wearing parts connected to both ends of the frame of the head mounted display device and extending in one direction. An operation of detecting a first touch input through a first touch circuit disposed in the head mounted display device, and in response to detection of the first touch input, based on first touch information corresponding to the first touch input. It may include an operation of determining the wearing state of .

๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ๋“ค์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ๋ณ„๋„์˜ ์„ผ์„œ ์—†์ด ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•จ์œผ๋กœ์จ, ์ œ์กฐ ๋‹จ๊ฐ€๋ฅผ ์ ˆ๊ฐํ•˜๊ณ , ์ „์ž ๋ถ€ํ’ˆ์˜ ์‹ค์žฅ ๊ณต๊ฐ„์„ ํ™•๋ณดํ•˜๊ธฐ ์šฉ์ดํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to various embodiments of the present disclosure, the wearing state is detected using a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the wearable unit without a separate sensor, thereby reducing manufacturing costs and making it easy to secure mounting space for electronic components. .

์ด ์™ธ์—, ๋ณธ ๋ฌธ์„œ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ง์ ‘์  ๋˜๋Š” ๊ฐ„์ ‘์ ์œผ๋กœ ํŒŒ์•…๋˜๋Š” ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ํšจ๊ณผ๋“ค์ด ์ œ๊ณต๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.In addition, various effects that can be directly or indirectly identified through this document may be provided.

๋ณธ ๋ฌธ์„œ์— ๊ฐœ์‹œ๋œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ๋“ค๋กœ๋ถ€ํ„ฐ ๋„์ถœ๋˜๋Š” ํšจ๊ณผ๋Š” ์ƒ์ˆ ํ•œ ํšจ๊ณผ๋“ค์— ์ œํ•œ๋˜์ง€ ์•Š์œผ๋ฉฐ, ๋ณธ ๋ฌธ์„œ์— ๊ฐœ์‹œ๋œ ์‚ฌ์ƒ ๋ฐ ์˜์—ญ์œผ๋กœ๋ถ€ํ„ฐ ๋ฒ—์–ด๋‚˜์ง€ ์•Š๋Š” ๋ฒ”์œ„์—์„œ ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•˜๊ฒŒ ํ™•์žฅ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ์„ ๊ฒƒ์ด๋‹ค.Effects derived from the embodiments disclosed in this document are not limited to the effects described above, and may be expanded in various ways without departing from the spirit and scope disclosed in this document.

๋„ 1์€ ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ๋“ค์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ๋„คํŠธ์›Œํฌ ํ™˜๊ฒฝ ๋‚ด์˜ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ๋ธ”๋ก๋„์ด๋‹ค.1 is a block diagram of an electronic device in a network environment according to various embodiments.

๋„ 2๋Š” ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD ์ค‘ AR ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of an AR device among HMDs according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 3์€ ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD ์ค‘ AR ์žฅ์น˜์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a touch circuit disposed in an AR device among HMDs according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 4๋Š” ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD ์ค‘ VR ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์ „๋ฉด ์‚ฌ์‹œ๋„์ด๋‹ค.Figure 4 is a front perspective view of a VR device among HMDs according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 5๋Š” ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD ์ค‘ VR ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ํ›„๋ฉด ์‚ฌ์‹œ๋„์ด๋‹ค.Figure 5 is a rear perspective view of a VR device among HMDs according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 6์€ ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a touch circuit disposed on a wearable portion of an HMD according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 7์€ ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์‹œ HMD์˜ ์šด์šฉ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a method of operating an HMD when worn, according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 8์€ ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์‹œ HMD์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์šด์šฉ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining another method of operating an HMD when worn, according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 9๋Š” ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD์˜ ํƒˆ๊ฑฐ ์‹œ HMD์˜ ์šด์šฉ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining a method of operating an HMD when removing the HMD according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 10์€ ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ ์‹œ HMD์˜ ์šด์šฉ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a method of operating an HMD when the wearing parts of the HMD are separated according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 11์€ ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ ์‹œ HMD์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์šด์šฉ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining another method of operating the HMD when the wearing parts of the HMD are separated according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 12๋Š” ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ ‘์ด‰ ๋ฐ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a method for detecting contact and separation of wearing parts of an HMD according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 13์€ ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ ‘์ด‰ ๋ฐ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating another method for detecting contact and separation of wearing parts of an HMD according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 14๋Š” ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ ‘์ด‰ ์‹œ HMD์˜ ์šด์šฉ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining a method of operating an HMD when wearing parts of the HMD are in contact according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 15๋Š” ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ ‘์ด‰ ์‹œ HMD์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์šด์šฉ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining another method of operating an HMD when wearing parts of the HMD are in contact, according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 16๋Š” ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD์˜ ์ถฉ์ „๊ธฐ ์ง„์ž… ์‹œ HMD์˜ ์šด์šฉ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining a method of operating an HMD when the HMD enters a charger according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 17์€ ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ž์„ธ์™€ ๊ด€๋ จ๋œ HMD์˜ ์šด์šฉ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining a method of operating an HMD related to a wearing posture of the HMD according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 18์€ ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ž์„ธ์™€ ๊ด€๋ จ๋œ HMD์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์šด์šฉ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining another method of operating an HMD related to the wearing posture of the HMD according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 19์€ ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ž์„ธ์™€ ๊ด€๋ จ๋œ HMD์˜ ๋˜ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์šด์šฉ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining another method of operating an HMD related to a wearing posture of the HMD according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„๋ฉด์˜ ์„ค๋ช…๊ณผ ๊ด€๋ จํ•˜์—ฌ, ๋™์ผ ๋˜๋Š” ์œ ์‚ฌํ•œ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ์— ๋Œ€ํ•ด์„œ๋Š” ๋™์ผ ๋˜๋Š” ์œ ์‚ฌํ•œ ์ฐธ์กฐ ๋ถ€ํ˜ธ๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.In relation to the description of the drawings, identical or similar reference numerals may be used for identical or similar components.

์ดํ•˜, ์ฒจ๋ถ€๋œ ๋„๋ฉด์„ ์ฐธ์กฐํ•˜์—ฌ ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ๋“ค์ด ์„ค๋ช…๋œ๋‹ค. ์„ค๋ช…์˜ ํŽธ์˜๋ฅผ ์œ„ํ•˜์—ฌ ๋„๋ฉด์— ๋„์‹œ๋œ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ๋“ค์€ ๊ทธ ํฌ๊ธฐ๊ฐ€ ๊ณผ์žฅ ๋˜๋Š” ์ถ•์†Œ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ์œผ๋ฉฐ, ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ๊ฐ€ ๋ฐ˜๋“œ์‹œ ๋„์‹œ๋œ ๋ฐ”์— ์˜ํ•ด ํ•œ์ •๋˜๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์€ ์•„๋‹ˆ๋‹ค.Hereinafter, various embodiments of the present disclosure will be described with reference to the attached drawings. For convenience of explanation, the sizes of components shown in the drawings may be exaggerated or reduced, and the present disclosure is not necessarily limited to what is shown.

๋„ 1์€, ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ๋“ค์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ, ๋„คํŠธ์›Œํฌ ํ™˜๊ฒฝ(100) ๋‚ด์˜ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101)์˜ ๋ธ”๋ก๋„์ด๋‹ค. ๋„ 1์„ ์ฐธ์กฐํ•˜๋ฉด, ๋„คํŠธ์›Œํฌ ํ™˜๊ฒฝ(100)์—์„œ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101)๋Š” ์ œ1 ๋„คํŠธ์›Œํฌ(198)(์˜ˆ: ๊ทผ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ ๋ฌด์„  ํ†ต์‹  ๋„คํŠธ์›Œํฌ)๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•˜์—ฌ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(102)์™€ ํ†ต์‹ ํ•˜๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ๋˜๋Š” ์ œ2 ๋„คํŠธ์›Œํฌ(199)(์˜ˆ: ์›๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ ๋ฌด์„  ํ†ต์‹  ๋„คํŠธ์›Œํฌ)๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•˜์—ฌ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(104) ๋˜๋Š” ์„œ๋ฒ„(108) ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์™€ ํ†ต์‹ ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101)๋Š” ์„œ๋ฒ„(108)๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•˜์—ฌ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(104)์™€ ํ†ต์‹ ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101)๋Š” ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ(120), ๋ฉ”๋ชจ๋ฆฌ(130), ์ž…๋ ฅ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(150), ์Œํ–ฅ ์ถœ๋ ฅ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(155), ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(160), ์˜ค๋””์˜ค ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(170), ์„ผ์„œ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(176), ์ธํ„ฐํŽ˜์ด์Šค(177), ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ ๋‹จ์ž(178), ํ–…ํ‹ฑ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(179), ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(180), ์ „๋ ฅ ๊ด€๋ฆฌ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(188), ๋ฐฐํ„ฐ๋ฆฌ(189), ํ†ต์‹  ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(190), ๊ฐ€์ž…์ž ์‹๋ณ„ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(196), ๋˜๋Š” ์•ˆํ…Œ๋‚˜ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(197)์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์–ด๋–ค ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์—์„œ๋Š”, ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101)์—๋Š”, ์ด ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜(์˜ˆ: ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ ๋‹จ์ž(178))๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๋žต๋˜๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ํ•˜๋‚˜ ์ด์ƒ์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ๊ฐ€ ์ถ”๊ฐ€๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์–ด๋–ค ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์—์„œ๋Š”, ์ด ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ผ๋ถ€๋“ค(์˜ˆ: ์„ผ์„œ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(176), ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(180), ๋˜๋Š” ์•ˆํ…Œ๋‚˜ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(197))์€ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ(์˜ˆ: ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(160))๋กœ ํ†ตํ•ฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.1 is a block diagram of an electronic device 101 in a network environment 100, according to various embodiments. Referring to FIG. 1, in the network environment 100, the electronic device 101 communicates with the electronic device 102 through a first network 198 (e.g., a short-range wireless communication network) or a second network 199. It is possible to communicate with at least one of the electronic device 104 or the server 108 through (e.g., a long-distance wireless communication network). According to one embodiment, the electronic device 101 may communicate with the electronic device 104 through the server 108. According to one embodiment, the electronic device 101 includes a processor 120, a memory 130, an input module 150, an audio output module 155, a display module 160, an audio module 170, and a sensor module ( 176), interface 177, connection terminal 178, haptic module 179, camera module 180, power management module 188, battery 189, communication module 190, subscriber identification module 196 , or may include an antenna module 197. In some embodiments, at least one of these components (eg, the connection terminal 178) may be omitted or one or more other components may be added to the electronic device 101. In some embodiments, some of these components (e.g., sensor module 176, camera module 180, or antenna module 197) are integrated into one component (e.g., display module 160). It can be.

ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ(120)๋Š”, ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค๋ฉด, ์†Œํ”„ํŠธ์›จ์–ด(์˜ˆ: ํ”„๋กœ๊ทธ๋žจ(140))๋ฅผ ์‹คํ–‰ํ•˜์—ฌ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ(120)์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋œ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101)์˜ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ(์˜ˆ: ํ•˜๋“œ์›จ์–ด ๋˜๋Š” ์†Œํ”„ํŠธ์›จ์–ด ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ)๋ฅผ ์ œ์–ดํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ๋ฐ์ดํ„ฐ ์ฒ˜๋ฆฌ ๋˜๋Š” ์—ฐ์‚ฐ์„ ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ๋ฐ์ดํ„ฐ ์ฒ˜๋ฆฌ ๋˜๋Š” ์—ฐ์‚ฐ์˜ ์ ์–ด๋„ ์ผ๋ถ€๋กœ์„œ, ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ(120)๋Š” ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ(์˜ˆ: ์„ผ์„œ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(176) ๋˜๋Š” ํ†ต์‹  ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(190))๋กœ๋ถ€ํ„ฐ ์ˆ˜์‹ ๋œ ๋ช…๋ น ๋˜๋Š” ๋ฐ์ดํ„ฐ๋ฅผ ํœ˜๋ฐœ์„ฑ ๋ฉ”๋ชจ๋ฆฌ(132)์— ์ €์žฅํ•˜๊ณ , ํœ˜๋ฐœ์„ฑ ๋ฉ”๋ชจ๋ฆฌ(132)์— ์ €์žฅ๋œ ๋ช…๋ น ๋˜๋Š” ๋ฐ์ดํ„ฐ๋ฅผ ์ฒ˜๋ฆฌํ•˜๊ณ , ๊ฒฐ๊ณผ ๋ฐ์ดํ„ฐ๋ฅผ ๋น„ํœ˜๋ฐœ์„ฑ ๋ฉ”๋ชจ๋ฆฌ(134)์— ์ €์žฅํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ(120)๋Š” ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ(121)(์˜ˆ: ์ค‘์•™ ์ฒ˜๋ฆฌ ์žฅ์น˜ ๋˜๋Š” ์–ดํ”Œ๋ฆฌ์ผ€์ด์…˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ) ๋˜๋Š” ์ด์™€๋Š” ๋…๋ฆฝ์ ์œผ๋กœ ๋˜๋Š” ํ•จ๊ป˜ ์šด์˜ ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•œ ๋ณด์กฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ(123)(์˜ˆ: ๊ทธ๋ž˜ํ”ฝ ์ฒ˜๋ฆฌ ์žฅ์น˜, ์‹ ๊ฒฝ๋ง ์ฒ˜๋ฆฌ ์žฅ์น˜(NPU: neural processing unit), ์ด๋ฏธ์ง€ ์‹œ๊ทธ๋„ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ, ์„ผ์„œ ํ—ˆ๋ธŒ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ, ๋˜๋Š” ์ปค๋ฎค๋‹ˆ์ผ€์ด์…˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ)๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101)๊ฐ€ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ(121) ๋ฐ ๋ณด์กฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ(123)๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๋Š” ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ๋ณด์กฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ(123)๋Š” ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ(121)๋ณด๋‹ค ์ €์ „๋ ฅ์„ ์‚ฌ์šฉํ•˜๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ์ง€์ •๋œ ๊ธฐ๋Šฅ์— ํŠนํ™”๋˜๋„๋ก ์„ค์ •๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋ณด์กฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ(123)๋Š” ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ(121)์™€ ๋ณ„๊ฐœ๋กœ, ๋˜๋Š” ๊ทธ ์ผ๋ถ€๋กœ์„œ ๊ตฌํ˜„๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The processor 120, for example, executes software (e.g., program 140) to operate at least one other component (e.g., hardware or software component) of the electronic device 101 connected to the processor 120. It can be controlled and various data processing or calculations can be performed. According to one embodiment, as at least part of data processing or computation, the processor 120 stores instructions or data received from another component (e.g., sensor module 176 or communication module 190) in volatile memory 132. The commands or data stored in the volatile memory 132 can be processed, and the resulting data can be stored in the non-volatile memory 134. According to one embodiment, the processor 120 includes the main processor 121 (e.g., a central processing unit or an application processor) or an auxiliary processor 123 that can operate independently or together (e.g., a graphics processing unit, a neural network processing unit ( It may include a neural processing unit (NPU), an image signal processor, a sensor hub processor, or a communication processor). For example, if the electronic device 101 includes a main processor 121 and a secondary processor 123, the secondary processor 123 may be set to use lower power than the main processor 121 or be specialized for a designated function. You can. The auxiliary processor 123 may be implemented separately from the main processor 121 or as part of it.

๋ณด์กฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ(123)๋Š”, ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค๋ฉด, ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ(121)๊ฐ€ ์ธ์•กํ‹ฐ๋ธŒ(์˜ˆ: ์Šฌ๋ฆฝ) ์ƒํƒœ์— ์žˆ๋Š” ๋™์•ˆ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ(121)๋ฅผ ๋Œ€์‹ ํ•˜์—ฌ, ๋˜๋Š” ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ(121)๊ฐ€ ์•กํ‹ฐ๋ธŒ(์˜ˆ: ์–ดํ”Œ๋ฆฌ์ผ€์ด์…˜ ์‹คํ–‰) ์ƒํƒœ์— ์žˆ๋Š” ๋™์•ˆ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ(121)์™€ ํ•จ๊ป˜, ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101)์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ(์˜ˆ: ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(160), ์„ผ์„œ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(176), ๋˜๋Š” ํ†ต์‹  ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(190))์™€ ๊ด€๋ จ๋œ ๊ธฐ๋Šฅ ๋˜๋Š” ์ƒํƒœ๋“ค์˜ ์ ์–ด๋„ ์ผ๋ถ€๋ฅผ ์ œ์–ดํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ๋ณด์กฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ(123)(์˜ˆ: ์ด๋ฏธ์ง€ ์‹œ๊ทธ๋„ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ ๋˜๋Š” ์ปค๋ฎค๋‹ˆ์ผ€์ด์…˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ)๋Š” ๊ธฐ๋Šฅ์ ์œผ๋กœ ๊ด€๋ จ ์žˆ๋Š” ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ(์˜ˆ: ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(180) ๋˜๋Š” ํ†ต์‹  ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(190))์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€๋กœ์„œ ๊ตฌํ˜„๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ๋ณด์กฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ(123)(์˜ˆ: ์‹ ๊ฒฝ๋ง ์ฒ˜๋ฆฌ ์žฅ์น˜)๋Š” ์ธ๊ณต์ง€๋Šฅ ๋ชจ๋ธ์˜ ์ฒ˜๋ฆฌ์— ํŠนํ™”๋œ ํ•˜๋“œ์›จ์–ด ๊ตฌ์กฐ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ธ๊ณต์ง€๋Šฅ ๋ชจ๋ธ์€ ๊ธฐ๊ณ„ ํ•™์Šต์„ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ƒ์„ฑ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ด๋Ÿฌํ•œ ํ•™์Šต์€, ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ธ๊ณต์ง€๋Šฅ ๋ชจ๋ธ์ด ์ˆ˜ํ–‰๋˜๋Š” ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101) ์ž์ฒด์—์„œ ์ˆ˜ํ–‰๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ๋ณ„๋„์˜ ์„œ๋ฒ„(์˜ˆ: ์„œ๋ฒ„(108))๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ˆ˜ํ–‰๋  ์ˆ˜๋„ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ํ•™์Šต ์•Œ๊ณ ๋ฆฌ์ฆ˜์€, ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ง€๋„ํ˜• ํ•™์Šต(supervised learning), ๋น„์ง€๋„ํ˜• ํ•™์Šต(unsupervised learning), ์ค€์ง€๋„ํ˜• ํ•™์Šต(semi-supervised learning) ๋˜๋Š” ๊ฐ•ํ™” ํ•™์Šต(reinforcement learning)์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ์œผ๋‚˜, ์ „์ˆ ํ•œ ์˜ˆ์— ํ•œ์ •๋˜์ง€ ์•Š๋Š”๋‹ค. ์ธ๊ณต์ง€๋Šฅ ๋ชจ๋ธ์€, ๋ณต์ˆ˜์˜ ์ธ๊ณต ์‹ ๊ฒฝ๋ง ๋ ˆ์ด์–ด๋“ค์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ธ๊ณต ์‹ ๊ฒฝ๋ง์€ ์‹ฌ์ธต ์‹ ๊ฒฝ๋ง(DNN: deep neural network), CNN(convolutional neural network), RNN(recurrent neural network), RBM(restricted boltzmann machine), DBN(deep belief network), BRDNN(bidirectional recurrent deep neural network), ์‹ฌ์ธต Q-๋„คํŠธ์›Œํฌ(deep Q-networks) ๋˜๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ค‘ ๋‘˜ ์ด์ƒ์˜ ์กฐํ•ฉ ์ค‘ ํ•˜๋‚˜์ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ์œผ๋‚˜, ์ „์ˆ ํ•œ ์˜ˆ์— ํ•œ์ •๋˜์ง€ ์•Š๋Š”๋‹ค. ์ธ๊ณต์ง€๋Šฅ ๋ชจ๋ธ์€ ํ•˜๋“œ์›จ์–ด ๊ตฌ์กฐ ์ด์™ธ์—, ์ถ”๊ฐ€์ ์œผ๋กœ ๋˜๋Š” ๋Œ€์ฒด์ ์œผ๋กœ, ์†Œํ”„ํŠธ์›จ์–ด ๊ตฌ์กฐ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The auxiliary processor 123 may, for example, act on behalf of the main processor 121 while the main processor 121 is in an inactive (e.g., sleep) state, or while the main processor 121 is in an active (e.g., application execution) state. ), together with the main processor 121, at least one of the components of the electronic device 101 (e.g., the display module 160, the sensor module 176, or the communication module 190) At least some of the functions or states related to can be controlled. According to one embodiment, co-processor 123 (e.g., image signal processor or communication processor) may be implemented as part of another functionally related component (e.g., camera module 180 or communication module 190). there is. According to one embodiment, the auxiliary processor 123 (eg, neural network processing device) may include a hardware structure specialized for processing artificial intelligence models. Artificial intelligence models can be created through machine learning. For example, such learning may be performed in the electronic device 101 itself on which the artificial intelligence model is performed, or may be performed through a separate server (e.g., server 108). Learning algorithms may include, for example, supervised learning, unsupervised learning, semi-supervised learning, or reinforcement learning, but It is not limited. An artificial intelligence model may include multiple artificial neural network layers. Artificial neural networks include deep neural network (DNN), convolutional neural network (CNN), recurrent neural network (RNN), restricted boltzmann machine (RBM), belief deep network (DBN), bidirectional recurrent deep neural network (BRDNN), It may be one of deep Q-networks or a combination of two or more of the above, but is not limited to the examples described above. In addition to hardware structures, artificial intelligence models may additionally or alternatively include software structures.

๋ฉ”๋ชจ๋ฆฌ(130)๋Š”, ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101)์˜ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ(์˜ˆ: ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ(120) ๋˜๋Š” ์„ผ์„œ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(176))์— ์˜ํ•ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋˜๋Š” ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ๋ฐ์ดํ„ฐ๋ฅผ ์ €์žฅํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋ฐ์ดํ„ฐ๋Š”, ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์†Œํ”„ํŠธ์›จ์–ด(์˜ˆ: ํ”„๋กœ๊ทธ๋žจ(140)) ๋ฐ, ์ด์™€ ๊ด€๋ จ๋œ ๋ช…๋ น์— ๋Œ€ํ•œ ์ž…๋ ฅ ๋ฐ์ดํ„ฐ ๋˜๋Š” ์ถœ๋ ฅ ๋ฐ์ดํ„ฐ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋ฉ”๋ชจ๋ฆฌ(130)๋Š”, ํœ˜๋ฐœ์„ฑ ๋ฉ”๋ชจ๋ฆฌ(132) ๋˜๋Š” ๋น„ํœ˜๋ฐœ์„ฑ ๋ฉ”๋ชจ๋ฆฌ(134)๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The memory 130 may store various data used by at least one component (eg, the processor 120 or the sensor module 176) of the electronic device 101. Data may include, for example, input data or output data for software (e.g., program 140) and instructions related thereto. Memory 130 may include volatile memory 132 or non-volatile memory 134.

ํ”„๋กœ๊ทธ๋žจ(140)์€ ๋ฉ”๋ชจ๋ฆฌ(130)์— ์†Œํ”„ํŠธ์›จ์–ด๋กœ์„œ ์ €์žฅ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ์œผ๋ฉฐ, ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค๋ฉด, ์šด์˜ ์ฒด์ œ(142), ๋ฏธ๋“ค์›จ์–ด(144) ๋˜๋Š” ์–ดํ”Œ๋ฆฌ์ผ€์ด์…˜(146)์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The program 140 may be stored as software in the memory 130 and may include, for example, an operating system 142, middleware 144, or application 146.

์ž…๋ ฅ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(150)์€, ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101)์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ(์˜ˆ: ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ(120))์— ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋  ๋ช…๋ น ๋˜๋Š” ๋ฐ์ดํ„ฐ๋ฅผ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101)์˜ ์™ธ๋ถ€(์˜ˆ: ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž)๋กœ๋ถ€ํ„ฐ ์ˆ˜์‹ ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ž…๋ ฅ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(150)์€, ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค๋ฉด, ๋งˆ์ดํฌ, ๋งˆ์šฐ์Šค, ํ‚ค๋ณด๋“œ, ํ‚ค(์˜ˆ: ๋ฒ„ํŠผ), ๋˜๋Š” ๋””์ง€ํ„ธ ํŽœ(์˜ˆ: ์Šคํƒ€์ผ๋Ÿฌ์Šค ํŽœ)์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The input module 150 may receive commands or data to be used in a component of the electronic device 101 (e.g., the processor 120) from outside the electronic device 101 (e.g., a user). The input module 150 may include, for example, a microphone, mouse, keyboard, keys (eg, buttons), or digital pen (eg, stylus pen).

์Œํ–ฅ ์ถœ๋ ฅ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(155)์€ ์Œํ–ฅ ์‹ ํ˜ธ๋ฅผ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101)์˜ ์™ธ๋ถ€๋กœ ์ถœ๋ ฅํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์Œํ–ฅ ์ถœ๋ ฅ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(155)์€, ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค๋ฉด, ์Šคํ”ผ์ปค ๋˜๋Š” ๋ฆฌ์‹œ๋ฒ„๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์Šคํ”ผ์ปค๋Š” ๋ฉ€ํ‹ฐ๋ฏธ๋””์–ด ์žฌ์ƒ ๋˜๋Š” ๋…น์Œ ์žฌ์ƒ๊ณผ ๊ฐ™์ด ์ผ๋ฐ˜์ ์ธ ์šฉ๋„๋กœ ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋ฆฌ์‹œ๋ฒ„๋Š” ์ฐฉ์‹  ์ „ํ™”๋ฅผ ์ˆ˜์‹ ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ๋ฆฌ์‹œ๋ฒ„๋Š” ์Šคํ”ผ์ปค์™€ ๋ณ„๊ฐœ๋กœ, ๋˜๋Š” ๊ทธ ์ผ๋ถ€๋กœ์„œ ๊ตฌํ˜„๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The sound output module 155 may output sound signals to the outside of the electronic device 101. The sound output module 155 may include, for example, a speaker or a receiver. Speakers can be used for general purposes such as multimedia playback or recording playback. The receiver can be used to receive incoming calls. According to one embodiment, the receiver may be implemented separately from the speaker or as part of it.

๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(160)์€ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101)์˜ ์™ธ๋ถ€(์˜ˆ: ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž)๋กœ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ์‹œ๊ฐ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์ œ๊ณตํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(160)์€, ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค๋ฉด, ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด, ํ™€๋กœ๊ทธ๋žจ ์žฅ์น˜, ๋˜๋Š” ํ”„๋กœ์ ํ„ฐ ๋ฐ ํ•ด๋‹น ์žฅ์น˜๋ฅผ ์ œ์–ดํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ์ œ์–ด ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(160)์€ ํ„ฐ์น˜๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๋„๋ก ์„ค์ •๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์„ผ์„œ, ๋˜๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜์— ์˜ํ•ด ๋ฐœ์ƒ๋˜๋Š” ํž˜์˜ ์„ธ๊ธฐ๋ฅผ ์ธก์ •ํ•˜๋„๋ก ์„ค์ •๋œ ์••๋ ฅ ์„ผ์„œ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The display module 160 can visually provide information to the outside of the electronic device 101 (eg, a user). The display module 160 may include, for example, a display, a hologram device, or a projector, and a control circuit for controlling the device. According to one embodiment, the display module 160 may include a touch sensor configured to detect a touch, or a pressure sensor configured to measure the intensity of force generated by the touch.

์˜ค๋””์˜ค ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(170)์€ ์†Œ๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ์ „๊ธฐ ์‹ ํ˜ธ๋กœ ๋ณ€ํ™˜์‹œํ‚ค๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ๋ฐ˜๋Œ€๋กœ ์ „๊ธฐ ์‹ ํ˜ธ๋ฅผ ์†Œ๋ฆฌ๋กœ ๋ณ€ํ™˜์‹œํ‚ฌ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์˜ค๋””์˜ค ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(170)์€, ์ž…๋ ฅ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(150)์„ ํ†ตํ•ด ์†Œ๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ํš๋“ํ•˜๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ์Œํ–ฅ ์ถœ๋ ฅ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(155), ๋˜๋Š” ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101)์™€ ์ง์ ‘ ๋˜๋Š” ๋ฌด์„ ์œผ๋กœ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋œ ์™ธ๋ถ€ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(์˜ˆ: ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(102))(์˜ˆ: ์Šคํ”ผ์ปค ๋˜๋Š” ํ—ค๋“œํฐ)๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์†Œ๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ์ถœ๋ ฅํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The audio module 170 can convert sound into an electrical signal or, conversely, convert an electrical signal into sound. According to one embodiment, the audio module 170 acquires sound through the input module 150, the sound output module 155, or an external electronic device (e.g., directly or wirelessly connected to the electronic device 101). Sound may be output through the electronic device 102 (e.g., speaker or headphone).

์„ผ์„œ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(176)์€ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101)์˜ ์ž‘๋™ ์ƒํƒœ(์˜ˆ: ์ „๋ ฅ ๋˜๋Š” ์˜จ๋„), ๋˜๋Š” ์™ธ๋ถ€์˜ ํ™˜๊ฒฝ ์ƒํƒœ(์˜ˆ: ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž ์ƒํƒœ)๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๊ณ , ๊ฐ์ง€๋œ ์ƒํƒœ์— ๋Œ€์‘ํ•˜๋Š” ์ „๊ธฐ ์‹ ํ˜ธ ๋˜๋Š” ๋ฐ์ดํ„ฐ ๊ฐ’์„ ์ƒ์„ฑํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์„ผ์„œ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(176)์€, ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค๋ฉด, ์ œ์Šค์ฒ˜ ์„ผ์„œ, ์ž์ด๋กœ ์„ผ์„œ, ๊ธฐ์•• ์„ผ์„œ, ๋งˆ๊ทธ๋„คํ‹ฑ ์„ผ์„œ, ๊ฐ€์†๋„ ์„ผ์„œ, ๊ทธ๋ฆฝ ์„ผ์„œ, ๊ทผ์ ‘ ์„ผ์„œ, ์ปฌ๋Ÿฌ ์„ผ์„œ, IR(infrared) ์„ผ์„œ, ์ƒ์ฒด ์„ผ์„œ, ์˜จ๋„ ์„ผ์„œ, ์Šต๋„ ์„ผ์„œ, ๋˜๋Š” ์กฐ๋„ ์„ผ์„œ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The sensor module 176 detects the operating state (e.g., power or temperature) of the electronic device 101 or the external environmental state (e.g., user state) and generates an electrical signal or data value corresponding to the detected state. can do. According to one embodiment, the sensor module 176 includes, for example, a gesture sensor, a gyro sensor, an air pressure sensor, a magnetic sensor, an acceleration sensor, a grip sensor, a proximity sensor, a color sensor, an IR (infrared) sensor, a biometric sensor, It may include a temperature sensor, humidity sensor, or light sensor.

์ธํ„ฐํŽ˜์ด์Šค(177)๋Š” ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101)๊ฐ€ ์™ธ๋ถ€ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(์˜ˆ: ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(102))์™€ ์ง์ ‘ ๋˜๋Š” ๋ฌด์„ ์œผ๋กœ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋Š” ํ•˜๋‚˜ ์ด์ƒ์˜ ์ง€์ •๋œ ํ”„๋กœํ† ์ฝœ๋“ค์„ ์ง€์›ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ธํ„ฐํŽ˜์ด์Šค(177)๋Š”, ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค๋ฉด, HDMI(high definition multimedia interface), USB(universal serial bus) ์ธํ„ฐํŽ˜์ด์Šค, SD์นด๋“œ ์ธํ„ฐํŽ˜์ด์Šค, ๋˜๋Š” ์˜ค๋””์˜ค ์ธํ„ฐํŽ˜์ด์Šค๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The interface 177 may support one or more designated protocols that can be used to connect the electronic device 101 directly or wirelessly with an external electronic device (eg, the electronic device 102). According to one embodiment, the interface 177 may include, for example, a high definition multimedia interface (HDMI), a universal serial bus (USB) interface, an SD card interface, or an audio interface.

์—ฐ๊ฒฐ ๋‹จ์ž(178)๋Š”, ๊ทธ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด์„œ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101)๊ฐ€ ์™ธ๋ถ€ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(์˜ˆ: ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(102))์™€ ๋ฌผ๋ฆฌ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋Š” ์ปค๋„ฅํ„ฐ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ ๋‹จ์ž(178)๋Š”, ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค๋ฉด, HDMI ์ปค๋„ฅํ„ฐ, USB ์ปค๋„ฅํ„ฐ, SD ์นด๋“œ ์ปค๋„ฅํ„ฐ, ๋˜๋Š” ์˜ค๋””์˜ค ์ปค๋„ฅํ„ฐ(์˜ˆ: ํ—ค๋“œํฐ ์ปค๋„ฅํ„ฐ)๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The connection terminal 178 may include a connector through which the electronic device 101 can be physically connected to an external electronic device (eg, the electronic device 102). According to one embodiment, the connection terminal 178 may include, for example, an HDMI connector, a USB connector, an SD card connector, or an audio connector (eg, a headphone connector).

ํ–…ํ‹ฑ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(179)์€ ์ „๊ธฐ์  ์‹ ํ˜ธ๋ฅผ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž๊ฐ€ ์ด‰๊ฐ ๋˜๋Š” ์šด๋™ ๊ฐ๊ฐ์„ ํ†ตํ•ด์„œ ์ธ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋Š” ๊ธฐ๊ณ„์ ์ธ ์ž๊ทน(์˜ˆ: ์ง„๋™ ๋˜๋Š” ์›€์ง์ž„) ๋˜๋Š” ์ „๊ธฐ์ ์ธ ์ž๊ทน์œผ๋กœ ๋ณ€ํ™˜ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ํ–…ํ‹ฑ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(179)์€, ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค๋ฉด, ๋ชจํ„ฐ, ์••์ „ ์†Œ์ž, ๋˜๋Š” ์ „๊ธฐ ์ž๊ทน ์žฅ์น˜๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The haptic module 179 can convert electrical signals into mechanical stimulation (e.g., vibration or movement) or electrical stimulation that the user can perceive through tactile or kinesthetic senses. According to one embodiment, the haptic module 179 may include, for example, a motor, a piezoelectric element, or an electrical stimulation device.

์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(180)์€ ์ •์ง€ ์˜์ƒ ๋ฐ ๋™์˜์ƒ์„ ์ดฌ์˜ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(180)์€ ํ•˜๋‚˜ ์ด์ƒ์˜ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ๋“ค, ์ด๋ฏธ์ง€ ์„ผ์„œ๋“ค, ์ด๋ฏธ์ง€ ์‹œ๊ทธ๋„ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๋“ค, ๋˜๋Š” ํ”Œ๋ž˜์‹œ๋“ค์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The camera module 180 can capture still images and moving images. According to one embodiment, the camera module 180 may include one or more lenses, image sensors, image signal processors, or flashes.

์ „๋ ฅ ๊ด€๋ฆฌ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(188)์€ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101)์— ๊ณต๊ธ‰๋˜๋Š” ์ „๋ ฅ์„ ๊ด€๋ฆฌํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ „๋ ฅ ๊ด€๋ฆฌ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(188)์€, ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค๋ฉด, PMIC(power management integrated circuit)์˜ ์ ์–ด๋„ ์ผ๋ถ€๋กœ์„œ ๊ตฌํ˜„๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The power management module 188 can manage power supplied to the electronic device 101. According to one embodiment, the power management module 188 may be implemented as at least a part of, for example, a power management integrated circuit (PMIC).

๋ฐฐํ„ฐ๋ฆฌ(189)๋Š” ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101)์˜ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ์— ์ „๋ ฅ์„ ๊ณต๊ธ‰ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ๋ฐฐํ„ฐ๋ฆฌ(189)๋Š”, ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค๋ฉด, ์žฌ์ถฉ์ „ ๋ถˆ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•œ 1์ฐจ ์ „์ง€, ์žฌ์ถฉ์ „ ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•œ 2์ฐจ ์ „์ง€ ๋˜๋Š” ์—ฐ๋ฃŒ ์ „์ง€๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The battery 189 may supply power to at least one component of the electronic device 101. According to one embodiment, the battery 189 may include, for example, a non-rechargeable primary battery, a rechargeable secondary battery, or a fuel cell.

ํ†ต์‹  ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(190)์€ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101)์™€ ์™ธ๋ถ€ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(์˜ˆ: ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(102), ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(104), ๋˜๋Š” ์„œ๋ฒ„(108)) ๊ฐ„์˜ ์ง์ ‘(์˜ˆ: ์œ ์„ ) ํ†ต์‹  ์ฑ„๋„ ๋˜๋Š” ๋ฌด์„  ํ†ต์‹  ์ฑ„๋„์˜ ์ˆ˜๋ฆฝ, ๋ฐ ์ˆ˜๋ฆฝ๋œ ํ†ต์‹  ์ฑ„๋„์„ ํ†ตํ•œ ํ†ต์‹  ์ˆ˜ํ–‰์„ ์ง€์›ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ํ†ต์‹  ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(190)์€ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ(120)(์˜ˆ: ์–ดํ”Œ๋ฆฌ์ผ€์ด์…˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ)์™€ ๋…๋ฆฝ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์šด์˜๋˜๊ณ , ์ง์ ‘(์˜ˆ: ์œ ์„ ) ํ†ต์‹  ๋˜๋Š” ๋ฌด์„  ํ†ต์‹ ์„ ์ง€์›ํ•˜๋Š” ํ•˜๋‚˜ ์ด์ƒ์˜ ์ปค๋ฎค๋‹ˆ์ผ€์ด์…˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ํ†ต์‹  ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(190)์€ ๋ฌด์„  ํ†ต์‹  ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(192)(์˜ˆ: ์…€๋ฃฐ๋Ÿฌ ํ†ต์‹  ๋ชจ๋“ˆ, ๊ทผ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ ๋ฌด์„  ํ†ต์‹  ๋ชจ๋“ˆ, ๋˜๋Š” GNSS(global navigation satellite system) ํ†ต์‹  ๋ชจ๋“ˆ) ๋˜๋Š” ์œ ์„  ํ†ต์‹  ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(194)(์˜ˆ: LAN(local area network) ํ†ต์‹  ๋ชจ๋“ˆ, ๋˜๋Š” ์ „๋ ฅ์„  ํ†ต์‹  ๋ชจ๋“ˆ)์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ด๋“ค ํ†ต์‹  ๋ชจ๋“ˆ ์ค‘ ํ•ด๋‹นํ•˜๋Š” ํ†ต์‹  ๋ชจ๋“ˆ์€ ์ œ1 ๋„คํŠธ์›Œํฌ(198)(์˜ˆ: ๋ธ”๋ฃจํˆฌ์Šค, WiFi(wireless fidelity) direct ๋˜๋Š” IrDA(infrared data association)์™€ ๊ฐ™์€ ๊ทผ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ ํ†ต์‹  ๋„คํŠธ์›Œํฌ) ๋˜๋Š” ์ œ2 ๋„คํŠธ์›Œํฌ(199)(์˜ˆ: ๋ ˆ๊ฑฐ์‹œ ์…€๋ฃฐ๋Ÿฌ ๋„คํŠธ์›Œํฌ, 5G ๋„คํŠธ์›Œํฌ, ์ฐจ์„ธ๋Œ€ ํ†ต์‹  ๋„คํŠธ์›Œํฌ, ์ธํ„ฐ๋„ท, ๋˜๋Š” ์ปดํ“จํ„ฐ ๋„คํŠธ์›Œํฌ(์˜ˆ: LAN ๋˜๋Š” WAN)์™€ ๊ฐ™์€ ์›๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ ํ†ต์‹  ๋„คํŠธ์›Œํฌ)๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•˜์—ฌ ์™ธ๋ถ€์˜ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(104)์™€ ํ†ต์‹ ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ด๋Ÿฐ ์—ฌ๋Ÿฌ ์ข…๋ฅ˜์˜ ํ†ต์‹  ๋ชจ๋“ˆ๋“ค์€ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ(์˜ˆ: ๋‹จ์ผ ์นฉ)๋กœ ํ†ตํ•ฉ๋˜๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ๋˜๋Š” ์„œ๋กœ ๋ณ„๋„์˜ ๋ณต์ˆ˜์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ๋“ค(์˜ˆ: ๋ณต์ˆ˜ ์นฉ๋“ค)๋กœ ๊ตฌํ˜„๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋ฌด์„  ํ†ต์‹  ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(192)์€ ๊ฐ€์ž…์ž ์‹๋ณ„ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(196)์— ์ €์žฅ๋œ ๊ฐ€์ž…์ž ์ •๋ณด(์˜ˆ: ๊ตญ์ œ ๋ชจ๋ฐ”์ผ ๊ฐ€์ž…์ž ์‹๋ณ„์ž(IMSI))๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ ์ œ1 ๋„คํŠธ์›Œํฌ(198) ๋˜๋Š” ์ œ2 ๋„คํŠธ์›Œํฌ(199)์™€ ๊ฐ™์€ ํ†ต์‹  ๋„คํŠธ์›Œํฌ ๋‚ด์—์„œ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101)๋ฅผ ํ™•์ธ ๋˜๋Š” ์ธ์ฆํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.Communication module 190 is configured to provide a direct (e.g., wired) communication channel or wireless communication channel between electronic device 101 and an external electronic device (e.g., electronic device 102, electronic device 104, or server 108). It can support establishment and communication through established communication channels. Communication module 190 operates independently of processor 120 (e.g., an application processor) and may include one or more communication processors that support direct (e.g., wired) communication or wireless communication. According to one embodiment, the communication module 190 may be a wireless communication module 192 (e.g., a cellular communication module, a short-range wireless communication module, or a global navigation satellite system (GNSS) communication module) or a wired communication module 194 (e.g., : LAN (local area network) communication module, or power line communication module) may be included. Among these communication modules, the corresponding communication module is a first network 198 (e.g., a short-range communication network such as Bluetooth, wireless fidelity (WiFi) direct, or infrared data association (IrDA)) or a second network 199 (e.g., legacy It may communicate with an external electronic device 104 through a telecommunication network such as a cellular network, a 5G network, a next-generation communication network, the Internet, or a computer network (e.g., LAN or WAN). These various types of communication modules may be integrated into one component (e.g., a single chip) or may be implemented as a plurality of separate components (e.g., multiple chips). The wireless communication module 192 uses subscriber information (e.g., International Mobile Subscriber Identifier (IMSI)) stored in the subscriber identification module 196 to communicate within a communication network such as the first network 198 or the second network 199. The electronic device 101 can be confirmed or authenticated.

๋ฌด์„  ํ†ต์‹  ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(192)์€ 4G ๋„คํŠธ์›Œํฌ ์ดํ›„์˜ 5G ๋„คํŠธ์›Œํฌ ๋ฐ ์ฐจ์„ธ๋Œ€ ํ†ต์‹  ๊ธฐ์ˆ , ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, NR ์ ‘์† ๊ธฐ์ˆ (new radio access technology)์„ ์ง€์›ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. NR ์ ‘์† ๊ธฐ์ˆ ์€ ๊ณ ์šฉ๋Ÿ‰ ๋ฐ์ดํ„ฐ์˜ ๊ณ ์† ์ „์†ก(eMBB(enhanced mobile broadband)), ๋‹จ๋ง ์ „๋ ฅ ์ตœ์†Œํ™”์™€ ๋‹ค์ˆ˜ ๋‹จ๋ง์˜ ์ ‘์†(mMTC(massive machine type communications)), ๋˜๋Š” ๊ณ ์‹ ๋ขฐ๋„์™€ ์ €์ง€์—ฐ(URLLC(ultra-reliable and low-latency communications))์„ ์ง€์›ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋ฌด์„  ํ†ต์‹  ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(192)์€, ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ๋†’์€ ๋ฐ์ดํ„ฐ ์ „์†ก๋ฅ  ๋‹ฌ์„ฑ์„ ์œ„ํ•ด, ๊ณ ์ฃผํŒŒ ๋Œ€์—ญ(์˜ˆ: mmWave ๋Œ€์—ญ)์„ ์ง€์›ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋ฌด์„  ํ†ต์‹  ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(192)์€ ๊ณ ์ฃผํŒŒ ๋Œ€์—ญ์—์„œ์˜ ์„ฑ๋Šฅ ํ™•๋ณด๋ฅผ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ๊ธฐ์ˆ ๋“ค, ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ๋น”ํฌ๋ฐ(beamforming), ๊ฑฐ๋Œ€ ๋ฐฐ์—ด ๋‹ค์ค‘ ์ž…์ถœ๋ ฅ(massive MIMO(multiple-input and multiple-output)), ์ „์ฐจ์› ๋‹ค์ค‘์ž…์ถœ๋ ฅ(FD-MIMO: full dimensional MIMO), ์–ด๋ ˆ์ด ์•ˆํ…Œ๋‚˜(array antenna), ์•„๋‚ ๋กœ๊ทธ ๋น”ํ˜•์„ฑ(analog beam-forming), ๋˜๋Š” ๋Œ€๊ทœ๋ชจ ์•ˆํ…Œ๋‚˜(large scale antenna)์™€ ๊ฐ™์€ ๊ธฐ์ˆ ๋“ค์„ ์ง€์›ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋ฌด์„  ํ†ต์‹  ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(192)์€ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101), ์™ธ๋ถ€ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(์˜ˆ: ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(104)) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„คํŠธ์›Œํฌ ์‹œ์Šคํ…œ(์˜ˆ: ์ œ2 ๋„คํŠธ์›Œํฌ(199))์— ๊ทœ์ •๋˜๋Š” ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์š”๊ตฌ์‚ฌํ•ญ์„ ์ง€์›ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ๋ฌด์„  ํ†ต์‹  ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(192)์€ eMBB ์‹คํ˜„์„ ์œ„ํ•œ Peak data rate(์˜ˆ: 20Gbps ์ด์ƒ), mMTC ์‹คํ˜„์„ ์œ„ํ•œ ์†์‹ค Coverage(์˜ˆ: 164dB ์ดํ•˜), ๋˜๋Š” URLLC ์‹คํ˜„์„ ์œ„ํ•œ U-plane latency(์˜ˆ: ๋‹ค์šด๋งํฌ(DL) ๋ฐ ์—…๋งํฌ(UL) ๊ฐ๊ฐ 0.5ms ์ดํ•˜, ๋˜๋Š” ๋ผ์šด๋“œ ํŠธ๋ฆฝ 1ms ์ดํ•˜)๋ฅผ ์ง€์›ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The wireless communication module 192 may support 5G networks after 4G networks and next-generation communication technologies, for example, NR access technology (new radio access technology). NR access technology provides high-speed transmission of high-capacity data (eMBB (enhanced mobile broadband)), minimization of terminal power and access to multiple terminals (mMTC (massive machine type communications)), or high reliability and low latency (URLLC (ultra-reliable and low latency). -latency communications)) can be supported. The wireless communication module 192 may support high frequency bands (eg, mmWave bands), for example, to achieve high data rates. The wireless communication module 192 uses various technologies to secure performance in high frequency bands, for example, beamforming, massive array multiple-input and multiple-output (MIMO), and full-dimensional multiplexing. It can support technologies such as input/output (FD-MIMO: full dimensional MIMO), array antenna, analog beam-forming, or large scale antenna. The wireless communication module 192 may support various requirements specified in the electronic device 101, an external electronic device (e.g., electronic device 104), or a network system (e.g., second network 199). According to one embodiment, the wireless communication module 192 supports Peak data rate (e.g., 20 Gbps or more) for realizing eMBB, loss coverage (e.g., 164 dB or less) for realizing mmTC, or U-plane latency (e.g., 164 dB or less) for realizing URLLC. Example: Downlink (DL) and uplink (UL) each of 0.5 ms or less, or round trip 1 ms or less) can be supported.

์•ˆํ…Œ๋‚˜ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(197)์€ ์‹ ํ˜ธ ๋˜๋Š” ์ „๋ ฅ์„ ์™ธ๋ถ€(์˜ˆ: ์™ธ๋ถ€์˜ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜)๋กœ ์†ก์‹ ํ•˜๊ฑฐ๋‚˜ ์™ธ๋ถ€๋กœ๋ถ€ํ„ฐ ์ˆ˜์‹ ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์•ˆํ…Œ๋‚˜ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(197)์€ ์„œ๋ธŒ์ŠคํŠธ๋ ˆ์ดํŠธ(์˜ˆ: PCB) ์œ„์— ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ๋„์ „์ฒด ๋˜๋Š” ๋„์ „์„ฑ ํŒจํ„ด์œผ๋กœ ์ด๋ฃจ์–ด์ง„ ๋ฐฉ์‚ฌ์ฒด๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๋Š” ์•ˆํ…Œ๋‚˜๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์•ˆํ…Œ๋‚˜ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(197)์€ ๋ณต์ˆ˜์˜ ์•ˆํ…Œ๋‚˜๋“ค(์˜ˆ: ์–ด๋ ˆ์ด ์•ˆํ…Œ๋‚˜)์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ด๋Ÿฐ ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ์ œ1 ๋„คํŠธ์›Œํฌ(198) ๋˜๋Š” ์ œ2 ๋„คํŠธ์›Œํฌ(199)์™€ ๊ฐ™์€ ํ†ต์‹  ๋„คํŠธ์›Œํฌ์—์„œ ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋˜๋Š” ํ†ต์‹  ๋ฐฉ์‹์— ์ ํ•ฉํ•œ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์•ˆํ…Œ๋‚˜๊ฐ€, ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค๋ฉด, ํ†ต์‹  ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(190)์— ์˜ํ•˜์—ฌ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ณต์ˆ˜์˜ ์•ˆํ…Œ๋‚˜๋“ค๋กœ๋ถ€ํ„ฐ ์„ ํƒ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์‹ ํ˜ธ ๋˜๋Š” ์ „๋ ฅ์€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์„ ํƒ๋œ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์•ˆํ…Œ๋‚˜๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•˜์—ฌ ํ†ต์‹  ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(190)๊ณผ ์™ธ๋ถ€์˜ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜ ๊ฐ„์— ์†ก์‹ ๋˜๊ฑฐ๋‚˜ ์ˆ˜์‹ ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์–ด๋–ค ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ๋ฐฉ์‚ฌ์ฒด ์ด์™ธ์— ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ๋ถ€ํ’ˆ(์˜ˆ: RFIC(radio frequency integrated circuit))์ด ์ถ”๊ฐ€๋กœ ์•ˆํ…Œ๋‚˜ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(197)์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The antenna module 197 may transmit or receive signals or power to or from the outside (eg, an external electronic device). According to one embodiment, the antenna module 197 may include an antenna including a radiator made of a conductor or a conductive pattern formed on a substrate (eg, PCB). According to one embodiment, the antenna module 197 may include a plurality of antennas (eg, an array antenna). In this case, at least one antenna suitable for the communication method used in the communication network, such as the first network 198 or the second network 199, is connected to the plurality of antennas by, for example, the communication module 190. can be selected. Signals or power may be transmitted or received between the communication module 190 and an external electronic device through the at least one selected antenna. According to some embodiments, in addition to the radiator, other components (eg, radio frequency integrated circuit (RFIC)) may be additionally formed as part of the antenna module 197.

๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์•ˆํ…Œ๋‚˜ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(197)์€ mmWave ์•ˆํ…Œ๋‚˜ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ์„ ํ˜•์„ฑํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, mmWave ์•ˆํ…Œ๋‚˜ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ์€ ์ธ์‡„ ํšŒ๋กœ ๊ธฐํŒ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ธ์‡„ ํšŒ๋กœ ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ์ œ1 ๋ฉด(์˜ˆ: ์•„๋ž˜ ๋ฉด)์— ๋˜๋Š” ๊ทธ์— ์ธ์ ‘ํ•˜์—ฌ ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋˜๊ณ  ์ง€์ •๋œ ๊ณ ์ฃผํŒŒ ๋Œ€์—ญ(์˜ˆ: mmWave ๋Œ€์—ญ)์„ ์ง€์›ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋Š” RFIC, ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ธ์‡„ ํšŒ๋กœ ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ์ œ2 ๋ฉด(์˜ˆ: ์œ— ๋ฉด ๋˜๋Š” ์ธก ๋ฉด)์— ๋˜๋Š” ๊ทธ์— ์ธ์ ‘ํ•˜์—ฌ ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋˜๊ณ  ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ง€์ •๋œ ๊ณ ์ฃผํŒŒ ๋Œ€์—ญ์˜ ์‹ ํ˜ธ๋ฅผ ์†ก์‹  ๋˜๋Š” ์ˆ˜์‹ ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋Š” ๋ณต์ˆ˜์˜ ์•ˆํ…Œ๋‚˜๋“ค(์˜ˆ: ์–ด๋ ˆ์ด ์•ˆํ…Œ๋‚˜)์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to various embodiments, the antenna module 197 may form a mmWave antenna module. According to one embodiment, a mmWave antenna module includes a printed circuit board, an RFIC disposed on or adjacent to a first side (e.g., bottom side) of the printed circuit board and capable of supporting a designated high-frequency band (e.g., mmWave band); And a plurality of antennas (e.g., array antennas) disposed on or adjacent to the second side (e.g., top or side) of the printed circuit board and capable of transmitting or receiving signals in the designated high frequency band. can do.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ์ผ๋ถ€๋Š” ์ฃผ๋ณ€ ๊ธฐ๊ธฐ๋“ค๊ฐ„ ํ†ต์‹  ๋ฐฉ์‹(์˜ˆ: ๋ฒ„์Šค, GPIO(general purpose input and output), SPI(serial peripheral interface), ๋˜๋Š” MIPI(mobile industry processor interface))์„ ํ†ตํ•ด ์„œ๋กœ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๊ณ  ์‹ ํ˜ธ(์˜ˆ: ๋ช…๋ น ๋˜๋Š” ๋ฐ์ดํ„ฐ)๋ฅผ ์ƒํ˜ธ๊ฐ„์— ๊ตํ™˜ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.At least some of the components are connected to each other through a communication method between peripheral devices (e.g., bus, general purpose input and output (GPIO), serial peripheral interface (SPI), or mobile industry processor interface (MIPI)) and signal ( (e.g. commands or data) can be exchanged with each other.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ๋ช…๋ น ๋˜๋Š” ๋ฐ์ดํ„ฐ๋Š” ์ œ2 ๋„คํŠธ์›Œํฌ(199)์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋œ ์„œ๋ฒ„(108)๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด์„œ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101)์™€ ์™ธ๋ถ€์˜ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(104)๊ฐ„์— ์†ก์‹  ๋˜๋Š” ์ˆ˜์‹ ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์™ธ๋ถ€์˜ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(102 ๋˜๋Š” 104) ๊ฐ๊ฐ์€ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101)์™€ ๋™์ผํ•œ ๋˜๋Š” ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์ข…๋ฅ˜์˜ ์žฅ์น˜์ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101)์—์„œ ์‹คํ–‰๋˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘๋“ค์˜ ์ „๋ถ€ ๋˜๋Š” ์ผ๋ถ€๋Š” ์™ธ๋ถ€์˜ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜๋“ค(102, 104 ๋˜๋Š” 108) ์ค‘ ํ•˜๋‚˜ ์ด์ƒ์˜ ์™ธ๋ถ€์˜ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜๋“ค์—์„œ ์‹คํ–‰๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค๋ฉด, ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101)๊ฐ€ ์–ด๋–ค ๊ธฐ๋Šฅ์ด๋‚˜ ์„œ๋น„์Šค๋ฅผ ์ž๋™์œผ๋กœ, ๋˜๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž ๋˜๋Š” ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์žฅ์น˜๋กœ๋ถ€ํ„ฐ์˜ ์š”์ฒญ์— ๋ฐ˜์‘ํ•˜์—ฌ ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•ด์•ผ ํ•  ๊ฒฝ์šฐ์—, ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101)๋Š” ๊ธฐ๋Šฅ ๋˜๋Š” ์„œ๋น„์Šค๋ฅผ ์ž์ฒด์ ์œผ๋กœ ์‹คํ–‰์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ๋Œ€์‹ ์— ๋˜๋Š” ์ถ”๊ฐ€์ ์œผ๋กœ, ํ•˜๋‚˜ ์ด์ƒ์˜ ์™ธ๋ถ€์˜ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜๋“ค์—๊ฒŒ ๊ทธ ๊ธฐ๋Šฅ ๋˜๋Š” ๊ทธ ์„œ๋น„์Šค์˜ ์ ์–ด๋„ ์ผ๋ถ€๋ฅผ ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•˜๋ผ๊ณ  ์š”์ฒญํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์š”์ฒญ์„ ์ˆ˜์‹ ํ•œ ํ•˜๋‚˜ ์ด์ƒ์˜ ์™ธ๋ถ€์˜ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜๋“ค์€ ์š”์ฒญ๋œ ๊ธฐ๋Šฅ ๋˜๋Š” ์„œ๋น„์Šค์˜ ์ ์–ด๋„ ์ผ๋ถ€, ๋˜๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์š”์ฒญ๊ณผ ๊ด€๋ จ๋œ ์ถ”๊ฐ€ ๊ธฐ๋Šฅ ๋˜๋Š” ์„œ๋น„์Šค๋ฅผ ์‹คํ–‰ํ•˜๊ณ , ๊ทธ ์‹คํ–‰์˜ ๊ฒฐ๊ณผ๋ฅผ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101)๋กœ ์ „๋‹ฌํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ฒฐ๊ณผ๋ฅผ, ๊ทธ๋Œ€๋กœ ๋˜๋Š” ์ถ”๊ฐ€์ ์œผ๋กœ ์ฒ˜๋ฆฌํ•˜์—ฌ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์š”์ฒญ์— ๋Œ€ํ•œ ์‘๋‹ต์˜ ์ ์–ด๋„ ์ผ๋ถ€๋กœ์„œ ์ œ๊ณตํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ด๋ฅผ ์œ„ํ•˜์—ฌ, ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค๋ฉด, ํด๋ผ์šฐ๋“œ ์ปดํ“จํŒ…, ๋ถ„์‚ฐ ์ปดํ“จํŒ…, ๋ชจ๋ฐ”์ผ ์—์ง€ ์ปดํ“จํŒ…(MEC: mobile edge computing), ๋˜๋Š” ํด๋ผ์ด์–ธํŠธ-์„œ๋ฒ„ ์ปดํ“จํŒ… ๊ธฐ์ˆ ์ด ์ด์šฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101)๋Š”, ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ๋ถ„์‚ฐ ์ปดํ“จํŒ… ๋˜๋Š” ๋ชจ๋ฐ”์ผ ์—์ง€ ์ปดํ“จํŒ…์„ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ ์ดˆ์ €์ง€์—ฐ ์„œ๋น„์Šค๋ฅผ ์ œ๊ณตํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ์žˆ์–ด์„œ, ์™ธ๋ถ€์˜ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(104)๋Š” IoT(internet of things) ๊ธฐ๊ธฐ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์„œ๋ฒ„(108)๋Š” ๊ธฐ๊ณ„ ํ•™์Šต ๋ฐ/๋˜๋Š” ์‹ ๊ฒฝ๋ง์„ ์ด์šฉํ•œ ์ง€๋Šฅํ˜• ์„œ๋ฒ„์ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์™ธ๋ถ€์˜ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(104) ๋˜๋Š” ์„œ๋ฒ„(108)๋Š” ์ œ2 ๋„คํŠธ์›Œํฌ(199) ๋‚ด์— ํฌํ•จ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101)๋Š” 5G ํ†ต์‹  ๊ธฐ์ˆ  ๋ฐ IoT ๊ด€๋ จ ๊ธฐ์ˆ ์„ ๊ธฐ๋ฐ˜์œผ๋กœ ์ง€๋Šฅํ˜• ์„œ๋น„์Šค(์˜ˆ: ์Šค๋งˆํŠธ ํ™ˆ, ์Šค๋งˆํŠธ ์‹œํ‹ฐ, ์Šค๋งˆํŠธ ์นด, ๋˜๋Š” ํ—ฌ์Šค ์ผ€์–ด)์— ์ ์šฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, commands or data may be transmitted or received between the electronic device 101 and the external electronic device 104 through the server 108 connected to the second network 199. Each of the external electronic devices 102 or 104 may be of the same or different type as the electronic device 101. According to one embodiment, all or part of the operations performed in the electronic device 101 may be executed in one or more of the external electronic devices 102, 104, or 108. For example, when the electronic device 101 needs to perform a certain function or service automatically or in response to a request from a user or another device, the electronic device 101 may perform the function or service instead of executing the function or service on its own. Alternatively, or additionally, one or more external electronic devices may be requested to perform at least part of the function or service. One or more external electronic devices that have received the request may execute at least part of the requested function or service, or an additional function or service related to the request, and transmit the result of the execution to the electronic device 101. The electronic device 101 may process the result as is or additionally and provide it as at least part of a response to the request. For this purpose, for example, cloud computing, distributed computing, mobile edge computing (MEC), or client-server computing technology can be used. The electronic device 101 may provide an ultra-low latency service using, for example, distributed computing or mobile edge computing. In another embodiment, the external electronic device 104 may include an Internet of Things (IoT) device. Server 108 may be an intelligent server using machine learning and/or neural networks. According to one embodiment, the external electronic device 104 or server 108 may be included in the second network 199. The electronic device 101 may be applied to intelligent services (e.g., smart home, smart city, smart car, or healthcare) based on 5G communication technology and IoT-related technology.

์ดํ•˜์˜ ์„ค๋ช…์—์„œ๋Š”, ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์žฅ์ฐฉ๋˜์–ด ์˜์ƒ์„ ํ‘œ์‹œํ•˜๋Š” ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜(head-mounted display apparatus, ์ดํ•˜ HMD๋ผ ํ•œ๋‹ค)์˜ ํ˜•์ƒ, ๊ตฌ์กฐ ๋ฐ ๋™์ž‘(๋˜๋Š” ์šด์šฉ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•)์— ๋Œ€ํ•ด์„œ ์–ธ๊ธ‰ํ•˜์ง€๋งŒ, ๊ทธ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์€ ์ƒ์ˆ ํ•œ ๋„ 1์˜ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101)์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ๊ณผ ๋™์ผ ๋˜๋Š” ์œ ์‚ฌํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, HMD๋Š” ์ฆ๊ฐ• ํ˜„์‹ค์„ ๊ตฌํ˜„ํ•˜๋Š” AR ์žฅ์น˜ ๋ฐ ๊ฐ€์ƒ ํ˜„์‹ค์„ ๊ตฌํ˜„ํ•˜๋Š” VR ์žฅ์น˜๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋Š” ๋ฐ”, ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์—์„œ๋Š” HMD ์ค‘ AR ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ํ˜•์ƒ ๋ฐ ๊ตฌ์กฐ์— ๋Œ€ํ•ด์„œ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ณ , ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์—์„œ๋Š” HMD ์žฅ์น˜ ์ค‘ VR ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ํ˜•์ƒ ๋ฐ ๊ตฌ์กฐ์— ๋Œ€ํ•ด์„œ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๋„๋ก ํ•œ๋‹ค. ๋‹ค๋งŒ, HMD์˜ ํ˜•์ƒ ๋ฐ ๊ตฌ์กฐ๊ฐ€ ๋„ 2 ๋‚ด์ง€ ๋„ 5์—์„œ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๋Š” HMD์˜ ํ˜•์ƒ ๋ฐ ๊ตฌ์กฐ์— ๊ตญํ•œ๋˜๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์€ ์•„๋‹ˆ๋ฉฐ, HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ ์˜ˆ์ปจ๋Œ€, HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ์ œ์™ธํ•œ ๋‚˜๋จธ์ง€ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์˜ ํ˜•์ƒ ๋ฐ ๊ตฌ์กฐ์— ๋Œ€ํ•ด์„œ๋Š” ๋ณ€ํ˜•์ด ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.In the following description, the shape, structure, and operation (or operating method) of a head-mounted display apparatus (hereinafter referred to as HMD) that is mounted on the user's head and displays images is mentioned, but the configuration is It may be the same or similar to the configuration of the electronic device 101 of FIG. 1 described above. In addition, the HMD may include an AR device that implements augmented reality and a VR device that implements virtual reality. Figures 2 and 3 describe the shape and structure of the AR device among the HMD, and Figures 4 and 5 In this section, the shape and structure of the VR device among HMD devices will be explained. However, the shape and structure of the HMD are not limited to those described in FIGS. 2 to 5, and may include a component for detecting the wearing state of the HMD, for example, a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the wearing portion of the HMD. The shape and structure of the remaining components may be modified.

๋„ 2๋Š” ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD ์ค‘ AR ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๊ณ , ๋„ 3์€ ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD ์ค‘ AR ์žฅ์น˜์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of an AR device among HMDs according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, and FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a touch circuit disposed in an AR device among HMDs according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. .

๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์„ ์ฐธ์กฐํ•˜๋ฉด, HMD(200)(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 1์˜ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101))๋Š” ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210), ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด(211, 212) ๋ฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221, 222)๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.2 and 3, the HMD 200 (e.g., the electronic device 101 of FIG. 1) may include a main frame 210, displays 211 and 212, and wearable units 221 and 222. there is.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210)์€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ์ผ๋ถ€(์˜ˆ: ์•ˆ๋ฉด)์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ ์š”์†Œ์— ์˜ํ•ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ์•ˆ๋ฉด์— ์ง€์ง€๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210)์€ ์ œ1 ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ํ–ฅํ•˜๋Š” ์ œ1 ๋ฉด ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์˜ ๋ฐ˜๋Œ€์ธ ์ œ2 ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ํ–ฅํ•˜๋Š” ์ œ2 ๋ฉด์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210)์€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž๊ฐ€ ํŽธ์•ˆํ•œ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๊ฐ์„ ๋А๋‚„ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ์„ ์ •๋„๋กœ ๊ฐ€๋ฒผ์šด ์žฌ์งˆ๋กœ ๋งˆ๋ จ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์˜ˆ๋กœ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210)์€ ํ”Œ๋ผ์Šคํ‹ฑ ์žฌ์งˆ๋กœ ๋งˆ๋ จ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210)์€ ๊ฐ•๋„ ๋˜๋Š” ๋ฏธ๊ด€์„ ์œ„ํ•˜์—ฌ ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์žฌ๋ฃŒ ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์œ ๋ฆฌ, ์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน, ๊ธˆ์†(์˜ˆ: ์•Œ๋ฃจ๋ฏธ๋Š„) ๋˜๋Š” ๊ธˆ์† ํ•ฉ๊ธˆ(์˜ˆ: ๊ฐ•์ฒ , ์Šคํ…Œ์ธ๋ ˆ์Šค๊ฐ•, ํ‹ฐํƒ€๋Š„ ๋˜๋Š” ๋งˆ๊ทธ๋„ค์Š˜ ํ•ฉ๊ธˆ) ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋ฅผ ๋” ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์—์„œ๋Š” HMD(200)๊ฐ€ ์•ˆ๊ฒฝ ํ˜•ํƒœ๋กœ ๋งˆ๋ จ๋œ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ด๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210)์€ ์•ˆ๊ฒฝ์˜ ํ…Œ(rim), ๊ฐ€๋กœ๋Œ€(bar) ๋ฐ ์ฝ”๋‹ค๋ฆฌ(bridge)๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๋Š” ๊ตฌ์กฐ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ด๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์œผ๋กœ, ์ด๋Ÿฌํ•œ HMD(200)๋Š” AR ๊ธ€๋ž˜์Šค(glasses)๋กœ ์ง€์นญ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The main frame 210 may be worn on at least part of the user's head (eg, face) and may be supported on the user's face by various components. The main frame 210 may include a first surface facing in a first direction and a second surface facing in a second direction opposite to the first direction. According to one embodiment, the main frame 210 may be made of a material light enough to allow the user to feel comfortable wearing it. As an example, the main frame 210 may be made of plastic material. In addition, the main frame 210 is made of at least one of various materials, such as glass, ceramic, metal (e.g., aluminum), or metal alloy (e.g., steel, stainless steel, titanium, or magnesium alloy) for strength or aesthetics. More may be included. 2 and 3 show the HMD 200 in the form of glasses, and the main frame 210 represents a structure including a rim, bar, and bridge of the glasses, These HMDs 200 may be referred to as AR glasses.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด(211, 212)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210)์˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ๋ฉด์„ ํ†ตํ•ด ๋…ธ์ถœ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด(211, 212) ์ค‘ ์ œ1 ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด(211)๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ์˜ค๋ฅธ์ชฝ ๋ˆˆ์— ๋Œ€๋ฉดํ•˜๋„๋ก ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210)์˜ ์šฐ์ธก ํ…Œ์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด(211, 212) ์ค‘ ์ œ2 ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด(212)๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ์™ผ์ชฝ ๋ˆˆ์— ๋Œ€๋ฉดํ•˜๋„๋ก ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210)์˜ ์ขŒ์ธก ํ…Œ์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด(211) ๋˜๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด(212) ์ค‘ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋Š” ์ƒ๋žต๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The displays 211 and 212 may be exposed through the second side of the main frame 210. According to one embodiment, the first display 211 of the displays 211 and 212 is disposed on the right edge of the main frame 210 to face the user's right eye, and the first display 211 of the displays 211 and 212 is disposed on the right edge of the main frame 210 to face the user's right eye. 2 The display 212 may be placed on the left edge of the main frame 210 to face the user's left eye. According to one embodiment, either the first display 211 or the second display 212 may be omitted.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด(211, 212)๋Š” ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค๋ฉด, ์•ก์ • ํ‘œ์‹œ ์žฅ์น˜(liquid crystal display, LCD), ๋””์ง€ํ„ธ ๋ฏธ๋Ÿฌ ํ‘œ์‹œ ์žฅ์น˜(digital mirror device, DMD), ์‹ค๋ฆฌ์ฝ˜ ์•ก์ • ํ‘œ์‹œ ์žฅ์น˜(liquid crystal on silicon, LCoS), ์‹ค๋ฆฌ์ฝ˜ ์˜จ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘ ๋‹ค์ด์˜ค๋“œ(light emitting diode(LED) on silicon, LEDoS), ์œ ๊ธฐ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘ ๋‹ค์ด์˜ค๋“œ(organic light emitting diode, OLED) ๋˜๋Š” ๋งˆ์ดํฌ๋กœ ์—˜์ด๋””(micro light emitting diode, micro LED)๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋„์‹œ๋˜์ง€๋Š” ์•Š์ง€๋งŒ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด(211, 212)๊ฐ€ ์•ก์ • ํ‘œ์‹œ ์žฅ์น˜, ๋””์ง€ํ„ธ ๋ฏธ๋Ÿฌ ํ‘œ์‹œ ์žฅ์น˜ ๋˜๋Š” ์‹ค๋ฆฌ์ฝ˜ ์•ก์ • ํ‘œ์‹œ ์žฅ์น˜ ์ค‘ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋กœ ์ด๋ฃจ์–ด์ง€๋Š” ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, HMD(200)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด(211, 212)์˜ ํ™”๋ฉด ์ถœ๋ ฅ ์˜์—ญ์œผ๋กœ ๋น›์„ ์กฐ์‚ฌํ•˜๋Š” ๊ด‘์›์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์—์„œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด(211, 212)๊ฐ€ ์ž์ฒด์ ์œผ๋กœ ๋น›์„ ๋ฐœ์ƒ์‹œํ‚ฌ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋Š” ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์œ ๊ธฐ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘ ๋‹ค์ด์˜ค๋“œ ๋˜๋Š” ๋งˆ์ดํฌ๋กœ ์—˜์ด๋”” ์ค‘ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋กœ ์ด๋ฃจ์–ด์ง€๋Š” ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, HMD(200)๋Š” ๋ณ„๋„์˜ ๊ด‘์›์„ ํฌํ•จํ•˜์ง€ ์•Š๋”๋ผ๋„ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์—๊ฒŒ ์–‘ํ˜ธํ•œ ํ’ˆ์งˆ์˜ ์˜์ƒ์„ ์ œ๊ณตํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์—์„œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด(211, 212)๊ฐ€ ์œ ๊ธฐ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘ ๋‹ค์ด์˜ค๋“œ ๋˜๋Š” ๋งˆ์ดํฌ๋กœ ์—˜์ด๋””๋กœ ๊ตฌํ˜„๋œ๋‹ค๋ฉด ๊ด‘์›์ด ๋ถˆํ•„์š”ํ•˜๋ฏ€๋กœ, HMD(200)๊ฐ€ ๊ฒฝ๋Ÿ‰ํ™”๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The displays 211 and 212 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display (LCD), a digital mirror device (DMD), a liquid crystal on silicon (LCoS) device, or a liquid crystal display (LCoS). It may include a light emitting diode (LED) on silicon (LEDoS), an organic light emitting diode (OLED), or a micro LED (micro light emitting diode, micro LED). Although not shown, when the displays 211 and 212 are made of one of a liquid crystal display device, a digital mirror display device, or a silicon liquid crystal display device, the HMD 200 transmits light to the screen output area of the displays 211 and 212. It may include a light source for irradiation. In another embodiment, when the displays 211 and 212 are capable of generating light on their own, for example, when they are made of one of organic light emitting diodes or micro LEDs, the HMD 200 may emit light even if it does not include a separate light source. It is possible to provide good quality images to users. In one embodiment, if the displays 211 and 212 are implemented with organic light emitting diodes or micro LEDs, a light source is not required, so the HMD 200 can be lightweight.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210)์˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ๋ฉด์—๋Š” ํˆฌ๋ช… ๋ถ€์žฌ(213, 214)๊ฐ€ ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํˆฌ๋ช… ๋ถ€์žฌ(213, 214)๋Š” ๊ธ€๋ž˜์Šค ํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ดํŠธ, ํ”Œ๋ผ์Šคํ‹ฑ ํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ดํŠธ ๋˜๋Š” ํด๋ฆฌ๋จธ๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ์œผ๋ฉฐ, ํˆฌ๋ช… ๋˜๋Š” ๋ฐ˜ํˆฌ๋ช…ํ•˜๊ฒŒ ์ œ์ž‘๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํˆฌ๋ช… ๋ถ€์žฌ(213, 214) ์ค‘ ์ œ1 ํˆฌ๋ช… ๋ถ€์žฌ(213)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210)์˜ ์šฐ์ธก ํ…Œ์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํˆฌ๋ช… ๋ถ€์žฌ(213, 214) ์ค‘ ์ œ2 ํˆฌ๋ช… ๋ถ€์žฌ(214)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210)์˜ ์ขŒ์ธก ํ…Œ์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ผ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด(211, 212)๊ฐ€ ํˆฌ๋ช…์ธ ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํˆฌ๋ช… ๋ถ€์žฌ(213, 214)๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋ˆˆ๊ณผ ๋Œ€๋ฉดํ•˜๋Š” ์œ„์น˜์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋˜์–ด ํ™”๋ฉด ํ‘œ์‹œ๋ถ€๋ฅผ ๊ตฌ์„ฑํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํˆฌ๋ช… ๋ถ€์žฌ(213) ๋˜๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํˆฌ๋ช… ๋ถ€์žฌ(214) ์ค‘ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋Š” ์ƒ๋žต๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.Transparent members 213 and 214 may be disposed on the first surface of the main frame 210. The transparent members 213 and 214 may be formed of a glass plate, a plastic plate, or a polymer, and may be made transparent or translucent. According to one embodiment, the first transparent member 213 among the transparent members 213 and 214 is disposed on the right edge of the main frame 210, and the second transparent member among the transparent members 213 and 214 ( 214) may be placed on the left edge of the main frame 210. According to various embodiments, when the displays 211 and 212 are transparent, the transparent members 213 and 214 may be disposed at a position facing the user's eyes to form a screen display unit. According to one embodiment, either the first transparent member 213 or the second transparent member 214 may be omitted.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด(211, 212)๋Š” ๊ด‘๋„ํŒŒ๋กœ(waveguide)(215)๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ด‘๋„ํŒŒ๋กœ(215)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด(211, 212)์—์„œ ์ƒ์„ฑํ•œ ๊ด‘์›์„ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋ˆˆ์œผ๋กœ ์ „๋‹ฌํ•˜๋Š” ์—ญํ• ์„ ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ด‘๋„ํŒŒ๋กœ(215)๋Š” ๊ธ€๋ž˜์Šค, ํ”Œ๋ผ์Šคํ‹ฑ ๋˜๋Š” ํด๋ฆฌ๋จธ๋กœ ์ œ์ž‘๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ์œผ๋ฉฐ, ๋‚ด๋ถ€ ๋˜๋Š” ์™ธ๋ถ€์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€ ํ‘œ๋ฉด์— ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ๋‚˜๋…ธ ํŒจํ„ด, ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ๋‹ค๊ฐํ˜• ๋˜๋Š” ๊ณก๋ฉด ํ˜•์ƒ์˜ ๊ฒฉ์ž ๊ตฌ์กฐ(grating structure)๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ๋„ํŒŒ๊ด€์˜ ์ผ๋‹จ์œผ๋กœ ์ž…์‚ฌ๋œ ๊ด‘์€ ๋‚˜๋…ธ ํŒจํ„ด์— ์˜ํ•ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ด‘๋„ํŒŒ๋กœ(215) ๋‚ด๋ถ€์—์„œ ์ „ํŒŒ๋˜์–ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์—๊ฒŒ ์ œ๊ณต๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ Free-formํ˜• ํ”„๋ฆฌ์ฆ˜์œผ๋กœ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ๋œ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ด‘๋„ํŒŒ๋กœ(215)๋Š” ์ž…์‚ฌ๋œ ๊ด‘์„ ๋ฐ˜์‚ฌ ๋ฏธ๋Ÿฌ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์—๊ฒŒ ์ œ๊ณต๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ด‘๋„ํŒŒ๋กœ(215)๋Š” ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ํšŒ์ ˆ ์š”์†Œ(์˜ˆ: DOE(Diffractive Optical Element) ๋˜๋Š” HOE(Holographic Optical Element)) ๋˜๋Š” ๋ฐ˜์‚ฌ ์š”์†Œ(์˜ˆ: ๋ฐ˜์‚ฌ ๊ฑฐ์šธ) ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ด‘๋„ํŒŒ๋กœ(215)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ด‘๋„ํŒŒ๋กœ(215)์— ํฌํ•จ๋œ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ํšŒ์ ˆ ์š”์†Œ ๋˜๋Š” ๋ฐ˜์‚ฌ ์š”์†Œ๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ ๊ด‘์›๋ถ€๋กœ๋ถ€ํ„ฐ ๋ฐฉ์ถœ๋œ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ๊ด‘์„ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋ˆˆ์œผ๋กœ ์œ ๋„ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The displays 211 and 212 may include an optical waveguide 215. The optical waveguide 215 may serve to transmit the light source generated by the displays 211 and 212 to the user's eyes. The optical waveguide 215 may be made of glass, plastic, or polymer, and may include a nanopattern formed on some of the interior or exterior surfaces, for example, a polygonal or curved grating structure. According to one embodiment, light incident on one end of the waveguide may be propagated inside the optical waveguide 215 by a nano-pattern and provided to the user. Additionally, the optical waveguide 215, which is composed of a free-form prism, can provide incident light to the user through a reflection mirror. The optical waveguide 215 may include at least one of at least one diffractive element (eg, a diffractive optical element (DOE) or a holographic optical element (HOE)) or a reflective element (eg, a reflective mirror). The optical waveguide 215 may guide the display light emitted from the light source unit to the user's eyes using at least one diffractive element or reflective element included in the optical waveguide 215.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํšŒ์ ˆ ์š”์†Œ๋Š” ์ž…๋ ฅ ๊ด‘ํ•™ ๋ถ€์žฌ(216) ๋ฐ ์ถœ๋ ฅ ๊ด‘ํ•™ ๋ถ€์žฌ(๋ฏธ๋„์‹œ)๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ์ปจ๋Œ€, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ž…๋ ฅ ๊ด‘ํ•™ ๋ถ€์žฌ(216)๋Š” ์ž…๋ ฅ ๊ทธ๋ ˆ์ดํŒ… ์˜์—ญ(input grating area)์„ ์˜๋ฏธํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ์œผ๋ฉฐ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ถœ๋ ฅ ๊ด‘ํ•™ ๋ถ€์žฌ๋Š” ์ถœ๋ ฅ ๊ทธ๋ ˆ์ดํŒ… ์˜์—ญ(output grating area)์„ ์˜๋ฏธํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ž…๋ ฅ ๊ทธ๋ ˆ์ดํŒ… ์˜์—ญ์€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด(211, 212)(์˜ˆ: Micro LED)๋กœ๋ถ€ํ„ฐ ์ถœ๋ ฅ๋˜๋Š” ๋น›์„ ํ™”๋ฉด ํ‘œ์‹œ๋ถ€์˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํˆฌ๋ช… ๋ถ€์žฌ(213, 214)๋กœ ๋น›์„ ์ „๋‹ฌํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด ํšŒ์ ˆ(๋˜๋Š” ๋ฐ˜์‚ฌ)์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ์ž…๋ ฅ๋‹จ ์—ญํ• ์„ ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ถœ๋ ฅ ๊ทธ๋ ˆ์ดํŒ… ์˜์—ญ์€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ด‘๋„ํŒŒ๋กœ(215)์˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํˆฌ๋ช… ๋ถ€์žฌ(213, 214)์— ์ „๋‹ฌ๋œ ๋น›์„ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋ˆˆ์œผ๋กœ ํšŒ์ ˆ(๋˜๋Š” ๋ฐ˜์‚ฌ)์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ์ถœ๊ตฌ ์—ญํ• ์„ ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, the diffractive element may include an input optical member 216 and an output optical member (not shown). For example, the input optical member 216 may refer to an input grating area, and the output optical member may refer to an output grating area. The input grating area serves as an input terminal that diffracts (or reflects) the light output from the displays 211 and 212 (e.g., Micro LED) to transmit the light to the transparent members 213 and 214 of the screen display unit. You can. The output grating area may serve as an outlet that diffracts (or reflects) light transmitted to the transparent members 213 and 214 of the optical waveguide 215 to the user's eyes.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฐ˜์‚ฌ ์š”์†Œ๋Š” ์ „๋ฐ˜์‚ฌ(total internal reflection, TIR)๋ฅผ ์œ„ํ•œ ์ „๋ฐ˜์‚ฌ ๊ด‘ํ•™ ์†Œ์ž ๋˜๋Š” ์ „๋ฐ˜์‚ฌ ๋„ํŒŒ๊ด€์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ์ปจ๋Œ€, ์ „๋ฐ˜์‚ฌ๋Š” ๊ด‘์„ ์œ ๋„ํ•˜๋Š” ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋ฐฉ์‹์œผ๋กœ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ž…๋ ฅ ๊ทธ๋ ˆ์ดํŒ… ์˜์—ญ์„ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ž…๋ ฅ๋˜๋Š” ๋น›(์˜ˆ: ์˜์ƒ)์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ด‘๋„ํŒŒ๋กœ(215)์˜ ์ผ๋ฉด(์˜ˆ: ํŠน์ • ๋ฉด)์—์„œ 100% ๋ฐ˜์‚ฌ๋˜๋„๋ก ์ž…์‚ฌ๊ฐ์„ ๋งŒ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ถœ๋ ฅ ๊ทธ๋ ˆ์ดํŒ… ์˜์—ญ๊นŒ์ง€ 100% ์ „๋‹ฌ๋˜๋„๋ก ํ•˜๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์„ ์˜๋ฏธํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, the reflective element may include a total reflection optical element or a total reflection waveguide for total internal reflection (TIR). For example, total reflection is a method of guiding light, and an angle of incidence is created such that light (e.g., an image) input through the input grating area is 100% reflected from one side (e.g., a specific side) of the optical waveguide 215. , which may mean ensuring that 100% of the output is transmitted to the output grating area.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด(211, 212)๋กœ๋ถ€ํ„ฐ ๋ฐฉ์ถœ๋˜๋Š” ๊ด‘์€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ž…๋ ฅ ๊ด‘ํ•™ ๋ถ€์žฌ(216)๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ด‘๋„ํŒŒ๋กœ(215)๋กœ ๊ด‘ ๊ฒฝ๋กœ๊ฐ€ ์œ ๋„๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ด‘๋„ํŒŒ๋กœ(215) ๋‚ด๋ถ€๋ฅผ ์ด๋™ํ•˜๋Š” ๊ด‘์€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ถœ๋ ฅ ๊ด‘ํ•™ ๋ถ€์žฌ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋ˆˆ ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ์œ ๋„๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ํ™”๋ฉด ํ‘œ์‹œ๋ถ€๋Š” ๋ˆˆ ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ๋ฐฉ์ถœ๋˜๋Š” ๊ด‘์— ๊ธฐ๋ฐ˜ํ•˜์—ฌ ๊ฒฐ์ •๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, the light emitted from the displays 211 and 212 may be guided to an optical path through the input optical member 216 to the optical waveguide 215. Additionally, light moving inside the optical waveguide 215 may be guided toward the user's eyes through the output optical member. The screen display may be determined based on the light emitted in the eye direction.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221, 222)๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž๊ฐ€ HMD(200)๋ฅผ ์ฐฉ์šฉํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋„๋ก ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210)์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221, 222) ์ค‘ ์ œ1 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210)์˜ ์šฐ์ธก ํ…Œ์˜ ๋‹จ๋ถ€์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜์–ด ์ผ ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ(์˜ˆ: ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ)์œผ๋กœ ์—ฐ์žฅ๋˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221, 222) ์ค‘ ์ œ2 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(222)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210)์˜ ์ขŒ์ธก ํ…Œ์˜ ๋‹จ๋ถ€์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜์–ด ์ผ ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ(์˜ˆ: ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ)์œผ๋กœ ์—ฐ์žฅ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221, 222)๋Š” ํžŒ์ง€(223, 224)๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210)์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์—์„œ๋Š” HMD(200)๊ฐ€ ์•ˆ๊ฒฝ ํ˜•ํƒœ๋กœ ๋งˆ๋ จ๋œ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ด๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(221, 222)์€ ์•ˆ๊ฒฝ์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฆฌ(temple)๋“ค์„ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The wearing parts 221 and 222 may be connected to a portion of the main frame 210 so that the user can wear the HMD 200. According to one embodiment, the first wearing part 221 of the wearing parts 221 and 222 is connected to an end of the right edge of the main frame 210 and extends in one direction (e.g., the second direction). , the second wearing part 222 of the wearing parts 221 and 222 may be connected to an end of the left edge of the main frame 210 and extend in one direction (eg, the second direction). According to one embodiment, the wearing parts 221 and 222 may be connected to the main frame 210 through hinges 223 and 224. 2 and 3 show the HMD 200 in the form of glasses, and the wearing parts 221 and 222 may represent temples of the glasses.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(221, 222) ๊ฐ๊ฐ์€, HMD(200)๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋  ๋•Œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€๋ถ„(์˜ˆ: ๊ด€์ž๋†€์ด)์— ์ ‘์ด‰๋˜๋Š” ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด(221b, 222b) ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด(221b, 222b)์— ๋Œ€ํ–ฅํ•˜๋Š” ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด(221a, 222a)์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(221, 222) ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด(221b, 222b)์—๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(291, 292)๊ฐ€ ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(291, 292)๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€(touch cell)์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(291, 292)๋Š” ๋ณต์ˆ˜ ๊ฐœ์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค์ด ์ธ์ ‘ํ•˜์—ฌ ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ˜•ํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ€์งˆ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(291, 292)๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ์ฒ˜๋ฆฌํ•˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๋Š” ๋งˆ์ดํฌ๋กœ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.Each of the wearing parts 221 and 222 includes an inner surface 221b and 222b that contact a part of the head (e.g., temple) when the HMD 200 is worn on the user's head. It may include outer surfaces 221a and 222a facing 222b). According to one embodiment, touch circuits 291 and 292 may be disposed on the inner surfaces 221b and 222b of at least one of the wearable parts 221 and 222. According to one embodiment, the touch circuits 291 and 292 may include touch cells. For example, the touch circuits 291 and 292 may have a plurality of touch cells arranged adjacent to each other. According to one embodiment, the touch circuits 291 and 292 may include a touch processor that processes touch input. The touch processor may include a microprocessor.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(291, 292)๋Š” HMD(200)์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD(200)๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋  ๋•Œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221, 222)์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด(221b, 222b)์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(291, 292)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€๋ถ„์— ์ ‘์ด‰๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ ‘์ด‰์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์— ๋Œ€์‘๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ํš๋“ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋Š” ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜(์˜ˆ: ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ์œ„์น˜), ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๋ฉด์ (์˜ˆ: ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ์ด ๋ฉด์ ), ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ(์˜ˆ: ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ๋ฐฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ) ๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜(์˜ˆ: ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜) ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜, ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๋ฉด์ , ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ ๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜ ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋กœ ํ‘œํ˜„๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํŒจํ„ด์œผ๋กœ ์ง€์นญ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜, ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๋ฉด์ , ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ ๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜ ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๊ฐ€ ๋‹ค๋ฅผ ๋•Œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ๋‹ค๋ฅด๋‹ค๊ณ  ํ‘œํ˜„๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The touch circuits 291 and 292 may be used to detect the wearing state of the HMD 200. For example, when the HMD 200 is worn on the user's head, the touch circuits 291 and 292 disposed on the inner surfaces 221b and 222b of the wearing parts 221 and 222 are attached to a portion of the head. It can be contacted, and touch information corresponding to the touch input according to the contact can be obtained. The touch information may include, for example, touch location (e.g., location of a touched touch cell among touch cells), touch area (e.g., total area of touched touch cells among touch cells), and touch type (e.g., touch among touch cells). It may include at least one of the arrangement type of the touch cells) or the number of touches (e.g., the number of touched touch cells among touch cells). The touch information may be referred to as a touch pattern expressed by at least one of touch location, touch area, touch type, or number of touches. For example, the touch information may be expressed as a different touch pattern when at least one of the touch position, touch area, touch type, or number of touches is different.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(291, 292)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํš๋“๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ HMD(200)์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์˜ˆ๋กœ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(291, 292)๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ง€์ •๋œ ํŒจํ„ด(์˜ˆ: ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด)์„ ๊ฐ€์ง€๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(291, 292)๋Š” HMD(200)๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ง€์ •๋œ ํŒจํ„ด์€ ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜๊ฐ€ ์ œ1 ์œ„์น˜์ด๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๋ฉด์ ์ด ์ œ1 ํฌ๊ธฐ ์ด์ƒ์ด๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ๊ฐ€ ์ œ1 ํ˜•ํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ€์ง€๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜๊ฐ€ ์ œ1 ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜ ์ด์ƒ์ด๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ๊ทธ๋“ค์˜ ์กฐํ•ฉ์ธ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ์œ„์น˜์ธ ์ƒํƒœ๋Š”, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221, 222)์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด(221b, 222b)์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ๋ณต์ˆ˜ ๊ฐœ์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221, 222)์˜ ๋‹จ๋ถ€ ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ(์˜ˆ: ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210)๊ณผ ๋จผ ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ)์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๊ท€ ๋˜๋Š” ๊ท€์™€ ์ธ์ ‘ํ•œ ๊ด€์ž๋†€์ด ๋ถ€๋ถ„๊ณผ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๋ฉด์ ์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํฌ๊ธฐ ์ด์ƒ์ธ ์ƒํƒœ๋Š”, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221, 222)์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด(221b, 222b)์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ๋ณต์ˆ˜ ๊ฐœ์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ์ด ๋ฉด์ ์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํฌ๊ธฐ ์ด์ƒ์ธ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ˜•ํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ€์ง€๋Š” ์ƒํƒœ๋Š”, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221, 222)์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด(221b, 222b)์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ๋ณต์ˆ˜ ๊ฐœ์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ๋ฐฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ˜•ํƒœ์— ๋Œ€์‘๋˜๋Š” ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ˜•ํƒœ๋Š” ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ํ•œ ๋ณ€์ด ๊ธด ์‚ฌ๊ฐํ˜• ๋˜๋Š” ํƒ€์›ํ˜•์ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜ ์ด์ƒ์ธ ์ƒํƒœ๋Š”, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221, 222)์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด(221b, 222b)์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ๋ณต์ˆ˜ ๊ฐœ์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜ ์ด์ƒ์ธ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์˜ˆ๋กœ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(291, 292)๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ง€์ •๋œ ํŒจํ„ด(์˜ˆ: ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด)์—์„œ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ํŒจํ„ด(์˜ˆ: ์ œ2 ํŒจํ„ด)์œผ๋กœ ๋ณ€๊ฒฝ๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(291, 292)๋Š” HMD(200)๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์—์„œ ํƒˆ๊ฑฐ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, the touch circuits 291 and 292 may detect the wearing state of the HMD 200 using the acquired touch information. For example, if the pattern of the touch input detected through the touch circuits 291 and 292 has a designated pattern (e.g., a first pattern), the touch circuits 291 and 292 allow the HMD 200 to be placed on the user's head. It can be judged that it has been worn. The designated pattern may be, for example, the touch position is a first position, the touch area is a first size or more, the touch shape has a first shape, the number of touches is a first number or a combination thereof. It can indicate a state of being. According to one embodiment, the state in which the touch position is the first position is the wearing part (221, 222) among the plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surfaces (221b, 222b) of the wearing part (221, 222). At least one touch cell disposed in the end direction (e.g., away from the main frame 210) may indicate a state in which it is in contact with the user's ear or a portion of the temple adjacent to the ear. According to one embodiment, the state in which the touch area is greater than or equal to the first size is when at least one touch cell is in contact among a plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surfaces 221b and 222b of the wearing units 221 and 222. It may indicate a state where the total area is greater than or equal to the first size. According to one embodiment, the state in which the touch shape has the first shape is when at least one touch cell is contacted among a plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surfaces 221b and 222b of the wearing units 221 and 222. The arrangement form may indicate a state corresponding to the first form. The first shape may be, for example, a square or oval with one long side. According to one embodiment, the state in which the number of touches is greater than the first number is when at least one touch cell touched among a plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surfaces 221b and 222b of the wearing units 221 and 222. It may indicate a state where the number is greater than or equal to the first number. As another example, when the pattern of the touch input detected through the touch circuits 291 and 292 changes from the designated pattern (e.g., the first pattern) to another pattern (e.g., the second pattern), the touch circuits (291, 292, 292) may determine that the HMD 200 has been removed from the user's head.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(291, 292)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํš๋“๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๋กœ ์ „๋‹ฌํ•˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ HMD(200)์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, the touch circuits 291 and 292 transmit the acquired touch information to a processor, and the processor can use the touch information to determine the wearing state of the HMD 200.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD(200)๋Š” ๋ Œ์ฆˆ(๋ฏธ๋„์‹œ)๋ฅผ ๋” ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด(211, 212)๋กœ ์ถœ๋ ฅ๋˜๋Š” ํ™”๋ฉด์„ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋ˆˆ์— ๋ณด์—ฌ์งˆ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋„๋ก ์ดˆ์ ์„ ์กฐ์ ˆํ•˜๋Š” ์—ญํ• ์„ ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ๋Š” ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ํ”„๋ ˆ๋„ฌ(Fresnel) ๋ Œ์ฆˆ, ํŽœ์ผ€์ดํฌ(Pancake) ๋ Œ์ฆˆ ๋˜๋Š” ๋ฉ€ํ‹ฐ์ฑ„๋„ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ ๋“ฑ์œผ๋กœ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, the HMD 200 may further include a lens (not shown). The lens may serve to adjust the focus so that the screen output to the displays 211 and 212 can be viewed by the user's eyes. The lens may be comprised of, for example, a Fresnel lens, a Pancake lens, or a multi-channel lens.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD(200)๋Š” ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋Š” ์ œ1 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(231, 232), ์ œ2 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(233, 234) ๋˜๋Š” ์ œ3 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(235) ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, the HMD 200 may include at least one camera. The at least one camera may include at least one of a first camera unit 231 and 232, a second camera unit 233 and 234, or a third camera unit 235.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(231, 232)๋Š” 3Dof(degrees of freedom) ๋˜๋Š” 6Dof์˜ ํ—ค๋“œ ํŠธ๋ž˜ํ‚น(head tracking), ํ•ธ๋“œ(hand) ๊ฒ€์ถœ๊ณผ ํŠธ๋ž˜ํ‚น ๋ฐ ๊ณต๊ฐ„ ์ธ์‹์„ ์œ„ํ•ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(231, 232)๋Š” 6Dof๋ฅผ ์œ„ํ•œ ๊ณต๊ฐ„ ์ธ์‹ ๊ธฐ๋Šฅ, ๋ށ์Šค(depth) ์ดฌ์˜์„ ํ†ตํ•œ SLAM(simultaneous localization and mapping) ๊ธฐ๋Šฅ ๋˜๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž ์ œ์Šค์ฒ˜ ์ธ์‹ ๊ธฐ๋Šฅ ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋ฅผ ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(231, 232)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210)์˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(231, 232) ์ค‘ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ(231)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210)์˜ ์šฐ์ธก ํ…Œ์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(231, 232) ์ค‘ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ(232)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210)์˜ ์ขŒ์ธก ํ…Œ์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(231, 232)๋Š” ๊ธ€๋กœ๋ฒŒ ์…”ํ„ฐ(global shutter) ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The first camera units 231 and 232 may be used for 3Dof (degrees of freedom) or 6Dof head tracking, hand detection and tracking, and space recognition. For example, the first camera units 231 and 232 may perform at least one of a spatial recognition function for 6Dof, a simultaneous localization and mapping (SLAM) function through depth shooting, or a user gesture recognition function. . The first camera units 231 and 232 may be disposed on the first side of the main frame 210. According to one embodiment, one camera 231 of the first camera units 231 and 232 is disposed on the right rim of the main frame 210, and the other camera 231 of the first camera units 231 and 232 The camera 232 may be placed on the left edge of the main frame 210. According to one embodiment, the first camera units 231 and 232 may include global shutter cameras.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(233, 234)๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋ˆˆ๋™์ž๋ฅผ ๊ฒ€์ถœํ•˜๊ณ  ์ถ”์ ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(233, 234)๋Š” AR ๊ธ€๋ž˜์Šค์— ํˆฌ์˜๋˜๋Š” ์˜์ƒ์˜ ์ค‘์‹ฌ์ด ์ฐฉ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋ˆˆ๋™์ž๊ฐ€ ์‘์‹œํ•˜๋Š” ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์— ๋”ฐ๋ผ ์œ„์น˜ํ•˜๋„๋ก ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(233, 234)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210)์˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(233, 234) ์ค‘ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ(233)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210)์˜ ์šฐ์ธก ํ…Œ์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(233, 234) ์ค‘ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ(234)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210)์˜ ์ขŒ์ธก ํ…Œ์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(233, 234)๋Š” ๊ธ€๋กœ๋ฒŒ ์…”ํ„ฐ ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The second camera units 233 and 234 may be used to detect and track the user's pupils. For example, the second camera units 233 and 234 may be used to ensure that the center of the image projected on the AR glasses is located according to the direction in which the wearer's eyes are looking. The second camera units 233 and 234 may be disposed on the second side of the main frame 210. According to one embodiment, one camera 233 of the second camera units 233 and 234 is disposed on the right rim of the main frame 210, and the other camera 233 of the second camera units 233 and 234 The camera 234 may be placed on the left edge of the main frame 210. According to one embodiment, the second camera units 233 and 234 may include global shutter cameras.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ3 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(235)๋Š” ์™ธ๋ถ€ ํ”ผ์‚ฌ์ฒด๋ฅผ ์ดฌ์˜ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ3 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(235)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ฐ€ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210)์˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ3 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(235)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210)์˜ ์ฝ”๋‹ค๋ฆฌ์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ3 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(235)๋Š” HR(high resolution) ๋˜๋Š” PV(photo video)๋ผ๊ณ  ํ•˜๋ฉฐ ๊ณ ํ•ด์ƒ๋„์˜ ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ3 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(235)๋Š” ์ž๋™ ์ดˆ์ (auto focus, AF) ๊ธฐ๋Šฅ ๋ฐ/๋˜๋Š” ๋–จ๋ฆผ ๋ณด์ •(optical image stabilization, OIS) ๊ธฐ๋Šฅ๊ณผ ๊ฐ™์ด ๊ณ ํ™”์งˆ์˜ ์˜์ƒ์„ ํš๋“ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๊ธฐ๋Šฅ์ด ๊ตฌ๋น„๋œ ์ปฌ๋Ÿฌ ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ3 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(235)๋Š” ๊ธ€๋กœ๋ฒŒ ์…”ํ„ฐ ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ ๋˜๋Š” ๋กค๋ง ์…”ํ„ฐ(rolling shutter) ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The third camera unit 235 may be used to photograph an external subject. The third camera unit 235 may be disposed on the first side of the commercial main frame 210. According to one embodiment, the third camera unit 235 may be placed on the bridge of the main frame 210. According to one embodiment, the third camera unit 235 is called a high resolution (HR) or photo video (PV) camera and may include a high resolution camera. According to one embodiment, the third camera unit 235 has at least one function for obtaining high-definition images, such as an auto focus (AF) function and/or an optical image stabilization (OIS) function. This may include a color camera. According to one embodiment, the third camera unit 235 may include a global shutter camera or a rolling shutter camera.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋Š” ์ œ4 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(๋ฏธ๋„์‹œ)๋ฅผ ๋” ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ4 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ์–ผ๊ตด ํ‘œ์ •์„ ๊ฒ€์ถœํ•˜๊ณ  ์ถ”์ ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ4 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210)์˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, the at least one camera may further include a fourth camera unit (not shown). The fourth camera unit may be used to detect and track the user's facial expression. The fourth camera may be disposed on the second side of the main frame 210.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD(200)๋Š” ๋ฐœ๊ด‘๋ถ€(241, 242)(์˜ˆ: LED)๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘๋ถ€(241, 242)๋Š” ๋ฐฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜์— ๋”ฐ๋ผ ์šฉ๋„๊ฐ€ ๋‹ค๋ฅผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์˜ˆ๋กœ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘๋ถ€(241, 242)๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210) ์ฃผ๋ณ€์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋˜๋Š” ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘๋ถ€(241, 242)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(233, 234)๋กœ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋ˆˆ์˜ ์›€์ง์ž„์„ ์ถ”์ ํ•  ๋•Œ, ์‹œ์„  ๊ฒ€์ถœ์„ ์šฉ์ดํ•˜๊ฒŒ ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋ณด์กฐ ์ˆ˜๋‹จ์œผ๋กœ ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ์ด ๊ฒฝ์šฐ ์ ์™ธ์„  ํŒŒ์žฅ์˜ IR LED๊ฐ€ ์ฃผ๋กœ ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์˜ˆ๋กœ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘๋ถ€(241, 242)๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210)๊ณผ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221, 222)๋ฅผ ์ด์–ด์ฃผ๋Š” ํžŒ์ง€(223, 224) ์ฃผ๋ณ€์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ(์˜ˆ: ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(231, 232)) ๋˜๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210)์˜ ์ฝ”๋‹ค๋ฆฌ ์ฃผ๋ณ€์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ(์˜ˆ: ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ3 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(235))์™€ ์ธ์ ‘ํ•˜์—ฌ ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋˜๋Š” ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘๋ถ€(241, 242)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ์˜ ์ดฌ์˜ ์‹œ ์ฃผ๋ณ€ ๋ฐ๊ธฐ๋ฅผ ๋ณด์ถฉํ•˜๋Š” ์ˆ˜๋‹จ์œผ๋กœ ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘๋ถ€(241, 242)๋Š” ์–ด๋‘์šด ํ™˜๊ฒฝ์—์„œ ํ”ผ์‚ฌ์ฒด์˜ ๊ฒ€์ถœ์ด ์šฉ์ดํ•˜์ง€ ์•Š์„ ๋•Œ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, the HMD 200 may include light emitting units 241 and 242 (eg, LED). The light emitting units 241 and 242 may have different purposes depending on their placement location. As an example, when the light emitting units 241 and 242 are disposed around the main frame 210, the light emitting units 241 and 242 detect movement of the user's eyes with the second camera units 233 and 234. When tracking, it can be used as an auxiliary means to facilitate line-of-sight detection, and in this case, IR LEDs with infrared wavelengths can be mainly used. As another example, the light emitting units 241 and 242 are connected to cameras (e.g., the first camera unit 231) disposed around the hinges 223 and 224 connecting the main frame 210 and the wearing units 221 and 222. , 232)) or when disposed adjacent to a camera disposed around the bridge of the main frame 210 (e.g., the third camera unit 235), the light emitting units 241 and 242 are used to capture images of the camera. It can be used as a means of supplementing ambient brightness. For example, the light emitting units 241 and 242 may emit light when it is difficult to detect a subject in a dark environment.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD(200)๋Š” ๋งˆ์ดํฌ(251, 252, 253) ๋ฐ ์Šคํ”ผ์ปค(254, 255)๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋งˆ์ดํฌ(251, 252, 253)๋Š” ์†Œ๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ์ „๊ธฐ์ ์ธ ์‹ ํ˜ธ๋กœ ๋ณ€ํ™˜ํ•˜๊ณ , ๋ณ€ํ™˜๋œ ์ „๊ธฐ ์‹ ํ˜ธ๋ฅผ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๋กœ ์ „๋‹ฌํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์Šคํ”ผ์ปค(254, 255)๋Š” ์Œ์„ฑ ์‹ ํ˜ธ๋ฅผ ์ถœ๋ ฅํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์Šคํ”ผ์ปค(254, 255)๋Š” HMD(200) ๋‚ด๋ถ€์—์„œ ์ƒ์„ฑ๋œ ์ „๊ธฐ์ ์ธ ์‹ ํ˜ธ๋ฅผ ์†Œ๋ฆฌ๋กœ ๋ณ€ํ™˜ํ•˜์—ฌ ์™ธ๋ถ€๋กœ ์ถœ๋ ฅํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋งˆ์ดํฌ(251, 252, 253)๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ์ž…๊ณผ ๊ฐ€๊นŒ์šด ์œ„์น˜์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210)์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์Šคํ”ผ์ปค(254, 255)๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๊ท€์™€ ๊ฐ€๊นŒ์šด ์œ„์น˜์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221, 222)์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, the HMD 200 may include microphones 251, 252, and 253 and speakers 254 and 255. The microphones 251, 252, and 253 can convert sound into electrical signals and transmit the converted electrical signals to the processor. The speakers 254 and 255 can output voice signals. For example, the speakers 254 and 255 may convert electrical signals generated inside the HMD 200 into sound and output it to the outside. According to one embodiment, the microphones 251, 252, and 253 may be placed on the main frame 210 to be placed close to the user's mouth, and the speakers 254, 255 may be placed close to the user's ears. In order to be placed in a close position, it may be placed on the wearing parts 221 and 222.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD(200)๋Š” ์ธ์‡„ํšŒ๋กœ๊ธฐํŒ(261, 262)์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ธ์‡„ํšŒ๋กœ๊ธฐํŒ(261, 262)์€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221, 222)์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ๊ฐ์ข… ์ „์ž ๋ถ€ํ’ˆ๋“ค์ด ์‹ค์žฅ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ธ์‡„ํšŒ๋กœ๊ธฐํŒ(261, 262)์— ์‹ค์žฅ๋˜๋Š” ์ „์ž ๋ถ€ํ’ˆ์€ ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ, ๋ฉ”๋ชจ๋ฆฌ ๋˜๋Š” ํ†ต์‹  ํšŒ๋กœ ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ธ์‡„ํšŒ๋กœ๊ธฐํŒ(261, 262)์€ ํ”Œ๋ ‰์„œ๋ธ” ์ธ์‡„ํšŒ๋กœ๊ธฐํŒ์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ธ์‡„ํšŒ๋กœ๊ธฐํŒ(261, 262)์€ ํ”Œ๋ ‰์„œ๋ธ” ์ธ์‡„ํšŒ๋กœ๊ธฐํŒ์„ ํ†ตํ•ด HMD(200)์˜ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ(์˜ˆ: ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด(211, 212) ๋˜๋Š” ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ(231, 232, 233, 234, 235))์— ์ „๊ธฐ ์‹ ํ˜ธ๋ฅผ ์ „๋‹ฌํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ธ์‡„ํšŒ๋กœ๊ธฐํŒ(261, 262)์€ ์ œ1 ๊ธฐํŒ, ์ œ2 ๊ธฐํŒ ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ๊ธฐํŒ๊ณผ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ๊ธฐํŒ ์‚ฌ์ด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ธํ„ฐํฌ์ €(interposer)๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๋Š” ํ˜•ํƒœ์ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, the HMD 200 may include printed circuit boards 261 and 262. The printed circuit boards 261 and 262 may be placed inside the wearing portions 221 and 222, and various electronic components may be mounted thereon. Electronic components mounted on the printed circuit boards 261 and 262 may include, for example, at least one of a processor, memory, or communication circuit. According to one embodiment, the printed circuit boards 261 and 262 may include flexible printed circuit boards. In addition, the printed circuit boards 261 and 262 are connected to at least one component of the HMD 200 (e.g., displays 211 and 212 or cameras 231, 232, 233, 234, and 235) through a flexible printed circuit board. ) can transmit electrical signals. According to one embodiment, the printed circuit boards 261 and 262 may include a first substrate, a second substrate, and an interposer disposed between the first substrate and the second substrate.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 1์˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ(120))๋Š” HMD(200)์˜ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ๋ฅผ ์ œ์–ดํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ๋ฐ์ดํ„ฐ ์ฒ˜๋ฆฌ ๋˜๋Š” ์—ฐ์‚ฐ์„ ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๋Š” HMD(200)์— ํฌํ•จ์— ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”๋ชจ๋ฆฌ์— ์ €์žฅ๋œ ๋ช…๋ น์–ด๋ฅผ ์‹คํ–‰ํ•จ์œผ๋กœ์จ, HMD(200)์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ ๊ฐ์ง€์™€ ๊ด€๋ จ๋œ ๊ธฐ๋Šฅ์„ ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The processor (eg, processor 120 in FIG. 1) can control at least one component of the HMD 200 and perform various data processing or calculations. According to one embodiment, the processor may perform a function related to detecting a wearing state of the HMD 200 by executing instructions stored in the memory included in the HMD 200.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”๋ชจ๋ฆฌ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 1์˜ ๋ฉ”๋ชจ๋ฆฌ(130))๋Š” HMD(200)์˜ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ์— ์˜ํ•ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋˜๋Š” ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ๋ฐ์ดํ„ฐ๋ฅผ ์ €์žฅํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”๋ชจ๋ฆฌ๋Š” HMD(200)์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ ๊ฐ์ง€์™€ ๊ด€๋ จ๋œ ๋ช…๋ น์–ด ๋ฐ ๋ฐ์ดํ„ฐ๋ฅผ ์ €์žฅํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ด ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ช…๋ น์–ด๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์— ์˜ํ•ด ์‹คํ–‰๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The memory (eg, memory 130 of FIG. 1) may store various data used by at least one component of the HMD 200. According to one embodiment, the memory may store commands and data related to detection of the wearing state of the HMD 200. In this case, the instruction may be executed by the processor.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ†ต์‹  ํšŒ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 1์˜ ํ†ต์‹  ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(190))๋Š” HMD(200)์™€ ์™ธ๋ถ€ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜ ๊ฐ„์˜ ํ†ต์‹ ์„ ์ง€์›ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ†ต์‹  ํšŒ๋กœ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์™ธ๋ถ€ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜์™€ ๊ทœ์ •๋œ ํ†ต์‹  ํ”„๋กœํ† ์ฝœ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์œ ์„  ํ†ต์‹  ๋˜๋Š” ๋ฌด์„  ํ†ต์‹ ์„ ์ˆ˜๋ฆฝํ•˜๊ณ , ์‹ ํ˜ธ ๋˜๋Š” ๋ฐ์ดํ„ฐ๋ฅผ ์†ก์ˆ˜์‹ ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The communication circuit (e.g., communication module 190 of FIG. 1) may support communication between the HMD 200 and an external electronic device. For example, the communication circuit may establish wired or wireless communication with the external electronic device according to a specified communication protocol, and may transmit and receive signals or data.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD(200)๋Š” ๋ฐฐํ„ฐ๋ฆฌ(271, 272)๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฐฐํ„ฐ๋ฆฌ(271, 272)๋Š” HMD(200)์˜ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ์— ์ „๋ ฅ์„ ๊ณต๊ธ‰ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฐฐํ„ฐ๋ฆฌ(271, 272)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221, 222)์˜ ๋‹จ๋ถ€ ๋‚ด์ธก์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, the HMD 200 may include batteries 271 and 272. The batteries 271 and 272 may supply power to at least one component of the HMD 200. According to one embodiment, the batteries 271 and 272 may be disposed inside the ends of the wearing parts 221 and 222.

HMD(200)์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์ด ์ด์— ํ•œ์ •๋˜๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์€ ์•„๋‹ˆ๋‹ค. ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD(200)๋Š” ์ƒ์ˆ ํ•œ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋ฅผ ์ƒ๋žตํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ๋ฅผ ๋” ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์˜ˆ๋กœ, HMD(200)๋Š” ์•ˆํ…Œ๋‚˜ ๋˜๋Š” ์„ผ์„œ ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋ฅผ ๋” ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The configuration of the HMD 200 is not limited to this. According to various embodiments, the HMD 200 may omit at least one of the above-described components and may further include at least one other component. As an example, the HMD 200 may further include at least one of an antenna or a sensor.

๋„ 4๋Š” ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD ์ค‘ VR ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์ „๋ฉด ์‚ฌ์‹œ๋„์ด๊ณ , ๋„ 5๋Š” ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD ์ค‘ VR ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ํ›„๋ฉด ์‚ฌ์‹œ๋„์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of a VR device among HMDs according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, and FIG. 5 is a rear perspective view of a VR device among HMDs according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5๋ฅผ ์ฐธ์กฐํ•˜๋ฉด, HMD(400)(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 1์˜ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101))๋Š” ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410), ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด(๋ฏธ๋„์‹œ) ๋ฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(421, 422)๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.Referring to FIGS. 4 and 5 , the HMD 400 (e.g., the electronic device 101 of FIG. 1 ) may include a main frame 410, a display (not shown), and wearable units 421 and 422. .

์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410)์€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ์ผ๋ถ€(์˜ˆ: ์•ˆ๋ฉด)์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ ์š”์†Œ์— ์˜ํ•ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ์•ˆ๋ฉด์— ์ง€์ง€๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410)์€ ์ œ1 ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ํ–ฅํ•˜๋Š” ์ œ1 ๋ฉด(410a) ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์˜ ๋ฐ˜๋Œ€์ธ ์ œ2 ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ํ–ฅํ•˜๋Š” ์ œ2 ๋ฉด(410b)์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410)์€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž๊ฐ€ ํŽธ์•ˆํ•œ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๊ฐ์„ ๋А๋‚„ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ์„ ์ •๋„๋กœ ๊ฐ€๋ฒผ์šด ์žฌ์งˆ๋กœ ๋งˆ๋ จ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์˜ˆ๋กœ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410)์€ ํ”Œ๋ผ์Šคํ‹ฑ ์žฌ์งˆ๋กœ ๋งˆ๋ จ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410)์€ ๊ฐ•๋„ ๋˜๋Š” ๋ฏธ๊ด€์„ ์œ„ํ•˜์—ฌ ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์žฌ๋ฃŒ ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์œ ๋ฆฌ, ์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน, ๊ธˆ์†(์˜ˆ: ์•Œ๋ฃจ๋ฏธ๋Š„) ๋˜๋Š” ๊ธˆ์† ํ•ฉ๊ธˆ(์˜ˆ: ๊ฐ•์ฒ , ์Šคํ…Œ์ธ๋ ˆ์Šค๊ฐ•, ํ‹ฐํƒ€๋Š„ ๋˜๋Š” ๋งˆ๊ทธ๋„ค์Š˜ ํ•ฉ๊ธˆ) ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋ฅผ ๋” ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์—์„œ๋Š” HMD(400) ์ค‘ VR ์žฅ์น˜๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ธ ๊ฒƒ์œผ๋กœ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410)์˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ๋ฉด(410a)์— ํˆฌ๋ช… ๋ถ€์žฌ๊ฐ€ ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋˜์ง€ ์•Š์„ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ์–ด๋–ค ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์—์„œ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410)์˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ๋ฉด(410a)์— ์™ธ๋ถ€ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(์˜ˆ: ์Šค๋งˆํŠธํฐ)๊ฐ€ ์ฒด๊ฒฐ๋  ์ˆ˜๋„ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD(400)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410)์— ์™ธ๋ถ€ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜๊ฐ€ ์ฒด๊ฒฐ๋œ ์ƒํƒœ์—์„œ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์™ธ๋ถ€ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜๋ฅผ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410)์— ๋”์šฑ ๊ฒฌ๊ณ ํ•˜๊ฒŒ ์ง€์ง€ํ•˜๋„๋ก ๊ฒฐํ•ฉ๋˜๋Š” ์ปค๋ฒ„๋ฅผ ๋” ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ปค๋ฒ„๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410)์— ํ›„ํฌ(hook)์™€ ๊ฐ™์€ ํ˜•ํƒœ๋กœ ๋ฌผ๋ฆฌ์ ์ธ ๊ฒฐํ•ฉ์„ ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ์ž์„์ด๋‚˜ ์ „์ž์„๊ณผ ๊ฐ™์€ ๋ฐฉ์‹์œผ๋กœ ๊ฒฐํ•ฉ๋  ์ˆ˜๋„ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ปค๋ฒ„๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์™ธ๋ถ€ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410)์—์„œ ์ดํƒˆ๋˜๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์„ ๋ฐฉ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410)์˜ ์™ธ๊ด€์„ ํ˜•์„ฑํ•˜๋ฉด์„œ ์‹ฌ๋ฏธ๊ฐ์„ ๋†’์ผ ์ˆ˜๋„ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The main frame 410 may be worn on at least part of the user's head (eg, face) and may be supported on the user's face by various components. The main frame 410 may include a first surface 410a facing in a first direction and a second surface 410b facing in a second direction opposite to the first direction. According to one embodiment, the main frame 410 may be made of a material light enough to allow the user to feel comfortable wearing it. As an example, the main frame 410 may be made of plastic material. In addition, the main frame 410 is made of at least one of various materials, such as glass, ceramic, metal (e.g., aluminum), or metal alloy (e.g., steel, stainless steel, titanium, or magnesium alloy) for strength or aesthetics. More may be included. 4 and 5 show a VR device among the HMD 400, and a transparent member may not be disposed on the first surface 410a of the main frame 410. In some embodiments, the main frame 410 ) An external electronic device (eg, a smartphone) may be fastened to the first surface 410a. According to one embodiment, the HMD 400 may further include a cover coupled to more firmly support the external electronic device to the main frame 410 while the external electronic device is fastened to the main frame 410. You can. The cover may be physically coupled to the main frame 410 in the form of a hook, or may be coupled to the main frame 410 in a manner such as a magnet or electromagnet. For example, the cover can prevent the external electronic device from being separated from the main frame 410, and can also enhance the aesthetics by forming the appearance of the main frame 410.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410)์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋˜๊ณ , ๋ Œ์ฆˆ(411)๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ๋ณด์—ฌ์งˆ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์—์„œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410)์˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ๋ฉด(410b)์„ ํ†ตํ•ด ๋…ธ์ถœ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋Š” ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค๋ฉด, ์•ก์ • ํ‘œ์‹œ ์žฅ์น˜, ๋””์ง€ํ„ธ ๋ฏธ๋Ÿฌ ํ‘œ์‹œ ์žฅ์น˜, ์‹ค๋ฆฌ์ฝ˜ ์•ก์ • ํ‘œ์‹œ ์žฅ์น˜, ์œ ๊ธฐ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘ ๋‹ค์ด์˜ค๋“œ ๋˜๋Š” ๋งˆ์ดํฌ๋กœ ์—˜์ด๋””๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋„์‹œ๋˜์ง€๋Š” ์•Š์ง€๋งŒ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๊ฐ€ ์•ก์ • ํ‘œ์‹œ ์žฅ์น˜, ๋””์ง€ํ„ธ ๋ฏธ๋Ÿฌ ํ‘œ์‹œ ์žฅ์น˜ ๋˜๋Š” ์‹ค๋ฆฌ์ฝ˜ ์•ก์ • ํ‘œ์‹œ ์žฅ์น˜ ์ค‘ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋กœ ์ด๋ฃจ์–ด์ง€๋Š” ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, HMD(400)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด์˜ ํ™”๋ฉด ์ถœ๋ ฅ ์˜์—ญ์œผ๋กœ ๋น›์„ ์กฐ์‚ฌํ•˜๋Š” ๊ด‘์›์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์—์„œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๊ฐ€ ์ž์ฒด์ ์œผ๋กœ ๋น›์„ ๋ฐœ์ƒ์‹œํ‚ฌ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋Š” ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์œ ๊ธฐ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘ ๋‹ค์ด์˜ค๋“œ ๋˜๋Š” ๋งˆ์ดํฌ๋กœ ์—˜์ด๋”” ์ค‘ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋กœ ์ด๋ฃจ์–ด์ง€๋Š” ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, HMD(400)๋Š” ๋ณ„๋„์˜ ๊ด‘์›์„ ํฌํ•จํ•˜์ง€ ์•Š๋”๋ผ๋„ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์—๊ฒŒ ์–‘ํ˜ธํ•œ ํ’ˆ์งˆ์˜ ์˜์ƒ์„ ์ œ๊ณตํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์—์„œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๊ฐ€ ์œ ๊ธฐ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘ ๋‹ค์ด์˜ค๋“œ ๋˜๋Š” ๋งˆ์ดํฌ๋กœ ์—˜์ด๋””๋กœ ๊ตฌํ˜„๋œ๋‹ค๋ฉด ๊ด‘์›์ด ๋ถˆํ•„์š”ํ•˜๋ฏ€๋กœ, HMD(400)๊ฐ€ ๊ฒฝ๋Ÿ‰ํ™”๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The display is placed inside the main frame 410 and can be viewed through a lens 411. In one embodiment, the display may be exposed through the second side 410b of the main frame 410. The display may include, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a digital mirror display device, a silicon liquid crystal display device, an organic light emitting diode, or a micro LED. Although not shown, when the display is made of one of a liquid crystal display device, a digital mirror display device, or a silicon liquid crystal display device, the HMD 400 may include a light source that radiates light to the screen output area of the display. In one embodiment, when the display is capable of generating light on its own, for example, when it is made of one of organic light emitting diodes or micro LEDs, the HMD 400 provides good quality to the user even if it does not include a separate light source. Video can be provided. In one embodiment, if the display is implemented with organic light emitting diodes or micro LEDs, a light source is not required, so the HMD 400 can be lightweight.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(421, 422)๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž๊ฐ€ HMD(400)๋ฅผ ์ฐฉ์šฉํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋„๋ก ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410)์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(421, 422) ์ค‘ ์ œ1 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(421)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410)์˜ ์šฐ์ธก ๋‹จ๋ถ€์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜์–ด ์ผ ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ(์˜ˆ: ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ)์œผ๋กœ ์—ฐ์žฅ๋˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(421, 422) ์ค‘ ์ œ2 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(422)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410)์˜ ์ขŒ์ธก ๋‹จ๋ถ€์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜์–ด ์ผ ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ(์˜ˆ: ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ)์œผ๋กœ ์—ฐ์žฅ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(421, 422)๋Š” ํžŒ์ง€๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410)์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์—์„œ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(421, 422)์ด ์•ˆ๊ฒฝ์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฆฌ ํ˜•ํƒœ๋กœ ๋งˆ๋ จ๋œ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ด์ง€๋งŒ, ์ด์— ํ•œ์ •๋˜๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์€ ์•„๋‹ˆ๋‹ค. ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(421, 422)์€ ๋ (band)์˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ๋กœ ๋งˆ๋ จ๋˜์–ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ ์ผ๋ถ€๋ถ„์„ ๋‘˜๋Ÿฌ์‹ธ๋Š” ํ˜•ํƒœ๋กœ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์กฐ์—ฌ์งˆ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์˜ˆ๋กœ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(421, 422)์€ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋  ํ˜•ํƒœ๋กœ ๋งˆ๋ จ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๊ด€์ž๋†€์ด๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•˜์—ฌ ์ธก๋‘๋ถ€๋ฅผ ๊ฐ€๋กœ์ง€๋ฅด๋„๋ก ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ๊ณ ์ •๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ด ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(421, 422)์€ ์ง€์ •๋œ ํฌ๊ธฐ ์ด์ƒ์˜ ํƒ„์„ฑ๋ ฅ์„ ๊ฐ€์ง€๋Š” ์žฌ์งˆ๋กœ ๋งˆ๋ จ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ ๋‘˜๋ ˆ์— ๋งž์ถฐ์ง€๋„๋ก ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(421, 422)์˜ ๊ธธ์ด๋ฅผ ์กฐ์ ˆํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋Š” ๊ธธ์ด ์กฐ์ ˆ๋ถ€๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ์ปจ๋Œ€, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(421, 422)์€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ธธ์ด ์กฐ์ ˆ๋ถ€๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ๊ธธ์ด๊ฐ€ ์กฐ์ ˆ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410)์ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ์•ˆ๋ฉด์˜ ๋ˆˆ ์ฃผ์œ„๋กœ ๋ฐ€์ฐฉ๋˜๊ฒŒ ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ธธ์ด ์กฐ์ ˆ๋ถ€๋Š” ๊ธฐ์–ด, ๋ฒจํฌ๋กœ ๋˜๋Š” ์ž์„์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋‹ค๋งŒ, ์ดํ•˜์˜ ์„ค๋ช…์—์„œ๋Š”, ์„ค๋ช…์˜ ํŽธ์˜๋ฅผ ์œ„ํ•ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(421, 422)์ด ์•ˆ๊ฒฝ์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฆฌ ํ˜•ํƒœ๋กœ ๋งˆ๋ จ๋œ ๊ฒฝ์šฐ์— ๋Œ€ํ•ด์„œ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๋„๋ก ํ•œ๋‹ค.The wearing parts 421 and 422 may be connected to a portion of the main frame 410 so that the user can wear the HMD 400. According to one embodiment, the first wearing part 421 of the wearing parts 421 and 422 is connected to the right end of the main frame 410 and extends in one direction (e.g., the second direction), Among the wearing parts 421 and 422, the second wearing part 422 may be connected to the left end of the main frame 410 and extend in one direction (eg, the second direction). According to one embodiment, the wearing parts 421 and 422 may be connected to the main frame 410 through a hinge. 4 and 5 show the wearing parts 421 and 422 in the form of glasses legs, but the present invention is not limited thereto. According to various embodiments, the wearing parts 421 and 422 may be provided in the form of a band and may be fastened to the user's head in a manner that surrounds a portion of the user's head. As an example, the wearing parts 421 and 422 may be provided in the form of a single band and may be fixed to the user's head so as to cross the temporal region, including the temples. In this case, the wearing parts (421, 422) may be made of a material with elasticity of a specified size or more, and include a length adjustment part that can adjust the length of the wearing parts (421, 422) to fit the circumference of the user's head. can do. For example, the length of the wearing parts 421 and 422 can be adjusted through the length adjusting part, so that the main frame 410 can fit tightly around the eyes of the user's face. According to one embodiment, the length adjusting part may include gears, Velcro, or magnets. However, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, a case where the wearing parts 421 and 422 are provided in the shape of temples of glasses will be described.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(421, 422) ๊ฐ๊ฐ์€, HMD(400)๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋  ๋•Œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€๋ถ„(์˜ˆ: ๊ด€์ž๋†€์ด)์— ์ ‘์ด‰๋˜๋Š” ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด(421b, 422b) ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด(421b, 422b)์— ๋Œ€ํ–ฅํ•˜๋Š” ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด(421a, 422a)์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(421, 422) ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด(421b, 422b)์—๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(491, 492)๊ฐ€ ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(491, 492)๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(491, 492)๋Š” ๋ณต์ˆ˜ ๊ฐœ์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค์ด ์ธ์ ‘ํ•˜์—ฌ ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ˜•ํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ€์งˆ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(491, 492)๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ์ฒ˜๋ฆฌํ•˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๋Š” ๋งˆ์ดํฌ๋กœ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.Each of the wearing parts 421 and 422 includes an inner surface 421b and 422b that contact a part of the head (e.g., temple) when the HMD 400 is worn on the user's head. It may include outer surfaces 421a and 422a facing 422b). According to one embodiment, touch circuits 491 and 492 may be disposed on the inner surfaces 421b and 422b of at least one of the wearable parts 421 and 422. According to one embodiment, the touch circuits 491 and 492 may include touch cells. For example, the touch circuits 491 and 492 may have a plurality of touch cells arranged adjacent to each other. According to one embodiment, the touch circuits 491 and 492 may include a touch processor that processes touch input. The touch processor may include a microprocessor.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(491, 492)๋Š” HMD(400)์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD(400)๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋  ๋•Œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(421, 422)์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด(421b, 422b)์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(491, 492)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€๋ถ„์— ์ ‘์ด‰๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ ‘์ด‰์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์— ๋Œ€์‘๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ํš๋“ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋Š” ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜(์˜ˆ: ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ์œ„์น˜), ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๋ฉด์ (์˜ˆ: ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ์ด ๋ฉด์ ), ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ(์˜ˆ: ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ๋ฐฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ) ๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜(์˜ˆ: ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜) ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜, ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๋ฉด์ , ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ ๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜ ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋กœ ํ‘œํ˜„๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํŒจํ„ด์œผ๋กœ ์ง€์นญ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜, ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๋ฉด์ , ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ ๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜ ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๊ฐ€ ๋‹ค๋ฅผ ๋•Œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ๋‹ค๋ฅด๋‹ค๊ณ  ํ‘œํ˜„๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The touch circuits 491 and 492 may be used to detect the wearing state of the HMD 400. For example, when the HMD 400 is worn on the user's head, the touch circuits 491 and 492 disposed on the inner surfaces 421b and 422b of the wearing parts 421 and 422 are attached to a portion of the head. It can be contacted, and touch information corresponding to the touch input according to the contact can be obtained. The touch information may include, for example, touch location (e.g., location of a touched touch cell among touch cells), touch area (e.g., total area of touched touch cells among touch cells), and touch type (e.g., touch among touch cells). It may include at least one of the arrangement type of the touch cells) or the number of touches (e.g., the number of touched touch cells among touch cells). The touch information may be referred to as a touch pattern expressed by at least one of touch location, touch area, touch type, or number of touches. For example, the touch information may be expressed as a different touch pattern when at least one of the touch position, touch area, touch type, or number of touches is different.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(491, 492)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํš๋“๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ HMD(400)์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์˜ˆ๋กœ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(491, 492)๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ง€์ •๋œ ํŒจํ„ด(์˜ˆ: ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด)์„ ๊ฐ€์ง€๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(491, 492)๋Š” HMD(400)๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ง€์ •๋œ ํŒจํ„ด์€ ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜๊ฐ€ ์ œ1 ์œ„์น˜์ด๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๋ฉด์ ์ด ์ œ1 ํฌ๊ธฐ ์ด์ƒ์ด๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ๊ฐ€ ์ œ1 ํ˜•ํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ€์ง€๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜๊ฐ€ ์ œ1 ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜ ์ด์ƒ์ด๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ๊ทธ๋“ค์˜ ์กฐํ•ฉ์ธ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ์œ„์น˜์ธ ์ƒํƒœ๋Š”, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(421, 422)์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด(421b, 422b)์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ๋ณต์ˆ˜ ๊ฐœ์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(421, 422)์˜ ๋‹จ๋ถ€ ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ(์˜ˆ: ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410)๊ณผ ๋จผ ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ)์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๊ท€ ๋˜๋Š” ๊ท€์™€ ์ธ์ ‘ํ•œ ๊ด€์ž๋†€์ด ๋ถ€๋ถ„๊ณผ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๋ฉด์ ์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํฌ๊ธฐ ์ด์ƒ์ธ ์ƒํƒœ๋Š”, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(421, 422)์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด(421b, 422b)์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ๋ณต์ˆ˜ ๊ฐœ์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ์ด ๋ฉด์ ์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํฌ๊ธฐ ์ด์ƒ์ธ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ˜•ํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ€์ง€๋Š” ์ƒํƒœ๋Š”, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(421, 422)์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด(421b, 422b)์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ๋ณต์ˆ˜ ๊ฐœ์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ๋ฐฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ˜•ํƒœ์— ๋Œ€์‘๋˜๋Š” ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ˜•ํƒœ๋Š” ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ํ•œ ๋ณ€์ด ๊ธด ์‚ฌ๊ฐํ˜• ๋˜๋Š” ํƒ€์›ํ˜•์ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜ ์ด์ƒ์ธ ์ƒํƒœ๋Š”, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(421, 422)์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด(421b, 422b)์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ๋ณต์ˆ˜ ๊ฐœ์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜ ์ด์ƒ์ธ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์˜ˆ๋กœ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(491, 492)๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ง€์ •๋œ ํŒจํ„ด(์˜ˆ: ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด)์—์„œ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ํŒจํ„ด(์˜ˆ: ์ œ2 ํŒจํ„ด)์œผ๋กœ ๋ณ€๊ฒฝ๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(491, 492)๋Š” HMD(400)๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์—์„œ ํƒˆ๊ฑฐ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, the touch circuits 491 and 492 may detect the wearing state of the HMD 400 using the acquired touch information. For example, if the pattern of the touch input detected through the touch circuits 491 and 492 has a designated pattern (e.g., the first pattern), the touch circuits 491 and 492 allow the HMD 400 to be placed on the user's head. It can be judged that it has been worn. The designated pattern may be, for example, the touch position is a first position, the touch area is a first size or more, the touch shape has a first shape, the number of touches is a first number or a combination thereof. It can indicate a state of being. According to one embodiment, the state in which the touch position is the first position is the wearing part (421, 422) among the plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surfaces (421b, 422b) of the wearing part (421, 422). At least one touch cell disposed in the end direction (e.g., away from the main frame 410) may indicate a state in which it is in contact with the user's ear or a temple portion adjacent to the ear. According to one embodiment, the state in which the touch area is greater than or equal to the first size is when at least one touch cell contacted among a plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surfaces 421b and 422b of the wearing units 421 and 422 It may indicate a state where the total area is greater than or equal to the first size. According to one embodiment, the state in which the touch shape has the first shape is when at least one touch cell is contacted among a plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surfaces 421b and 422b of the wearing parts 421 and 422. The arrangement form may indicate a state corresponding to the first form. The first shape may be, for example, a square or oval with one long side. According to one embodiment, the state in which the number of touches is greater than or equal to the first number is when at least one touch cell touched among a plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surfaces 421b and 422b of the wearing units 421 and 422. It may indicate a state where the number is greater than or equal to the first number. As another example, when the pattern of the touch input detected through the touch circuits 491 and 492 changes from the designated pattern (e.g., the first pattern) to another pattern (e.g., the second pattern), the touch circuits (491, 492, 492) may determine that the HMD 400 has been removed from the user's head.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(491, 492)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํš๋“๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๋กœ ์ „๋‹ฌํ•˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ HMD(400)์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, the touch circuits 491 and 492 transmit the acquired touch information to a processor, and the processor can use the touch information to determine the wearing state of the HMD 400.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD(400)๋Š” ๋ Œ์ฆˆ(411)๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ(411)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋กœ ์ถœ๋ ฅ๋˜๋Š” ํ™”๋ฉด์„ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋ˆˆ์— ๋ณด์—ฌ์งˆ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋„๋ก ์ดˆ์ ์„ ์กฐ์ ˆํ•˜๋Š” ์—ญํ• ์„ ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410)์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก์—๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋‘ ๋ˆˆ์— ๋Œ€๋ฉดํ•˜๋Š” ์œ„์น˜์—, ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๋Š” ๋ Œ์ฆˆ ์กฐ๋ฆฝ์ฒด๊ฐ€ ์‚ฝ์ž…๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž๊ฐ€ HMD(400)๋ฅผ ์ฐฉ์šฉํ•  ๋•Œ, ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋ˆˆ์œผ๋กœ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด์˜ ํ™”๋ฉด์„ ๋ณผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋„๋ก ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410)์˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ๋ฉด(410b)์„ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ(411)์˜ ์ ์–ด๋„ ์ผ ๋ฉด์ด ๋…ธ์ถœ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ(411)๋Š” ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ํ”„๋ ˆ๋„ฌ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ, ํŽœ์ผ€์ดํฌ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ ๋˜๋Š” ๋ฉ€ํ‹ฐ์ฑ„๋„ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ ๋“ฑ์œผ๋กœ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, the HMD 400 may include a lens 411. The lens 411 may serve to adjust the focus so that the screen displayed on the display can be viewed by the user's eyes. For example, a lens assembly including at least one lens may be inserted inside the main frame 410 at a position facing the user's two eyes. In addition, when the user wears the HMD 400, at least one surface of the lens 411 is provided through the second surface 410b of the main frame 410 so that the user can view the screen of the display with the user's eyes. This may be exposed. The lens 411 may be composed of, for example, a Fresnel lens, a Pencake lens, or a multi-channel lens.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD(400)๋Š” ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋Š” ์ œ1 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(431), ์ œ3 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(432) ๋˜๋Š” ์ œ4 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(433) ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, the HMD 400 may include at least one camera. The at least one camera may include at least one of a first camera unit 431, a third camera unit 432, or a fourth camera unit 433.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(431)๋Š” 3Dof ๋˜๋Š” 6Dof์˜ ํ—ค๋“œ ํŠธ๋ž˜ํ‚น, ํ•ธ๋“œ ๊ฒ€์ถœ๊ณผ ํŠธ๋ž˜ํ‚น ๋ฐ ๊ณต๊ฐ„ ์ธ์‹์„ ์œ„ํ•ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(431)๋Š” 6Dof๋ฅผ ์œ„ํ•œ ๊ณต๊ฐ„ ์ธ์‹ ๊ธฐ๋Šฅ, ๋ށ์Šค ์ดฌ์˜์„ ํ†ตํ•œ SLAM ๊ธฐ๋Šฅ ๋˜๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž ์ œ์Šค์ฒ˜ ์ธ์‹ ๊ธฐ๋Šฅ ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋ฅผ ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(431)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410)์˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ๋ฉด(410a)์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(431)๋Š” ๊ธ€๋กœ๋ฒŒ ์…”ํ„ฐ ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The first camera unit 431 can be used for 3Dof or 6Dof head tracking, hand detection and tracking, and spatial recognition. For example, the first camera unit 431 may perform at least one of a spatial recognition function for 6Dof, a SLAM function through depth shooting, or a user gesture recognition function. The first camera unit 431 may be disposed on the first surface 410a of the main frame 410. According to one embodiment, the first camera unit 431 may include a global shutter camera.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ3 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(432)๋Š” ์™ธ๋ถ€ ํ”ผ์‚ฌ์ฒด๋ฅผ ์ดฌ์˜ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ3 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(432)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ฐ€ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410)์˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ๋ฉด(410a)์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ3 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(432)๋Š” HR ๋˜๋Š” PV๋ผ๊ณ  ํ•˜๋ฉฐ ๊ณ ํ•ด์ƒ๋„์˜ ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ3 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(432)๋Š” ์ž๋™ ์ดˆ์  ๊ธฐ๋Šฅ ๋ฐ/๋˜๋Š” ๋–จ๋ฆผ ๋ณด์ • ๊ธฐ๋Šฅ๊ณผ ๊ฐ™์ด ๊ณ ํ™”์งˆ์˜ ์˜์ƒ์„ ํš๋“ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๊ธฐ๋Šฅ์ด ๊ตฌ๋น„๋œ ์ปฌ๋Ÿฌ ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ3 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(432)๋Š” ๊ธ€๋กœ๋ฒŒ ์…”ํ„ฐ ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ ๋˜๋Š” ๋กค๋ง ์…”ํ„ฐ ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The third camera unit 432 may be used to photograph an external subject. The third camera unit 432 may be disposed on the first side 410a of the commercial main frame 410. According to one embodiment, the third camera unit 432 is called HR or PV and may include a high-resolution camera. According to one embodiment, the third camera unit 432 may include a color camera equipped with at least one function for acquiring high-definition images, such as an autofocus function and/or a shake correction function. According to one embodiment, the third camera unit 432 may include a global shutter camera or a rolling shutter camera.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ4 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ๋ถ€(433)๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ์–ผ๊ตด ํ‘œ์ •์„ ๊ฒ€์ถœํ•˜๊ณ  ์ถ”์ ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ4 ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ(433)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410)์˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ๋ฉด(410b)์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The fourth camera unit 433 may be used to detect and track the user's facial expression. The fourth camera 433 may be disposed on the second side 410b of the main frame 410.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD(400)๋Š” ๋ށ์Šค ์„ผ์„œ(440)๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ށ์Šค ์„ผ์„œ(440)๋Š” ๋ฌผ์ฒด์™€์˜ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ์ธก์ •ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ށ์Šค ์„ผ์„œ(440)๋Š” ๋ฐœ๊ด‘๋ถ€ ๋ฐ ์ˆ˜๊ด‘๋ถ€๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , TOF(time of flight)๋ฅผ ์ธก์ •ํ•˜๋Š” ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์„ ํ†ตํ•ด, ๋ฌผ์ฒด์™€์˜ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ ํ™•์ธ์„ ์œ„ํ•ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, the HMD 400 may include a depth sensor 440. The depth sensor 440 can be used to measure the distance to an object. For example, the depth sensor 440 may include a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and may be used to determine the distance to an object through a method of measuring time of flight (TOF).

๋„์‹œ๋˜์ง€๋Š” ์•Š์•˜์ง€๋งŒ, HMD(400)๋Š” ๋ฐœ๊ด‘๋ถ€, ๋งˆ์ดํฌ, ์Šคํ”ผ์ปค, ์ธ์‡„ํšŒ๋กœ๊ธฐํŒ ๋ฐ ๋ฐฐํ„ฐ๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ๋” ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘๋ถ€๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ์™€ ์ธ์ ‘ํ•˜๊ฒŒ ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋งˆ์ดํฌ๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ์ž…๊ณผ ๊ฐ€๊นŒ์šด ์œ„์น˜์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410)์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์Šคํ”ผ์ปค๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๊ท€์™€ ๊ฐ€๊นŒ์šด ์œ„์น˜์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(421, 422)์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ธ์‡„ํšŒ๋กœ๊ธฐํŒ์€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410)์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ๊ฐ์ข… ์ „์ž ๋ถ€ํ’ˆ๋“ค์ด ์‹ค์žฅ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ธ์‡„ํšŒ๋กœ๊ธฐํŒ์— ์‹ค์žฅ๋˜๋Š” ์ „์ž ๋ถ€ํ’ˆ์€ ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ, ๋ฉ”๋ชจ๋ฆฌ ๋˜๋Š” ํ†ต์‹  ํšŒ๋กœ ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฐฐํ„ฐ๋ฆฌ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410)์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.Although not shown, the HMD 400 may further include a light emitting unit, microphone, speaker, printed circuit board, and battery. According to one embodiment, the light emitting unit may be disposed adjacent to the at least one camera. According to one embodiment, the microphone may be placed on the main frame 410 to be placed close to the user's mouth, and the speaker may be placed on the wearing unit 421 to be placed close to the user's ears. , 422). According to one embodiment, the printed circuit board may be placed inside the main frame 410, and various electronic components may be mounted. Electronic components mounted on the printed circuit board may include, for example, at least one of a processor, memory, or communication circuit. According to one embodiment, the battery may be placed inside the main frame 410.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 1์˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ(120))๋Š” HMD(400)์˜ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ๋ฅผ ์ œ์–ดํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ๋ฐ์ดํ„ฐ ์ฒ˜๋ฆฌ ๋˜๋Š” ์—ฐ์‚ฐ์„ ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๋Š” HMD(400)์— ํฌํ•จ์— ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”๋ชจ๋ฆฌ์— ์ €์žฅ๋œ ๋ช…๋ น์–ด๋ฅผ ์‹คํ–‰ํ•จ์œผ๋กœ์จ, HMD(400)์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ ๊ฐ์ง€์™€ ๊ด€๋ จ๋œ ๊ธฐ๋Šฅ์„ ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The processor (eg, processor 120 of FIG. 1) can control at least one component of the HMD 400 and perform various data processing or calculations. According to one embodiment, the processor may perform a function related to detecting a wearing state of the HMD 400 by executing instructions stored in the memory included in the HMD 400.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”๋ชจ๋ฆฌ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 1์˜ ๋ฉ”๋ชจ๋ฆฌ(130))๋Š” HMD(400)์˜ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ์— ์˜ํ•ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋˜๋Š” ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ๋ฐ์ดํ„ฐ๋ฅผ ์ €์žฅํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฉ”๋ชจ๋ฆฌ๋Š” HMD(400)์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ ๊ฐ์ง€์™€ ๊ด€๋ จ๋œ ๋ช…๋ น์–ด ๋ฐ ๋ฐ์ดํ„ฐ๋ฅผ ์ €์žฅํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ด ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ช…๋ น์–ด๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์— ์˜ํ•ด ์‹คํ–‰๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The memory (eg, memory 130 of FIG. 1) may store various data used by at least one component of the HMD 400. According to one embodiment, the memory may store commands and data related to detection of the wearing state of the HMD 400. In this case, the instruction may be executed by the processor.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ†ต์‹  ํšŒ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 1์˜ ํ†ต์‹  ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(190))๋Š” HMD(400)์™€ ์™ธ๋ถ€ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜ ๊ฐ„์˜ ํ†ต์‹ ์„ ์ง€์›ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ†ต์‹  ํšŒ๋กœ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์™ธ๋ถ€ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜์™€ ๊ทœ์ •๋œ ํ†ต์‹  ํ”„๋กœํ† ์ฝœ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์œ ์„  ํ†ต์‹  ๋˜๋Š” ๋ฌด์„  ํ†ต์‹ ์„ ์ˆ˜๋ฆฝํ•˜๊ณ , ์‹ ํ˜ธ ๋˜๋Š” ๋ฐ์ดํ„ฐ๋ฅผ ์†ก์ˆ˜์‹ ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The communication circuit (e.g., communication module 190 of FIG. 1) may support communication between the HMD 400 and an external electronic device. For example, the communication circuit may establish wired or wireless communication with the external electronic device according to a specified communication protocol, and may transmit and receive signals or data.

HMD(400)์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์ด ์ด์— ํ•œ์ •๋˜๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์€ ์•„๋‹ˆ๋‹ค. ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD(400)๋Š” ์ƒ์ˆ ํ•œ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋ฅผ ์ƒ๋žตํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ๋ฅผ ๋” ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์˜ˆ๋กœ, HMD(400)๋Š” ์•ˆํ…Œ๋‚˜ ๋˜๋Š” ์„ผ์„œ ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋ฅผ ๋” ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The configuration of the HMD 400 is not limited to this. According to various embodiments, the HMD 400 may omit at least one of the above-described components and may further include at least one other component. As an example, the HMD 400 may further include at least one of an antenna or a sensor.

๋„ 6์€ ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a touch circuit disposed on a wearable portion of an HMD according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 6์„ ์ฐธ์กฐํ•˜๋ฉด, HMD(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ HMD(200) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ HMD(400))๋Š” HMD๋ฅผ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž๊ฐ€ ์ฐฉ์šฉํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋„๋ก ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(600)(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221, 222) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(421, 422))๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(600)๋Š” HMD์˜ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410))์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.Referring to Figure 6, an HMD (e.g., HMD 200 in Figures 2 and 3 or HMD 400 in Figures 4 and 5) includes a wearing unit 600 (e.g., HMD 400 in Figures 4 and 5) so that a user can wear the HMD. It may include the wearing parts 221 and 222 of FIGS. 2 and 3 or the wearing parts 421 and 422 of FIGS. 4 and 5. The wearable unit 600 may be connected to a portion of the main frame of the HMD (eg, the main frame 210 in FIGS. 2 and 3 or the main frame 410 in FIGS. 4 and 5).

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(600)๋Š” ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด(601)(์˜ˆ: ์•ˆ๊ฒฝ ๋‹ค๋ฆฌ์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด), ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด(601)๊ณผ ๋Œ€ํ–ฅํ•˜๋Š” ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด(603)(์˜ˆ: ์•ˆ๊ฒฝ ๋‹ค๋ฆฌ์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด), ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด(601)์œผ๋กœ๋ถ€ํ„ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด(603)๊นŒ์ง€ ์—ฐ์žฅ๋˜๋Š” ์œ—๋ฉด(602)(์˜ˆ: ์•ˆ๊ฒฝ ๋‹ค๋ฆฌ์˜ ์œ—๋ฉด)์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์—ฌ๊ธฐ์„œ, HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋  ๋•Œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€๋ถ„(์˜ˆ: ๊ด€์ž๋†€์ด)์— ์ ‘์ด‰๋˜๋Š” ๋ฉด์ธ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด(603)์€ ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด(221b, 222b) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด(421b, 422b)์— ๋Œ€์‘๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด(603)์— ๋Œ€ํ–ฅํ•˜๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด(601)์€ ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด(221a, 222a) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด(421a, 422a)์— ๋Œ€์‘๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The wearing portion 600 includes an outer surface 601 (e.g., the outer surface of an eyeglass temple), an inner surface 603 opposing the outer surface 601 (e.g., an inner surface of a temple), and the outer surface. It may include an upper surface 602 (eg, the upper surface of a temple) extending from 601 to the inner surface 603. Here, when the HMD is worn on the user's head, the inner surface 603, which is the surface in contact with a part of the head (e.g., temple), is the inner surface 221b and 222b of FIGS. 2 and 3 or the inner surface 221b and 222b of FIGS. 4 and 3. It may correspond to the inner surfaces 421b and 422b of 5, and the outer surface 601 opposite to the inner surface 603 is the outer surface 221a and 222a of FIGS. 2 and 3 or the outer surfaces 221a and 222a of FIGS. 4 and 5. It may correspond to the outer surfaces 421a and 422a.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(600)์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด(603)์—๋Š” ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(613)(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 3์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(291, 292) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(491, 492))๊ฐ€ ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(613)๋Š” HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋  ๋•Œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(600)์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด(603)์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(613)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€๋ถ„์— ์ ‘์ด‰๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ ‘์ด‰์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ํš๋“ํ•˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํš๋“๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(613)๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(613)๋Š” ๋ณต์ˆ˜ ๊ฐœ์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค์ด ์ธ์ ‘ํ•˜์—ฌ ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ˜•ํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ€์งˆ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.A first touch circuit 613 (e.g., the touch circuits 291 and 292 in FIG. 3 or the touch circuits 491 and 492 in FIGS. 4 and 5) is disposed on the inner surface 603 of the wearing unit 600. It can be. The first touch circuit 613 can be used to detect the wearing state of the HMD. For example, when the HMD is worn on the user's head, the first touch circuit 613 disposed on the inner surface 603 of the wearing unit 600 may contact a portion of the head, and the contact Touch information according to can be acquired, and the wearing state of the HMD can be detected using the obtained touch information. According to one embodiment, the first touch circuit 613 may include a touch cell. For example, the first touch circuit 613 may have a plurality of touch cells arranged adjacent to each other.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(600)์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด(601)์—๋Š” ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(611)๊ฐ€ ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(611)๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ์ˆ˜์‹ ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์˜ˆ๋กœ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(611)๋Š” HMD๋ฅผ ์ œ์–ดํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ์ˆ˜์‹ ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž ์ž…๋ ฅ์€ ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD์—์„œ ์ง€์›ํ•˜๋Š” ๊ธฐ๋Šฅ๊ณผ ๊ด€๋ จ๋œ ์„ค์ •(์˜ˆ: ์†Œ๋ฆฌ ์„ค์ • ๋˜๋Š” ํ†ต์‹  ์„ค์ •) ๋ฐ ์ œ์–ด(์˜ˆ: ์†Œ๋ฆฌ ์กฐ์ ˆ ๋˜๋Š” ์˜์ƒ ์žฌ์ƒ ์ œ์–ด)์™€ ๊ด€๋ จ๋œ ์‹ ํ˜ธ์— ๋Œ€์‘๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(611)๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(611)๋Š” ๋ณต์ˆ˜ ๊ฐœ์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค์ด ์ธ์ ‘ํ•˜์—ฌ ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ˜•ํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ€์งˆ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹คAccording to one embodiment, a second touch circuit 611 may be disposed on the outer surface 601 of the wearing unit 600. The second touch circuit 611 may receive a user's input. As an example, the second touch circuit 611 may receive a user input for controlling the HMD. For example, the user input may correspond to signals related to settings (e.g., sound settings or communication settings) and controls (e.g., sound control or video playback control) related to functions supported by the HMD. According to one embodiment, the second touch circuit 611 may include a touch cell. For example, the second touch circuit 611 may have a plurality of touch cells arranged adjacent to each other.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(613) ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(611)๋Š” ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(600)์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด(601)์œผ๋กœ๋ถ€ํ„ฐ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด(603)๊นŒ์ง€ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(611, 612, 613)๊ฐ€ ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ด ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(611, 612, 613)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(600)์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด(601)์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ œ1 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(631), ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(631)์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€๋กœ๋ถ€ํ„ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(600)์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด(603) ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ์—ฐ์žฅ๋œ ์ œ2 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(632), ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(632)๊ณผ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๊ณ  ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(600)์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด(603)์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ œ3 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(633)์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(611, 612, 613)์˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ3 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(633)์€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(611, 612, 613)์˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(631)๋ณด๋‹ค ์ž‘์€ ๋ฉด์ ์— ๊ฑธ์ณ ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(611, 612, 613)์˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ3 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(633)์€, HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋  ๋•Œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€๋ถ„(์˜ˆ: ๊ด€์ž๋†€์ด)์— ์ ‘์ด‰๋˜๋Š” ๋ฉด์—๋งŒ ์ œํ•œ์ ์œผ๋กœ ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, the first touch circuit 613 and the second touch circuit 611 may be formed integrally. For example, one touch circuit 611, 612, and 613 may be disposed from the outer surface 601 to the inner surface 603 of the wearable unit 600. In this case, the touch circuits 611, 612, and 613 are connected to the first part 631 disposed on the outer surface 601 of the wearing part 600, from a part of the first part 631 to the wearing part ( A second part 632 extending in the direction of the inner surface 603 of the 600, and a third part 633 connected to the second part 632 and disposed on the inner surface 603 of the wearing part 600. ) may include. Additionally, the third portion 633 of the touch circuits 611, 612, and 613 may be disposed over a smaller area than the first portion 631 of the touch circuits 611, 612, and 613. For example, the third portion 633 of the touch circuits 611, 612, and 613 is limited to the surface that contacts a part of the head (e.g., temple) when the HMD is worn on the user's head. can be placed.

์ƒ์ˆ ํ•œ ๋ฐ”์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด, ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ HMD(200) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ HMD(400))๋Š”, ์ œ1 ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ํ–ฅํ•˜๋Š” ์ œ1 ๋ฉด๊ณผ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์˜ ๋ฐ˜๋Œ€ ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์ธ ์ œ2 ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ํ–ฅํ•˜๋Š” ์ œ2 ๋ฉด์„ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๋Š” ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410)), ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ๋ฉด์„ ํ†ตํ•ด ์™ธ๋ถ€๋กœ ๋…ธ์ถœ๋˜๋Š” ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด(211, 212) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด), ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„์˜ ์–‘ ๋‹จ๋ถ€์— ๊ฐ๊ฐ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๊ณ  ์ผ ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ์—ฐ์žฅ๋œ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221, 222), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(421, 422) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 6์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(600)), ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„ ๋˜๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ๊ฐ๊ฐ์€, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋  ๋•Œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€๋ถ„์— ์ ‘์ด‰๋˜๋Š” ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด(221b, 222b), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด(421b, 422b) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 6์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด(603)) ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋Œ€ํ–ฅํ•˜๋Š” ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด(221a, 222a), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด(421a, 422a) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 6์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด(601))์„ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋Š”, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋˜๋Š” ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 3์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(291, 292), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(491, 492) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 6์˜ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ์˜ ์ œ3 ๋ถ€๋ถ„)(613))๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.As described above, according to various embodiments, a head mounted display device (e.g., HMD 200 of FIGS. 2 and 3 or HMD 400 of FIGS. 4 and 5) has a first surface facing in a first direction. and a frame including a second surface facing in a second direction opposite to the first direction (e.g., the main frame 210 in FIGS. 2 and 3 or the main frame 410 in FIGS. 4 and 5), A display exposed to the outside through the second side (e.g., the displays 211 and 212 in FIGS. 2 and 3 or the displays in FIGS. 4 and 5), respectively connected to both ends of the frame and extending in one direction. Parts (e.g., the wearing parts 221 and 222 of FIGS. 2 and 3, the wearing parts 421 and 422 of FIGS. 4 and 5, or the wearing parts 600 of FIG. 6), and the frame or one of the wearing parts It includes at least one processor disposed on the inside, and each of the wearing units has an inner surface (e.g., in FIGS. 2 and 3) that is in contact with a portion of the head when the head mounted display device is worn on the user's head. Inner surfaces 221b and 222b, inner surfaces 421b and 422b in FIGS. 4 and 5 or inner surfaces 603 in FIG. 6) and outer surfaces opposing the inner surfaces (e.g., outer surfaces in FIGS. 2 and 3) It includes side surfaces 221a and 222a, outer surfaces 421a and 422a in FIGS. 4 and 5, or outer surfaces 601 in FIG. 6, and at least one of the wearing parts is disposed on the inner surface. A first touch circuit (e.g., the touch circuits 291 and 292 of FIG. 3, the touch circuits 491 and 492 of FIGS. 4 and 5, or the first touch circuit of FIG. 6 (or a third portion of the touch circuit formed integrally) )(613)) may be included.

๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜๋Š” ์•ˆ๊ฒฝ ํ˜•ํƒœ๋กœ ๋งˆ๋ จ๋˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์•ˆ๊ฒฝ์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฆฌ๋“ค์„ ๊ตฌ์„ฑํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to various embodiments, the head mounted display device is provided in the form of glasses, and the wearing parts may form legs of the glasses.

๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์€ ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ๋ ์˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ๋กœ ๋งˆ๋ จ๋˜์–ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€๋ถ„์„ ๋‘˜๋Ÿฌ์‹ธ๋Š” ํ˜•ํƒœ๋กœ ์กฐ์—ฌ์งˆ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to various embodiments, the wearing parts may be integrally provided in the form of a band and tightened to surround a portion of the head.

๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋Š” ๋ณต์ˆ˜ ๊ฐœ์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค์ด ์ธ์ ‘ํ•˜์—ฌ ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ˜•ํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ€์งˆ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to various embodiments, the first touch circuit may have a plurality of touch cells arranged adjacent to each other.

๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์œผ๋กœ๋ถ€ํ„ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด๊นŒ์ง€ ์—ฐ์žฅ๋˜์–ด ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to various embodiments, the first touch circuit may be arranged to extend from the inner surface to the outer surface.

๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋Š”, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋˜๋Š” ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 6์˜ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ์˜ ์ œ1 ๋ถ€๋ถ„)(611) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 12์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1221))๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to various embodiments, at least one of the wearing parts includes a second touch circuit (e.g., the second touch circuit of FIG. 6 (or the first part of the touch circuit formed integrally) 611 disposed on the outer surface. ) or the touch circuit 1221 of FIG. 12).

๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„์˜ ์ผ๋‹จ๋ถ€์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๋Š” ์ œ1 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€ ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„์˜ ํƒ€๋‹จ๋ถ€์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๋Š” ์ œ2 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to various embodiments, the wearing parts include a first wearing part connected to one end of the frame and a second wearing part connected to the other end of the frame, and the first touch circuit is connected to the first wearing part of the first wearing part. It may be disposed on the inner surface, and the second touch circuit may be disposed on the outer surface of the second wearing part.

๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋Š”, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋˜๋Š” ๋„์ „์ฒด(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 13์˜ ๋„์ „์ฒด(1321))๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to various embodiments, at least one of the wearing parts may include a conductor (eg, the conductor 1321 in FIG. 13) disposed on the outer surface.

๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„์˜ ์ผ๋‹จ๋ถ€์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๋Š” ์ œ1 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€ ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„์˜ ํƒ€๋‹จ๋ถ€์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๋Š” ์ œ2 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋„์ „์ฒด๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to various embodiments, the wearing parts include a first wearing part connected to one end of the frame and a second wearing part connected to the other end of the frame, and the first touch circuit is connected to the first wearing part of the first wearing part. It may be disposed on the inner surface, and the conductor may be disposed on the outer surface of the second wearing part.

๋„ 7์€ ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์‹œ HMD์˜ ์šด์šฉ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a method of operating an HMD when worn, according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 7์„ ์ฐธ์กฐํ•˜๋ฉด, ๋™์ž‘ 710์—์„œ, HMD(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ HMD(200) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ HMD(400))๋Š” ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์—ˆ๋Š”์ง€๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. HMD๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž๊ฐ€ ์ฐฉ์šฉํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋„๋ก ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410))์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๋Š” ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221, 222), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(421, 422) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 6์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(600))๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์— ํ„ฐ์น˜๋œ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ์†๊ฐ€๋ฝ์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์—ฌ๊ธฐ์„œ, ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ์†๊ฐ€๋ฝ์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์— ํ„ฐ์น˜๋˜๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ์†๊ฐ€๋ฝ์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์— ํ„ฐ์น˜๋˜๋Š” ์ƒํ™ฉ์€ ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž๊ฐ€ HMD๋ฅผ ์ฐฉ์šฉํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋ฅผ ์†๊ฐ€๋ฝ์œผ๋กœ ์ง‘๋Š” ์ƒํ™ฉ์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.Referring to FIG. 7 , in operation 710, the HMD (eg, HMD 200 in FIGS. 2 and 3 or HMD 400 in FIGS. 4 and 5) may determine whether the first touch input has been detected. The HMD has a wearable part (e.g., FIG. 2 and It may include the wearing parts 221 and 222 of FIG. 3, the wearing parts 421 and 422 of FIGS. 4 and 5, or the wearing part 600 of FIG. 6. Additionally, the HMD can detect the user's finger touching the wearing unit. Here, when the user's finger touches the wearing part, the HMD can detect the first touch input. A situation in which the user's finger touches the wearing part may include, for example, a situation in which the user pinches the wearing part with a finger to wear the HMD.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 6์˜ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(611)(๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ์˜ ์ œ1 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(631)))๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž๊ฐ€ ์†๊ฐ€๋ฝ์„ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ HMD๋ฅผ ์ง‘์–ด ๋“ค ๋•Œ, ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ์†๊ฐ€๋ฝ์€ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋จผ์ € ์ ‘์ด‰๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ์ฒ˜๋ฆฌํ•˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๋Š” ๋งˆ์ดํฌ๋กœ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, the HMD uses a touch circuit (e.g., the second touch circuit 611 of FIG. 6 (or the first part 631 of the touch circuit formed integrally)) disposed on the outer surface of the wearable unit. The first touch input can be detected. For example, when a user picks up an HMD using a finger, the user's finger may first contact the outer surface of the wearing portion of the HMD, and the first touch input may be performed through a touch circuit disposed on the outer surface of the wearing portion. can be detected. According to one embodiment, the touch circuit may include a touch processor that processes the first touch input. The touch processor may include a microprocessor.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์ง€ ์•Š์•˜๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 710 - ์•„๋‹ˆ์˜ค), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 710์„ ์žฌ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋  ๋•Œ๊นŒ์ง€, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ๊ฐ์ง€๋ฅผ ์ง€์†์ ์œผ๋กœ ๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ • ์ฃผ๊ธฐ๋กœ ๋ชจ๋‹ˆํ„ฐ๋งํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the first touch input is not detected (operation 710 - No), the HMD may re-perform operation 710. For example, the HMD may monitor detection of the first touch input continuously or at regular intervals until the first touch input is detected.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 710 - ์˜ˆ), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 720์—์„œ, ์ „์ฒ˜๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™” ์ˆ˜์ค€์„ ๋†’์ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์˜ˆ๋กœ, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๊ฐ€ ์ €์ „๋ ฅ ๋ชจ๋“œ์—์„œ ์ผ๋ฐ˜ ๋ชจ๋“œ๋กœ ๋™์ž‘ํ•˜๋„๋ก ์ œ์–ดํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์˜ˆ๋กœ, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ๊ตฌ๋™ ์ฃผํŒŒ์ˆ˜๋ฅผ ๋†’์ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๋Š” ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์–ดํ”Œ๋ฆฌ์ผ€์ด์…˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ๋ฉ”๋ชจ๋ฆฌ ๋กœ๋“œ(load) ๋“ฑ ์ถ”๊ฐ€์ ์ธ ์ง€์—ฐ์ด ๋ฐœ์ƒ๋˜์ง€ ์•Š๋„๋ก ์ง€์ •๋œ ์–ดํ”Œ๋ฆฌ์ผ€์ด์…˜์˜ ์‹คํ–‰ ๋ฐ์ดํ„ฐ๋ฅผ ๋ฉ”๋ชจ๋ฆฌ์— ๋ฏธ๋ฆฌ ๋กœ๋“œํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the first touch input is detected (operation 710 - Yes), the HMD may perform preprocessing in operation 720. According to one embodiment, the HMD may increase the activation level of the processor. As an example, the HMD can control the processor to operate from a low-power mode to a normal mode. As another example, the HMD can increase the driving frequency of the processor. The processor may include, for example, an application processor. According to one embodiment, the HMD may pre-load execution data of a designated application into memory to prevent additional delays such as memory load.

๋™์ž‘ 730์—์„œ, HMD๋Š” ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์—ˆ๋Š”์ง€๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 3์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(291, 292), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(491, 492) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 6์˜ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(613)(๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ์˜ ์ œ3 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(633)))๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋  ๋•Œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€๋ถ„์— ์ ‘์ด‰๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ ‘์ด‰์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์— ๋Œ€์‘๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ํš๋“ํ•˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํš๋“๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.In operation 730, the HMD may determine whether a second touch input has been detected. The HMD includes a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the wearable unit (e.g., the touch circuits 291 and 292 in FIG. 3, the touch circuits 491 and 492 in FIGS. 4 and 5, or the first touch circuit 613 in FIG. 6). (or the third part 633 of the touch circuit formed integrally)) can be used to detect the second touch input. For example, when the HMD is worn on the user's head, the touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the wearing unit may be in contact with a portion of the head and may detect the second touch input according to the contact. Additionally, the HMD may acquire touch information corresponding to the second touch input and detect the wearing state of the HMD using the acquired touch information.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์ง€ ์•Š์•˜๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 730 - ์•„๋‹ˆ์˜ค), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 710์„ ์žฌ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the second touch input is not detected (operation 730 - No), the HMD may re-perform operation 710.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 730 - ์˜ˆ), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 740์—์„œ, ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”ํ•˜๊ณ , ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”๋œ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ํ‘œ์‹œํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ๋™์ž‘์„ ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด์˜ ํ™”๋ฉด์„ ์ผœ๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ™”๋ฉด์— ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋™์ž‘์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ํ‘œ์‹œํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the second touch input is detected (operation 730 - Yes), the HMD may activate the display and display information through the activated display in operation 740. For example, when the second touch input is detected, the HMD may determine that the HMD is worn on the user's head, and in order to perform an operation according to wearing the HMD, turn on the screen of the display and display the Information according to operation can be displayed.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ์œ ์ง€๋˜์ง€ ์•Š๋Š”๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ๋น„ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”์‹œํ‚ค๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™” ์ˆ˜์ค€์„ ๋‚ฎ์ถœ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด์˜ ํ™”๋ฉด์„ ๋Œ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๊ฐ€ ์ผ๋ฐ˜ ๋ชจ๋“œ์—์„œ ์ €์ „๋ ฅ ๋ชจ๋“œ๋กœ ๋™์ž‘ํ•˜๋„๋ก ์ œ์–ดํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜๋Š”, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ๊ตฌ๋™ ์ฃผํŒŒ์ˆ˜๋ฅผ ๋‚ฎ์ถœ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, if the HMD determines that the second touch input is not maintained, it may deactivate the display and lower the activation level of the processor. For example, the HMD can turn off the screen of the display. Additionally, the processor can be controlled to operate from a normal mode to a low-power mode. Alternatively, the HMD may lower the driving frequency of the processor.

๋„ 8์€ ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์‹œ HMD์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์šด์šฉ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining another method of operating an HMD when worn, according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 8์„ ์ฐธ์กฐํ•˜๋ฉด, ๋™์ž‘ 810์—์„œ, HMD(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ HMD(200) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ HMD(400))๋Š” ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์—ˆ๋Š”์ง€๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. HMD๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž๊ฐ€ ์ฐฉ์šฉํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋„๋ก ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410))์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๋Š” ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221, 222), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(421, 422) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 6์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(600))๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์— ํ„ฐ์น˜๋œ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ์†๊ฐ€๋ฝ์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์—ฌ๊ธฐ์„œ, ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ์†๊ฐ€๋ฝ์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์— ํ„ฐ์น˜๋˜๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ์†๊ฐ€๋ฝ์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์— ํ„ฐ์น˜๋˜๋Š” ์ƒํ™ฉ์€ ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž๊ฐ€ HMD๋ฅผ ์ฐฉ์šฉํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋ฅผ ์†๊ฐ€๋ฝ์œผ๋กœ ์ง‘๋Š” ์ƒํ™ฉ์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.Referring to FIG. 8 , in operation 810, the HMD (eg, HMD 200 in FIGS. 2 and 3 or HMD 400 in FIGS. 4 and 5) may determine whether a first touch input has been detected. The HMD has a wearable part (e.g., FIG. 2 and It may include the wearing parts 221 and 222 of FIG. 3, the wearing parts 421 and 422 of FIGS. 4 and 5, or the wearing part 600 of FIG. 6. Additionally, the HMD can detect the user's finger touching the wearing unit. Here, when the user's finger touches the wearing part, the HMD can detect the first touch input. A situation in which the user's finger touches the wearing part may include, for example, a situation in which the user pinches the wearing part with a finger to wear the HMD.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 6์˜ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(611)(๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ์˜ ์ œ1 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(631)))๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž๊ฐ€ ์†๊ฐ€๋ฝ์„ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ HMD๋ฅผ ์ง‘์–ด ๋“ค ๋•Œ, ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ์†๊ฐ€๋ฝ์€ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋จผ์ € ์ ‘์ด‰๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ์ฒ˜๋ฆฌํ•˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๋Š” ๋งˆ์ดํฌ๋กœ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, the HMD uses a touch circuit (e.g., the second touch circuit 611 of FIG. 6 (or the first part 631 of the touch circuit formed integrally)) disposed on the outer surface of the wearable unit. The first touch input can be detected. For example, when a user picks up an HMD using a finger, the user's finger may first contact the outer surface of the wearing portion of the HMD, and the first touch input may be performed through a touch circuit disposed on the outer surface of the wearing portion. can be detected. According to one embodiment, the touch circuit may include a touch processor that processes the first touch input. The touch processor may include a microprocessor.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์ง€ ์•Š์•˜๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 810 - ์•„๋‹ˆ์˜ค), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 810์„ ์žฌ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋  ๋•Œ๊นŒ์ง€, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ๊ฐ์ง€๋ฅผ ์ง€์†์ ์œผ๋กœ ๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ • ์ฃผ๊ธฐ๋กœ ๋ชจ๋‹ˆํ„ฐ๋งํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the first touch input is not detected (operation 810 - No), the HMD may re-perform operation 810. For example, the HMD may monitor detection of the first touch input continuously or at regular intervals until the first touch input is detected.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 810 - ์˜ˆ), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 820์—์„œ, ์ „์ฒ˜๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•˜๊ณ , ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™” ์ˆ˜์ค€์„ ๋†’์ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์˜ˆ๋กœ, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๊ฐ€ ์ €์ „๋ ฅ ๋ชจ๋“œ์—์„œ ์ผ๋ฐ˜ ๋ชจ๋“œ๋กœ ๋™์ž‘ํ•˜๋„๋ก ์ œ์–ดํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์˜ˆ๋กœ, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ๊ตฌ๋™ ์ฃผํŒŒ์ˆ˜๋ฅผ ๋†’์ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๋Š” ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์–ดํ”Œ๋ฆฌ์ผ€์ด์…˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ๋ฉ”๋ชจ๋ฆฌ ๋กœ๋“œ ๋“ฑ ์ถ”๊ฐ€์ ์ธ ์ง€์—ฐ์ด ๋ฐœ์ƒ๋˜์ง€ ์•Š๋„๋ก ์ง€์ •๋œ ์–ดํ”Œ๋ฆฌ์ผ€์ด์…˜์˜ ์‹คํ–‰ ๋ฐ์ดํ„ฐ๋ฅผ ๋ฉ”๋ชจ๋ฆฌ์— ๋ฏธ๋ฆฌ ๋กœ๋“œํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด์˜ ํ™”๋ฉด์„ ์ผค ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the first touch input is detected (operation 810 - Yes), the HMD may perform preprocessing and activate the display in operation 820. According to one embodiment, the HMD may increase the activation level of the processor. As an example, the HMD can control the processor to operate from a low-power mode to a normal mode. As another example, the HMD can increase the driving frequency of the processor. The processor may include, for example, an application processor. According to one embodiment, the HMD may preload execution data of a designated application into memory to prevent additional delays such as memory loading. Additionally, the HMD can turn on the screen of the display.

๋™์ž‘ 830์—์„œ, HMD๋Š” ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์—ˆ๋Š”์ง€๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 3์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(291, 292), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(491, 492) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 6์˜ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(613)(๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ์˜ ์ œ3 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(633)))๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋  ๋•Œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€๋ถ„์— ์ ‘์ด‰๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ ‘์ด‰์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์— ๋Œ€์‘๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ํš๋“ํ•˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํš๋“๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.In operation 830, the HMD may determine whether a second touch input has been detected. The HMD includes a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the wearable unit (e.g., the touch circuits 291 and 292 in FIG. 3, the touch circuits 491 and 492 in FIGS. 4 and 5, or the first touch circuit 613 in FIG. 6). (or the third part 633 of the touch circuit formed integrally)) can be used to detect the second touch input. For example, when the HMD is worn on the user's head, the touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the wearing unit may be in contact with a portion of the head and may detect the second touch input according to the contact. Additionally, the HMD may acquire touch information corresponding to the second touch input and detect the wearing state of the HMD using the acquired touch information.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์ง€ ์•Š์•˜๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 830 - ์•„๋‹ˆ์˜ค), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 810์„ ์žฌ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the second touch input is not detected (operation 830 - No), the HMD may re-perform operation 810.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 830 - ์˜ˆ), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 840์—์„œ, ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”๋œ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ํ‘œ์‹œํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ๋™์ž‘์„ ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด์˜ ํ™”๋ฉด์— ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋™์ž‘์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ํ‘œ์‹œํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the second touch input is detected (operation 830 - Yes), the HMD may display information through the activated display in operation 840. For example, when the second touch input is detected, the HMD may determine that the HMD is worn on the user's head, and in order to perform an operation according to wearing the HMD, information according to the operation may be displayed on the screen of the display. It can be displayed.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ์œ ์ง€๋˜์ง€ ์•Š๋Š”๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ๋น„ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”์‹œํ‚ค๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™” ์ˆ˜์ค€์„ ๋‚ฎ์ถœ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด์˜ ํ™”๋ฉด์„ ๋Œ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๊ฐ€ ์ผ๋ฐ˜ ๋ชจ๋“œ์—์„œ ์ €์ „๋ ฅ ๋ชจ๋“œ๋กœ ๋™์ž‘ํ•˜๋„๋ก ์ œ์–ดํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜๋Š”, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ๊ตฌ๋™ ์ฃผํŒŒ์ˆ˜๋ฅผ ๋‚ฎ์ถœ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, if the HMD determines that the second touch input is not maintained, it may deactivate the display and lower the activation level of the processor. For example, the HMD can turn off the screen of the display. Additionally, the processor can be controlled to operate from a normal mode to a low-power mode. Alternatively, the HMD may lower the driving frequency of the processor.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋œ ํ›„ ์ง€์ •๋œ ์‹œ๊ฐ„(์˜ˆ: 10์ดˆ) ๋‚ด์— ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์ง€ ์•Š์œผ๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ๋น„ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”์‹œํ‚ฌ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด์˜ ํ™”๋ฉด์„ ๋Œ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, the HMD may deactivate the display if the second touch input is not detected within a specified time (eg, 10 seconds) after the first touch input is detected. For example, the HMD can turn off the screen of the display.

๋„ 9๋Š” ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD์˜ ํƒˆ๊ฑฐ ์‹œ HMD์˜ ์šด์šฉ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining a method of operating an HMD when removing the HMD according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 9๋ฅผ ์ฐธ์กฐํ•˜๋ฉด, HMD(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ HMD(200) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ HMD(400))๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž๊ฐ€ ์ฐฉ์šฉํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋„๋ก ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410))์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๋Š” ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221, 222), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(421, 422) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 6์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(600))๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 3์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(291, 292), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(491, 492) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 6์˜ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(613)(๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ์˜ ์ œ3 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(633)))๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋  ๋•Œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€๋ถ„์— ์ ‘์ด‰๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ ‘์ด‰์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์— ๋Œ€์‘๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ํš๋“ํ•˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํš๋“๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋Š” ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜(์˜ˆ: ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ์œ„์น˜), ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๋ฉด์ (์˜ˆ: ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ์ด ๋ฉด์ ), ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ(์˜ˆ: ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ๋ฐฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ) ๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜(์˜ˆ: ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜) ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜, ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๋ฉด์ , ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ ๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜ ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋กœ ํ‘œํ˜„๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํŒจํ„ด์œผ๋กœ ์ง€์นญ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜, ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๋ฉด์ , ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ ๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜ ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๊ฐ€ ๋‹ค๋ฅผ ๋•Œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ๋‹ค๋ฅด๋‹ค๊ณ  ํ‘œํ˜„๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.Referring to Figure 9, an HMD (e.g., HMD 200 in Figures 2 and 3 or HMD 400 in Figures 4 and 5) has a main frame (e.g., HMD 200 in Figures 2 and 3) so that the user can wear it. A wearing part (e.g., the wearing parts 221 and 222 of FIGS. 2 and 3, the wearing parts of FIGS. 4 and 5) connected to a portion of the main frame 210 or the main frame 410 of FIGS. 4 and 5. It may include (421, 422) or the wearing part 600 of FIG. 6. In addition, the HMD includes a touch circuit (e.g., the touch circuits 291 and 292 in FIG. 3, the touch circuits 491 and 492 in FIGS. 4 and 5, or the first touch circuit in FIG. 6) disposed on the inner surface of the wearable unit. The wearing state of the HMD can be detected using 613) (or the third part 633 of the integrated touch circuit). For example, when the HMD is worn on the user's head, the touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the wearing unit may contact a portion of the head and detect a touch input according to the contact. Additionally, the HMD may acquire touch information corresponding to the touch input and detect the wearing state of the HMD using the acquired touch information. The touch information may include, for example, touch location (e.g., location of a touched touch cell among touch cells), touch area (e.g., total area of touched touch cells among touch cells), and touch type (e.g., touch among touch cells). It may include at least one of the arrangement type of the touch cells) or the number of touches (e.g., the number of touched touch cells among touch cells). The touch information may be referred to as a touch pattern expressed by at least one of touch location, touch area, touch type, or number of touches. For example, the touch information may be expressed as a different touch pattern when at least one of the touch position, touch area, touch type, or number of touches is different.

HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด์„ ๊ฐ€์ง€๋ฉด, HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด์€ ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜๊ฐ€ ์ œ1 ์œ„์น˜์ด๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๋ฉด์ ์ด ์ œ1 ํฌ๊ธฐ ์ด์ƒ์ด๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ๊ฐ€ ์ œ1 ํ˜•ํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ€์ง€๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜๊ฐ€ ์ œ1 ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜ ์ด์ƒ์ด๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ๊ทธ๋“ค์˜ ์กฐํ•ฉ์ธ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ์œ„์น˜์ธ ์ƒํƒœ๋Š”, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ๋ณต์ˆ˜ ๊ฐœ์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‹จ๋ถ€ ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๊ท€ ๋˜๋Š” ๊ท€์™€ ์ธ์ ‘ํ•œ ๊ด€์ž๋†€์ด ๋ถ€๋ถ„๊ณผ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๋ฉด์ ์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํฌ๊ธฐ ์ด์ƒ์ธ ์ƒํƒœ๋Š”, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ๋ณต์ˆ˜ ๊ฐœ์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ์ด ๋ฉด์ ์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํฌ๊ธฐ ์ด์ƒ์ธ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ˜•ํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ€์ง€๋Š” ์ƒํƒœ๋Š”, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ๋ณต์ˆ˜ ๊ฐœ์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ๋ฐฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ˜•ํƒœ์— ๋Œ€์‘๋˜๋Š” ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ˜•ํƒœ๋Š” ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ํ•œ ๋ณ€์ด ๊ธด ์‚ฌ๊ฐํ˜• ๋˜๋Š” ํƒ€์›ํ˜•์ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜ ์ด์ƒ์ธ ์ƒํƒœ๋Š”, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ๋ณต์ˆ˜ ๊ฐœ์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜ ์ด์ƒ์ธ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If the pattern of the touch input detected through the touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the wearing unit has a first pattern, the HMD may determine that the HMD is worn on the user's head. The first pattern may be, for example, the touch position is a first position, the touch area is a first size or more, the touch shape has a first shape, the number of touches is a first number or more, or It can represent a combination state. According to one embodiment, when the touch position is the first position, at least one touch cell arranged in the end direction of the wearable part among the plurality of touch cells arranged on the inner surface of the wearable part is connected to the user's ear or the ear. It may indicate contact with the adjacent temple area. According to one embodiment, the state in which the touch area is greater than or equal to the first size indicates a state in which the total area of at least one touch cell contacted among the plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surface of the wearing unit is greater than or equal to the first size. You can. According to one embodiment, the state in which the touch shape has the first shape is when the arrangement shape of at least one touched touch cell among the plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surface of the wearing unit corresponds to the first shape. It can indicate status. The first shape may be, for example, a square or oval with one long side. According to one embodiment, the state in which the number of touches is greater than or equal to the first number may indicate a state in which the number of at least one touched touch cell among a plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surface of the wearing unit is greater than or equal to the first number. there is.

HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋œ ์ƒํƒœ(์ฆ‰, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด์„ ๊ฐ€์ง€๋Š” ์ƒํƒœ)์—์„œ, HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 910์—์„œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด์—์„œ ์ œ2 ํŒจํ„ด์œผ๋กœ ๋ณ€๊ฒฝ๋˜์—ˆ๋Š”์ง€๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํŒจํ„ด์€ ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ์œ„์น˜์™€ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์ œ2 ์œ„์น˜์ด๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๋ฉด์ ์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํฌ๊ธฐ ๋ฏธ๋งŒ์ด๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ˜•ํƒœ์™€ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์ œ2 ํ˜•ํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ€์ง€๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜ ๋ฏธ๋งŒ์ด๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ๊ทธ๋“ค์˜ ์กฐํ•ฉ์ธ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.When the HMD is worn on the user's head (i.e., the pattern of the touch input has the first pattern), the HMD changes the pattern of the touch input from the first pattern to the second pattern in operation 910. You can determine whether it has been done. The second pattern may be, for example, the touch position is a second position different from the first position, the touch area is less than the first size, or the touch shape has a second shape different from the first shape. Alternatively, it may indicate a state in which the number of touches is less than the first number, or a combination thereof.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด์—์„œ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํŒจํ„ด์œผ๋กœ ๋ณ€๊ฒฝ๋˜์ง€ ์•Š์•˜๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 910 - ์•„๋‹ˆ์˜ค), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 910์„ ์žฌ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ๋ณ€๊ฒฝ๋  ๋•Œ๊นŒ์ง€, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์˜ ๋ณ€๊ฒฝ์„ ์ง€์†์ ์œผ๋กœ ๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ • ์ฃผ๊ธฐ๋กœ ๋ชจ๋‹ˆํ„ฐ๋งํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the pattern of the touch input has not changed from the first pattern to the second pattern (operation 910 - No), the HMD may re-perform operation 910. For example, the HMD may monitor changes in the pattern of the touch input continuously or at regular intervals until the pattern of the touch input changes.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด์—์„œ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํŒจํ„ด์œผ๋กœ ๋ณ€๊ฒฝ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 910 - ์˜ˆ), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 920์—์„œ, HMD์˜ ์‹œ์Šคํ…œ์˜ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”๋ฅผ ์œ ์ง€ํ•˜๊ณ  ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ๋น„ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”์‹œํ‚ฌ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™” ์ˆ˜์ค€์„ ์œ ์ง€ํ•˜๊ณ , ๋ฉ”๋ชจ๋ฆฌ์— ๋กœ๋“œ๋œ ๋ฐ์ดํ„ฐ๋ฅผ ์œ ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด์˜ ํ™”๋ฉด์„ ๋Œ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the pattern of the touch input has changed from the first pattern to the second pattern (operation 910 - Yes), the HMD may maintain activation of the system of the HMD and deactivate the display in operation 920. For example, the HMD can maintain the processor's activation level and data loaded into memory. Additionally, the HMD can turn off the screen of the display.

๋™์ž‘ 930์—์„œ, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ์ข…๋ฃŒ๋˜์—ˆ๋Š”์ง€๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์ง€ ์•Š๋Š”์ง€๋ฅผ ํ™•์ธํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.In operation 930, the HMD may determine whether the touch input has ended. For example, the HMD can check whether the touch input is not detected through the touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the wearable unit.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ์ข…๋ฃŒ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 930 - ์˜ˆ), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 940์—์„œ, HMD์˜ ์‹œ์Šคํ…œ์„ ํœด์ง€๊ธฐ๋กœ ์ง„์ž…์‹œํ‚ฌ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์ง€ ์•Š์œผ๋ฉด, HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์—์„œ ํƒˆ๊ฑฐ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ด์— ๋”ฐ๋ผ, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๊ฐ€ ์ผ๋ฐ˜ ๋ชจ๋“œ์—์„œ ์ €์ „๋ ฅ ๋ชจ๋“œ๋กœ ๋™์ž‘ํ•˜๋„๋ก ์ œ์–ดํ•จ์œผ๋กœ์จ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™” ์ˆ˜์ค€์„ ๋‚ฎ์ถœ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the touch input has ended (operation 930 - Yes), the HMD may enter the HMD's system into a rest period in operation 940. For example, if the touch input is not detected through the touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the wearable unit, the HMD may determine that the HMD has been removed from the user's head. Accordingly, the HMD can control the processor to operate from a normal mode to a low-power mode, thereby lowering the activation level of the processor.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ์ข…๋ฃŒ๋˜์ง€ ์•Š์•˜๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 930 - ์•„๋‹ˆ์˜ค), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 950์—์„œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํŒจํ„ด์—์„œ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด์œผ๋กœ ๋ณ€๊ฒฝ๋˜์—ˆ๋Š”์ง€๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๋‹ค์‹œ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด์„ ๊ฐ€์ง€๋Š”์ง€๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the touch input has not ended (operation 930 - No), the HMD may determine whether the pattern of the touch input has changed from the second pattern to the first pattern in operation 950. For example, the HMD may determine whether a touch input detected through the touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the wearable unit has the first pattern again.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํŒจํ„ด์—์„œ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด์œผ๋กœ ๋ณ€๊ฒฝ๋˜์ง€ ์•Š์•˜๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 950 - ์•„๋‹ˆ์˜ค), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 920์„ ์žฌ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” HMD์˜ ์‹œ์Šคํ…œ์˜ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”๋ฅผ ์œ ์ง€ํ•˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด์˜ ๋น„ํ™œ์„ฑํ™” ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ์œ ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the pattern of the touch input has not changed from the second pattern to the first pattern (operation 950 - No), the HMD may re-perform operation 920. For example, the HMD may keep the HMD's system activated and the display deactivated.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํŒจํ„ด์—์„œ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด์œผ๋กœ ๋ณ€๊ฒฝ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 950 - ์˜ˆ), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 960์—์„œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”์‹œํ‚ฌ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๋‹ค์‹œ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด์„ ๊ฐ€์ง€๋ฉด, HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์žฌ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ด์— ๋”ฐ๋ผ, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด์˜ ํ™”๋ฉด์„ ๋‹ค์‹œ ์ผค ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the pattern of the touch input has changed from the second pattern to the first pattern (operation 950 - Yes), the HMD may activate the display in operation 960. For example, if the touch input detected through the touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the wearing unit again has the first pattern, the HMD may determine that the HMD has been reworn on the user's head. Accordingly, the HMD can turn on the screen of the display again.

๋„ 10์€ ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ ์‹œ HMD์˜ ์šด์šฉ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a method of operating an HMD when the wearing parts of the HMD are separated according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 10์„ ์ฐธ์กฐํ•˜๋ฉด, HMD(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ HMD(200) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ HMD(400))๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž๊ฐ€ ์ฐฉ์šฉํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋„๋ก ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410))์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๋Š” ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221, 222), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(421, 422) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 6์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(600))๋“ค์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋Š” ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 3์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(291, 292), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(491, 492) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 6์˜ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(613)(๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ์˜ ์ œ3 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(633)))๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋Š” ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 6์˜ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(611)(๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ์˜ ์ œ1 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(631))) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„์ „์ฒด๊ฐ€ ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.Referring to Figure 10, an HMD (e.g., HMD 200 in Figures 2 and 3 or HMD 400 in Figures 4 and 5) has a main frame (e.g., HMD 200 in Figures 2 and 3) so that the user can wear it. A wearing part (e.g., the wearing parts 221 and 222 of FIGS. 2 and 3, the wearing parts of FIGS. 4 and 5) connected to a portion of the main frame 210 or the main frame 410 of FIGS. 4 and 5. It may include (421, 422) or the wearing part 600 of FIG. 6. At least one of the wearable parts includes a touch circuit disposed on the inner side (e.g., the touch circuits 291 and 292 in FIG. 3, the touch circuits 491 and 492 in FIGS. 4 and 5, or the first touch circuit in FIG. 6 ( The wearing state of the HMD can be detected using 613) (or the third part 633 of the integrated touch circuit). In addition, at least one of the wearable parts may have a touch circuit (e.g., the second touch circuit 611 of FIG. 6 (or the first part 631 of the integrated touch circuit 631)) or a conductor disposed on the outer surface. .

๋™์ž‘ 1010์—์„œ, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์—ˆ๋Š”์ง€๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋˜๋Š” ์ƒํ™ฉ์€ ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ์„œ๋กœ ์ด๊ฒฉ๋˜๋Š” ์ƒํ™ฉ์œผ๋กœ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ์•ˆ๊ฒฝ์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฆฌ ํ˜•ํƒœ๋กœ ๋งˆ๋ จ๋œ ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ์•ˆ๊ฒฝ์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ๋ฒŒ์–ด์ง€๋Š” ์ƒํ™ฉ์„ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์–ด๋А ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋œ ์ƒํƒœ์—์„œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ๊ณผ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ๋ณ€๊ฒฝ๋˜๊ฑฐ๋‚˜ ์ข…๋ฃŒ๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์–ด๋А ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด์„ ๊ฐ€์ง€๋Š” ์ƒํƒœ์—์„œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด์—์„œ ์ œ2 ํŒจํ„ด์œผ๋กœ ๋ณ€๊ฒฝ๋˜๊ฑฐ๋‚˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ์ข…๋ฃŒ๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด์„ ๊ฐ€์ง€๋Š” ์ƒํ™ฉ์€ ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์–ด๋А ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ๋„์ „์ฒด์™€ ๊ทผ์ ‘ํ•˜๊ฑฐ๋‚˜ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ์ƒํ™ฉ์„ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํŒจํ„ด์„ ๊ฐ€์ง€๋Š” ์ƒํ™ฉ์€ ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์–ด๋А ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ๋„์ „์ฒด์™€ ์ผ์ • ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ ์ด์ƒ ์ด๊ฒฉ๋œ ์ƒํ™ฉ์„ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.In operation 1010, the HMD may determine whether separation of the wearing parts has been detected. For example, a situation in which the wearing parts are separated may indicate a situation in which the wearing parts are spaced apart from each other, and when the wearing parts are provided in the form of legs of glasses, it may represent a situation in which the legs of the glasses are spread out. According to one embodiment, the HMD detects a first touch input through a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearable parts, and a touch circuit disposed on the outer surface of another one of the wearable parts. If the pattern of the first touch input and the second touch input is changed or terminated while the second touch input is detected, it may be determined that the wearable parts are separated. According to one embodiment, the HMD has a first pattern of touch input detected through a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearable parts, and the pattern of the touch input is the first pattern. When the pattern is changed to the second pattern or the touch input is terminated, it may be determined that the wearing parts are separated. A situation in which the pattern of the touch input has the first pattern is, for example, a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearable parts and a conductor disposed on the outer surface of the other one of the wearable parts. It can indicate a situation where a person is close to or in contact with a body. In addition, a situation in which the pattern of the touch input has the second pattern is, for example, a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearable parts is disposed on the outer surface of the other one of the wearable parts. It can represent a situation where the conductor is separated by a certain distance or more.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์ง€ ์•Š์•˜๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 1010 - ์•„๋‹ˆ์˜ค), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 1010์„ ์žฌ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ๊ฐ์ง€๋  ๋•Œ๊นŒ์ง€, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ์ง€์†์ ์œผ๋กœ ๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ • ์ฃผ๊ธฐ๋กœ ๋ชจ๋‹ˆํ„ฐ๋งํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that separation of the wearing parts has not been detected (operation 1010 - No), the HMD may re-perform operation 1010. For example, the HMD may monitor the separation of the wearing parts continuously or at regular intervals until the separation of the wearing parts is detected.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 1010 - ์˜ˆ), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 1020์—์„œ, ์ „์ฒ˜๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™” ์ˆ˜์ค€์„ ๋†’์ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์˜ˆ๋กœ, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๊ฐ€ ์ €์ „๋ ฅ ๋ชจ๋“œ์—์„œ ์ผ๋ฐ˜ ๋ชจ๋“œ๋กœ ๋™์ž‘ํ•˜๋„๋ก ์ œ์–ดํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์˜ˆ๋กœ, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ๊ตฌ๋™ ์ฃผํŒŒ์ˆ˜๋ฅผ ๋†’์ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๋Š” ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์–ดํ”Œ๋ฆฌ์ผ€์ด์…˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ๋ฉ”๋ชจ๋ฆฌ ๋กœ๋“œ ๋“ฑ ์ถ”๊ฐ€์ ์ธ ์ง€์—ฐ์ด ๋ฐœ์ƒ๋˜์ง€ ์•Š๋„๋ก ์ง€์ •๋œ ์–ดํ”Œ๋ฆฌ์ผ€์ด์…˜์˜ ์‹คํ–‰ ๋ฐ์ดํ„ฐ๋ฅผ ๋ฉ”๋ชจ๋ฆฌ์— ๋ฏธ๋ฆฌ ๋กœ๋“œํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the separation of the wearing parts is detected (operation 1010 - Yes), the HMD may perform preprocessing in operation 1020. According to one embodiment, the HMD may increase the activation level of the processor. As an example, the HMD can control the processor to operate from a low-power mode to a normal mode. As another example, the HMD can increase the driving frequency of the processor. The processor may include, for example, an application processor. According to one embodiment, the HMD may pre-load execution data of a designated application into memory to prevent additional delays such as memory loading.

๋™์ž‘ 1030์—์„œ, HMD๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์—ˆ๋Š”์ง€๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋  ๋•Œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€๋ถ„์— ์ ‘์ด‰๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ ‘์ด‰์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์— ๋Œ€์‘๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ํš๋“ํ•˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํš๋“๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.In operation 1030, the HMD may determine whether a touch input has been detected. The HMD can detect the touch input using a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearable parts. For example, when an HMD is worn on a user's head, a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearing units may be in contact with a portion of the head and may detect the touch input according to the contact. there is. Additionally, the HMD may acquire touch information corresponding to the touch input and detect the wearing state of the HMD using the acquired touch information.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์ง€ ์•Š์•˜๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 1030 - ์•„๋‹ˆ์˜ค), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 1010์„ ์žฌ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the touch input is not detected (operation 1030 - No), the HMD may re-perform operation 1010.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 1030 - ์˜ˆ), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 1040์—์„œ, ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”ํ•˜๊ณ , ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”๋œ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ํ‘œ์‹œํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ๋™์ž‘์„ ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด์˜ ํ™”๋ฉด์„ ์ผœ๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ™”๋ฉด์— ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋™์ž‘์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ํ‘œ์‹œํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the touch input is detected (operation 1030 - Yes), the HMD may activate the display in operation 1040 and display information through the activated display. For example, when the touch input is detected, the HMD may determine that the HMD is worn on the user's head, turn on the screen of the display to perform an operation according to wearing the HMD, and display the operation on the screen. Information can be displayed.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ์œ ์ง€๋˜์ง€ ์•Š๋Š”๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ๋น„ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”์‹œํ‚ค๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™” ์ˆ˜์ค€์„ ๋‚ฎ์ถœ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด์˜ ํ™”๋ฉด์„ ๋Œ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๊ฐ€ ์ผ๋ฐ˜ ๋ชจ๋“œ์—์„œ ์ €์ „๋ ฅ ๋ชจ๋“œ๋กœ ๋™์ž‘ํ•˜๋„๋ก ์ œ์–ดํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜๋Š”, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ๊ตฌ๋™ ์ฃผํŒŒ์ˆ˜๋ฅผ ๋‚ฎ์ถœ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, if the HMD determines that the touch input is not maintained, it may deactivate the display and lower the activation level of the processor. For example, the HMD can turn off the screen of the display. Additionally, the processor can be controlled to operate from a normal mode to a low-power mode. Alternatively, the HMD may lower the driving frequency of the processor.

๋„ 11์€ ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ ์‹œ HMD์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์šด์šฉ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining another method of operating the HMD when the wearing parts of the HMD are separated according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 11์„ ์ฐธ์กฐํ•˜๋ฉด, HMD(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ HMD(200) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ HMD(400))๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž๊ฐ€ ์ฐฉ์šฉํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋„๋ก ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410))์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๋Š” ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221, 222), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(421, 422) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 6์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(600))๋“ค์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋Š” ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 3์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(291, 292), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(491, 492) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 6์˜ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(613)(๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ์˜ ์ œ3 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(633)))๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋Š” ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 6์˜ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(611)(๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ์˜ ์ œ1 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(631))) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„์ „์ฒด๊ฐ€ ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.Referring to Figure 11, an HMD (e.g., HMD 200 in Figures 2 and 3 or HMD 400 in Figures 4 and 5) has a main frame (e.g., HMD 200 in Figures 2 and 3) so that the user can wear it. A wearing part (e.g., the wearing parts 221 and 222 of FIGS. 2 and 3, the wearing parts of FIGS. 4 and 5) connected to a portion of the main frame 210 or the main frame 410 of FIGS. 4 and 5. It may include (421, 422) or the wearing part 600 of FIG. 6. At least one of the wearable parts includes a touch circuit disposed on the inner side (e.g., the touch circuits 291 and 292 in FIG. 3, the touch circuits 491 and 492 in FIGS. 4 and 5, or the first touch circuit in FIG. 6 ( The wearing state of the HMD can be detected using 613) (or the third part 633 of the integrated touch circuit). In addition, at least one of the wearable parts may have a touch circuit (e.g., the second touch circuit 611 of FIG. 6 (or the first part 631 of the integrated touch circuit 631)) or a conductor disposed on the outer surface. .

๋™์ž‘ 1110์—์„œ, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์—ˆ๋Š”์ง€๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋˜๋Š” ์ƒํ™ฉ์€ ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ์„œ๋กœ ์ด๊ฒฉ๋˜๋Š” ์ƒํ™ฉ์œผ๋กœ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ์•ˆ๊ฒฝ์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฆฌ ํ˜•ํƒœ๋กœ ๋งˆ๋ จ๋œ ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ์•ˆ๊ฒฝ์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ๋ฒŒ์–ด์ง€๋Š” ์ƒํ™ฉ์„ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์–ด๋А ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋œ ์ƒํƒœ์—์„œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ๊ณผ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ๋ณ€๊ฒฝ๋˜๊ฑฐ๋‚˜ ์ข…๋ฃŒ๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์–ด๋А ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด์„ ๊ฐ€์ง€๋Š” ์ƒํƒœ์—์„œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด์—์„œ ์ œ2 ํŒจํ„ด์œผ๋กœ ๋ณ€๊ฒฝ๋˜๊ฑฐ๋‚˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ์ข…๋ฃŒ๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด์„ ๊ฐ€์ง€๋Š” ์ƒํ™ฉ์€ ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์–ด๋А ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ๋„์ „์ฒด์™€ ๊ทผ์ ‘ํ•˜๊ฑฐ๋‚˜ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ์ƒํ™ฉ์„ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํŒจํ„ด์„ ๊ฐ€์ง€๋Š” ์ƒํ™ฉ์€ ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์–ด๋А ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ๋„์ „์ฒด์™€ ์ผ์ • ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ ์ด์ƒ ์ด๊ฒฉ๋œ ์ƒํ™ฉ์„ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.In operation 1110, the HMD may determine whether separation of the wearing parts has been detected. For example, a situation in which the wearing parts are separated may indicate a situation in which the wearing parts are spaced apart from each other, and when the wearing parts are provided in the form of legs of glasses, it may represent a situation in which the legs of the glasses are spread out. According to one embodiment, the HMD detects a first touch input through a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearable parts, and a touch circuit disposed on the outer surface of another one of the wearable parts. If the pattern of the first touch input and the second touch input is changed or terminated while the second touch input is detected, it may be determined that the wearable parts are separated. According to one embodiment, the HMD has a first pattern of touch input detected through a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearable parts, and the pattern of the touch input is the first pattern. When the pattern is changed to the second pattern or the touch input is terminated, it may be determined that the wearing parts are separated. A situation in which the pattern of the touch input has the first pattern is, for example, a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearable parts and a conductor disposed on the outer surface of the other one of the wearable parts. It can indicate a situation where a person is close to or in contact with a body. In addition, a situation in which the pattern of the touch input has the second pattern is, for example, a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearable parts is disposed on the outer surface of the other one of the wearable parts. It can represent a situation where the conductor is separated by a certain distance or more.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์ง€ ์•Š์•˜๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 1110 - ์•„๋‹ˆ์˜ค), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 1110์„ ์žฌ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ๊ฐ์ง€๋  ๋•Œ๊นŒ์ง€, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ์ง€์†์ ์œผ๋กœ ๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ • ์ฃผ๊ธฐ๋กœ ๋ชจ๋‹ˆํ„ฐ๋งํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that separation of the wearing parts has not been detected (operation 1110 - No), the HMD may re-perform operation 1110. For example, the HMD may monitor the separation of the wearing parts continuously or at regular intervals until the separation of the wearing parts is detected.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 1110 - ์˜ˆ), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 1120์—์„œ, ์ „์ฒ˜๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•˜๊ณ , ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™” ์ˆ˜์ค€์„ ๋†’์ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์˜ˆ๋กœ, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๊ฐ€ ์ €์ „๋ ฅ ๋ชจ๋“œ์—์„œ ์ผ๋ฐ˜ ๋ชจ๋“œ๋กœ ๋™์ž‘ํ•˜๋„๋ก ์ œ์–ดํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์˜ˆ๋กœ, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ๊ตฌ๋™ ์ฃผํŒŒ์ˆ˜๋ฅผ ๋†’์ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๋Š” ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์–ดํ”Œ๋ฆฌ์ผ€์ด์…˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ๋ฉ”๋ชจ๋ฆฌ ๋กœ๋“œ ๋“ฑ ์ถ”๊ฐ€์ ์ธ ์ง€์—ฐ์ด ๋ฐœ์ƒ๋˜์ง€ ์•Š๋„๋ก ์ง€์ •๋œ ์–ดํ”Œ๋ฆฌ์ผ€์ด์…˜์˜ ์‹คํ–‰ ๋ฐ์ดํ„ฐ๋ฅผ ๋ฉ”๋ชจ๋ฆฌ์— ๋ฏธ๋ฆฌ ๋กœ๋“œํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด์˜ ํ™”๋ฉด์„ ์ผค ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the separation of the wearing parts is detected (operation 1110 - Yes), the HMD may perform preprocessing and activate the display in operation 1120. According to one embodiment, the HMD may increase the activation level of the processor. As an example, the HMD can control the processor to operate from a low-power mode to a normal mode. As another example, the HMD can increase the driving frequency of the processor. The processor may include, for example, an application processor. According to one embodiment, the HMD may preload execution data of a designated application into memory to prevent additional delays such as memory loading. Additionally, the HMD can turn on the screen of the display.

๋™์ž‘ 1130์—์„œ, HMD๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์—ˆ๋Š”์ง€๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋  ๋•Œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€๋ถ„์— ์ ‘์ด‰๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ ‘์ด‰์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์— ๋Œ€์‘๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ํš๋“ํ•˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํš๋“๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.In operation 1130, the HMD may determine whether a touch input has been detected. The HMD can detect the touch input using a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearable parts. For example, when an HMD is worn on a user's head, a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearing units may be in contact with a portion of the head and may detect the touch input according to the contact. there is. Additionally, the HMD may acquire touch information corresponding to the touch input and detect the wearing state of the HMD using the acquired touch information.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์ง€ ์•Š์•˜๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 1130 - ์•„๋‹ˆ์˜ค), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 1110์„ ์žฌ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the touch input is not detected (operation 1130 - No), the HMD may re-perform operation 1110.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 1130 - ์˜ˆ), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 1140์—์„œ, ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”๋œ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ํ‘œ์‹œํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ๋™์ž‘์„ ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด์˜ ํ™”๋ฉด์— ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋™์ž‘์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ํ‘œ์‹œํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the touch input is detected (operation 1130 - Yes), the HMD may display information through the activated display in operation 1140. For example, when the touch input is detected, the HMD may determine that the HMD is worn on the user's head, and in order to perform an operation according to wearing the HMD, information according to the operation may be displayed on the screen of the display. You can.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ์œ ์ง€๋˜์ง€ ์•Š๋Š”๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ๋น„ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”์‹œํ‚ค๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™” ์ˆ˜์ค€์„ ๋‚ฎ์ถœ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด์˜ ํ™”๋ฉด์„ ๋Œ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๊ฐ€ ์ผ๋ฐ˜ ๋ชจ๋“œ์—์„œ ์ €์ „๋ ฅ ๋ชจ๋“œ๋กœ ๋™์ž‘ํ•˜๋„๋ก ์ œ์–ดํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜๋Š”, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ๊ตฌ๋™ ์ฃผํŒŒ์ˆ˜๋ฅผ ๋‚ฎ์ถœ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, if the HMD determines that the touch input is not maintained, it may deactivate the display and lower the activation level of the processor. For example, the HMD can turn off the screen of the display. Additionally, the processor can be controlled to operate from a normal mode to a low-power mode. Alternatively, the HMD may lower the driving frequency of the processor.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ๊ฐ์ง€๋œ ํ›„ ์ง€์ •๋œ ์‹œ๊ฐ„(์˜ˆ: 10์ดˆ) ๋‚ด์— ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์ง€ ์•Š์œผ๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ๋น„ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”์‹œํ‚ฌ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด์˜ ํ™”๋ฉด์„ ๋Œ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, the HMD may deactivate the display if the touch input is not detected within a specified time (eg, 10 seconds) after the separation of the wearable parts is detected. For example, the HMD can turn off the screen of the display.

๋„ 12๋Š” ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ ‘์ด‰ ๋ฐ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a method for detecting contact and separation of wearing parts of an HMD according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 12๋ฅผ ์ฐธ์กฐํ•˜๋ฉด, HMD(1200)(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ HMD(200) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ HMD(400))๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž๊ฐ€ ์ฐฉ์šฉํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋„๋ก ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410))์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๋Š” ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(1210, 1220)(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221, 222), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(421, 422) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 6์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(600))๋“ค์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(1210, 1220) ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜(์˜ˆ: ์ œ1 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(1210))๋Š” ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1211)(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 3์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(291, 292), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(491, 492) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 6์˜ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(613)(๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ์˜ ์ œ3 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(633)))๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ HMD(1200)์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(1210, 1220) ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜(์˜ˆ: ์ œ2 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(1220))๋Š” ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1221)(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 6์˜ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(611)(๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ์˜ ์ œ1 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(631)))๊ฐ€ ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.Referring to Figure 12, the HMD 1200 (e.g., the HMD 200 in Figures 2 and 3 or the HMD 400 in Figures 4 and 5) has a main frame (e.g., HMD 200 in Figures 2 and 5) so that the user can wear it. Wearing parts 1210 and 1220 connected to a portion of the main frame 210 in Figure 3 or the main frame 410 in Figures 4 and 5 (e.g., wearing parts 221 and 222 in Figures 2 and 3, It may include the wearing parts 421 and 422 of FIGS. 4 and 5 or the wearing part 600 of FIG. 6 . At least one of the wearing parts 1210 and 1220 (e.g., the first wearing part 1210) has a touch circuit 1211 disposed on the inner side (e.g., the touch circuits 291 and 292 in FIG. 3, FIG. 4 and The wearing state of the HMD 1200 can be detected using the touch circuits 491 and 492 of FIG. 5 or the first touch circuit 613 of FIG. 6 (or the third part 633 of the touch circuit formed integrally). You can. In addition, at least one of the wearing parts 1210 and 1220 (e.g., the second wearing part 1220) has a touch circuit 1221 (e.g., the second touch circuit 611 of FIG. 6 (or integrally) on the outer surface. The first portion 631) of the formed touch circuit may be disposed.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD(1200)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(1210, 1220)์˜ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(1210, 1220)์ด ์„œ๋กœ ์ด๊ฒฉ๋œ ๊ฒƒ์œผ๋กœ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD(1200)๋Š” ๋„ 12์— ๊ฐœ์‹œ๋œ ๋ฐ”์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(1210, 1220)์ด ์•ˆ๊ฒฝ์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฆฌ ํ˜•ํƒœ๋กœ ๋งˆ๋ จ๋œ ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ์•ˆ๊ฒฝ์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ๋ฒŒ์–ด์กŒ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, when the HMD 1200 detects separation of the wearing parts 1210 and 1220, it may determine that the wearing parts 1210 and 1220 are spaced apart from each other. For example, as shown in FIG. 12 , when the wearing parts 1210 and 1220 are provided in the form of glasses legs, the HMD 1200 may determine that the glasses legs are spread.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD(1200)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(1210, 1220) ์ค‘ ์–ด๋А ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(์˜ˆ: ์ œ1 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(1210))์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1211))๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(1210, 1220) ์ค‘ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(์˜ˆ: ์ œ2 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(1220))์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1221))๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋œ ์ƒํƒœ์—์„œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ๊ณผ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ๋ณ€๊ฒฝ๋˜๊ฑฐ๋‚˜ ์ข…๋ฃŒ๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(1210, 1220)์ด ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, the HMD 1200 includes a touch circuit (e.g., a first touch circuit) disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearable parts 1210 and 1220 (e.g., the first wearable part 1210). A first touch input is detected through the circuit 1211, and a touch circuit (e.g., a touch circuit) disposed on the outer surface of another of the wearable parts 1210 and 1220 (e.g., the second wearing part 1220). : When the second touch input is detected through the second touch circuit 1221 and the pattern of the first touch input and the second touch input are changed or terminated, the wearing parts 1210 and 1220 are separated. It can be judged that it has been done.

๋„ 13์€ ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ ‘์ด‰ ๋ฐ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating another method for detecting contact and separation of wearing parts of an HMD according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 13์„ ์ฐธ์กฐํ•˜๋ฉด, HMD(1300)(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ HMD(200) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ HMD(400))๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž๊ฐ€ ์ฐฉ์šฉํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋„๋ก ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410))์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๋Š” ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(1310, 1320)(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221, 222), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(421, 422) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 6์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(600))๋“ค์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(1310, 1320) ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜(์˜ˆ: ์ œ1 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(1310))๋Š” ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1311)(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 3์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(291, 292), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(491, 492) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 6์˜ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(613)(๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ์˜ ์ œ3 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(633)))๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ HMD(1300)์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(1310, 1320) ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜(์˜ˆ: ์ œ2 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(1320))๋Š” ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋„์ „์ฒด(1321)๊ฐ€ ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.Referring to FIG. 13, the HMD 1300 (e.g., the HMD 200 in FIGS. 2 and 3 or the HMD 400 in FIGS. 4 and 5) has a main frame (e.g., HMD 200 in FIGS. 2 and 3) so that the user can wear it. Wearing parts 1310 and 1320 connected to a portion of the main frame 210 in Figure 3 or the main frame 410 in Figures 4 and 5 (e.g., wearing parts 221 and 222 in Figures 2 and 3, It may include the wearing parts 421 and 422 of FIGS. 4 and 5 or the wearing part 600 of FIG. 6 . At least one of the wearing parts 1310 and 1320 (e.g., the first wearing part 1310) has a touch circuit 1311 disposed on the inner side (e.g., the touch circuits 291 and 292 in FIG. 3, FIG. 4 and The wearing state of the HMD 1300 can be detected using the touch circuits 491 and 492 of FIG. 5 or the first touch circuit 613 of FIG. 6 (or the third part 633 of the touch circuit formed integrally). You can. Additionally, a conductor 1321 may be disposed on the outer surface of at least one of the wearing parts 1310 and 1320 (eg, the second wearing part 1320).

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD(1300)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(1310, 1320)์˜ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(1310, 1320)์ด ์„œ๋กœ ์ด๊ฒฉ๋œ ๊ฒƒ์œผ๋กœ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD(1300)๋Š” ๋„ 13์— ๊ฐœ์‹œ๋œ ๋ฐ”์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(1310, 1320)์ด ์•ˆ๊ฒฝ์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฆฌ ํ˜•ํƒœ๋กœ ๋งˆ๋ จ๋œ ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ์•ˆ๊ฒฝ์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ๋ฒŒ์–ด์กŒ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, when the HMD 1300 detects separation of the wearing parts 1310 and 1320, it may determine that the wearing parts 1310 and 1320 are spaced apart from each other. For example, as shown in FIG. 13 , when the wearing parts 1310 and 1320 are provided in the form of glasses legs, the HMD 1300 may determine that the glasses legs are spread.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD(1300)๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(1310, 1320) ์ค‘ ์–ด๋А ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(์˜ˆ: ์ œ1 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(1310))์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1311)๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด์„ ๊ฐ€์ง€๋Š” ์ƒํƒœ์—์„œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด์—์„œ ์ œ2 ํŒจํ„ด์œผ๋กœ ๋ณ€๊ฒฝ๋˜๊ฑฐ๋‚˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ์ข…๋ฃŒ๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(1310, 1320)์ด ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด์„ ๊ฐ€์ง€๋Š” ์ƒํ™ฉ์€ ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(1310, 1320) ์ค‘ ์–ด๋А ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(์˜ˆ: ์ œ1 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(1310))์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1311)๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(1310, 1320) ์ค‘ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(์˜ˆ: ์ œ2 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(1320))์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ๋„์ „์ฒด(1321)์™€ ๊ทผ์ ‘ํ•˜๊ฑฐ๋‚˜ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ์ƒํ™ฉ์„ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํŒจํ„ด์„ ๊ฐ€์ง€๋Š” ์ƒํ™ฉ์€ ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(1310, 1320) ์ค‘ ์–ด๋А ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(์˜ˆ: ์ œ1 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(1310))์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1311)๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค(1310, 1320) ์ค‘ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(์˜ˆ: ์ œ2 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(1320))์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ๋„์ „์ฒด(1321)์™€ ์ผ์ • ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ ์ด์ƒ ์ด๊ฒฉ๋œ ์ƒํ™ฉ์„ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, the HMD 1300 detects the sensor through the touch circuit 1311 disposed on the inner surface of any one of the wearable parts 1310 and 1320 (e.g., the first wearing part 1310). In a state where the pattern of the touch input has a first pattern, when the pattern of the touch input changes from the first pattern to the second pattern or the touch input is terminated, it is determined that the wearable parts 1310 and 1320 are separated. can do. A situation in which the pattern of the touch input has the first pattern is, for example, a touch disposed on the inner surface of any one of the wearing parts 1310 and 1320 (e.g., the first wearing part 1310). It may represent a situation in which the circuit 1311 is close to or in contact with the conductor 1321 disposed on the outer surface of another one of the wearing parts 1310 and 1320 (e.g., the second wearing part 1320). there is. In addition, a situation in which the pattern of the touch input has the second pattern is, for example, disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearing parts 1310 and 1320 (e.g., the first wearing part 1310). A situation in which the touch circuit 1311 is separated from the conductor 1321 disposed on the outer surface of another of the wearing parts 1310 and 1320 (e.g., the second wearing part 1320) by a certain distance or more. can indicate.

๋„ 14๋Š” ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ ‘์ด‰ ์‹œ HMD์˜ ์šด์šฉ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining a method of operating an HMD when wearing parts of the HMD are in contact according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 14๋ฅผ ์ฐธ์กฐํ•˜๋ฉด, HMD(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ HMD(200), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ HMD(400), ๋„ 12์˜ HMD(1200) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 13์˜ HMD(1300))๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž๊ฐ€ ์ฐฉ์šฉํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋„๋ก ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410))์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๋Š” ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221, 222), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(421, 422), ๋„ 6์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(600), ๋„ 12์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(1210, 1220) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 13์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(1310, 1320))๋“ค์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋Š” ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 3์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(291, 292), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(491, 492), ๋„ 6์˜ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(613)(๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ์˜ ์ œ3 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(633)), ๋„ 12์˜ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1211) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 13์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1311))๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋Š” ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 6์˜ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(611)(๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ์˜ ์ œ1 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(631)) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 12์˜ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1221)) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„์ „์ฒด(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 13์˜ ๋„์ „์ฒด(1321))๊ฐ€ ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.Referring to Figure 14, the HMD (e.g., the HMD 200 in Figures 2 and 3, the HMD 400 in Figures 4 and 5, the HMD 1200 in Figure 12, or the HMD 1300 in Figure 13) is used by the user. A wearing portion (e.g., the main frame 210 in FIGS. 2 and 3 or the main frame 410 in FIGS. 4 and 5) is connected to a part of the main frame so that it can be worn. Wearing parts 221 and 222, wearing parts 421 and 422 of FIGS. 4 and 5, wearing parts 600 of FIG. 6, wearing parts 1210 and 1220 of FIG. 12 or wearing parts 1310 of FIG. 13, 1320)) may be included. At least one of the wearable parts includes a touch circuit disposed on the inner side (e.g., the touch circuits 291 and 292 in FIG. 3, the touch circuits 491 and 492 in FIGS. 4 and 5, and the first touch circuit in FIG. 6 ( 613) (or the third part 633 of the integrated touch circuit), the first touch circuit 1211 of FIG. 12, or the touch circuit 1311 of FIG. 13) can be used to detect the wearing state of the HMD. . In addition, at least one of the wearable parts has a touch circuit (e.g., the second touch circuit 611 of FIG. 6 (or the first part 631 of the integrated touch circuit) of FIG. 6 or the second touch circuit of FIG. 12) on the outer surface. (1221)) or a conductor (eg, conductor 1321 in FIG. 13) may be disposed.

๋™์ž‘ 1410์—์„œ, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ ‘์ด‰์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์—ˆ๋Š”์ง€๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ์ ‘์ด‰๋˜๋Š” ์ƒํ™ฉ์€ ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ์•ˆ๊ฒฝ์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฆฌ ํ˜•ํƒœ๋กœ ๋งˆ๋ จ๋œ ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ์•ˆ๊ฒฝ์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ์ ‘ํžˆ๋Š” ์ƒํ™ฉ์„ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์–ด๋А ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ์ ‘์ด‰๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์–ด๋А ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ง€์ •๋œ ํŒจํ„ด(์˜ˆ: ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด)์„ ๊ฐ€์ง€๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ์ ‘์ด‰๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ง€์ •๋œ ํŒจํ„ด์„ ๊ฐ€์ง€๋Š” ์ƒํ™ฉ์€ ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์–ด๋А ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ๋„์ „์ฒด์™€ ๊ทผ์ ‘ํ•˜๊ฑฐ๋‚˜ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ์ƒํ™ฉ์„ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.In operation 1410, the HMD may determine whether contact between the wearing parts is detected. For example, a situation in which the wearing parts are in contact may represent a situation in which the legs of the glasses are folded when the wearing parts are provided in the form of legs of glasses. According to one embodiment, the HMD detects a first touch input through a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearable parts, and a touch circuit disposed on the outer surface of another one of the wearable parts. When a second touch input is detected, it may be determined that the wearing parts are in contact. According to one embodiment, when the pattern of a touch input detected through a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of any one of the wearable parts has a designated pattern (e.g., a first pattern), the HMD makes contact with the wearable parts. It can be judged that it has been done. A situation in which the pattern of the touch input has the specified pattern is, for example, a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearable parts and a conductor disposed on the outer surface of the other one of the wearable parts. It can indicate a situation where one is close to or in contact with.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ ‘์ด‰์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์ง€ ์•Š์•˜๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 1410 - ์•„๋‹ˆ์˜ค), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 1410์„ ์žฌ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ ‘์ด‰์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋  ๋•Œ๊นŒ์ง€, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ ‘์ด‰์„ ์ง€์†์ ์œผ๋กœ ๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ • ์ฃผ๊ธฐ๋กœ ๋ชจ๋‹ˆํ„ฐ๋งํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the contact of the wearing parts is not detected (operation 1410 - No), the HMD may re-perform operation 1410. For example, the HMD may monitor the contact of the wearing parts continuously or at regular intervals until the contact of the wearing parts is detected.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ ‘์ด‰์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 1410 - ์˜ˆ), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 1420์—์„œ, ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ๋น„ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”์‹œํ‚ค๊ณ , ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™” ์ˆ˜์ค€์„ ๋‚ฎ์ถœ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด์˜ ํ™”๋ฉด์„ ๋Œ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๊ฐ€ ์ผ๋ฐ˜ ๋ชจ๋“œ์—์„œ ์ €์ „๋ ฅ ๋ชจ๋“œ๋กœ ๋™์ž‘ํ•˜๋„๋ก ์ œ์–ดํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜๋Š”, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ๊ตฌ๋™ ์ฃผํŒŒ์ˆ˜๋ฅผ ๋‚ฎ์ถœ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the contact of the wearing parts is detected (operation 1410 - Yes), the HMD may deactivate the display and lower the activation level of the processor in operation 1420. For example, the HMD can turn off the screen of the display. Additionally, the processor can be controlled to operate from a normal mode to a low-power mode. Alternatively, the HMD may lower the driving frequency of the processor.

๋„ 15๋Š” ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ ‘์ด‰ ์‹œ HMD์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์šด์šฉ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining another method of operating an HMD when wearing parts of the HMD are in contact, according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 15๋ฅผ ์ฐธ์กฐํ•˜๋ฉด, HMD(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ HMD(200), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ HMD(400), ๋„ 12์˜ HMD(1200) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 13์˜ HMD(1300))๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž๊ฐ€ ์ฐฉ์šฉํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋„๋ก ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410))์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๋Š” ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221, 222), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(421, 422), ๋„ 6์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(600), ๋„ 12์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(1210, 1220) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 13์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(1310, 1320))๋“ค์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋Š” ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 3์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(291, 292), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(491, 492), ๋„ 6์˜ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(613)(๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ์˜ ์ œ3 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(633)), ๋„ 12์˜ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1211) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 13์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1311))๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋Š” ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 6์˜ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(611)(๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ์˜ ์ œ1 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(631)) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 12์˜ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1221)) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„์ „์ฒด(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 13์˜ ๋„์ „์ฒด(1321))๊ฐ€ ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.Referring to Figure 15, the HMD (e.g., the HMD 200 in Figures 2 and 3, the HMD 400 in Figures 4 and 5, the HMD 1200 in Figure 12, or the HMD 1300 in Figure 13) is used by the user. A wearing portion (e.g., the main frame 210 in FIGS. 2 and 3 or the main frame 410 in FIGS. 4 and 5) is connected to a part of the main frame so that it can be worn. Wearing parts 221 and 222, wearing parts 421 and 422 of FIGS. 4 and 5, wearing parts 600 of FIG. 6, wearing parts 1210 and 1220 of FIG. 12 or wearing parts 1310 of FIG. 13, 1320)) may be included. At least one of the wearable parts includes a touch circuit disposed on the inner side (e.g., the touch circuits 291 and 292 in FIG. 3, the touch circuits 491 and 492 in FIGS. 4 and 5, and the first touch circuit in FIG. 6 ( 613) (or the third part 633 of the integrated touch circuit), the first touch circuit 1211 of FIG. 12, or the touch circuit 1311 of FIG. 13) can be used to detect the wearing state of the HMD. . In addition, at least one of the wearable parts has a touch circuit (e.g., the second touch circuit 611 of FIG. 6 (or the first part 631 of the integrated touch circuit) of FIG. 6 or the second touch circuit of FIG. 12) on the outer surface. (1221)) or a conductor (eg, conductor 1321 in FIG. 13) may be disposed.

๋™์ž‘ 1510์—์„œ, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ ‘์ด‰์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์—ˆ๋Š”์ง€๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ์ ‘์ด‰๋˜๋Š” ์ƒํ™ฉ์€ ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ์•ˆ๊ฒฝ์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฆฌ ํ˜•ํƒœ๋กœ ๋งˆ๋ จ๋œ ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ์•ˆ๊ฒฝ์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ์ ‘ํžˆ๋Š” ์ƒํ™ฉ์„ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์–ด๋А ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ์ ‘์ด‰๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์–ด๋А ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ง€์ •๋œ ํŒจํ„ด(์˜ˆ: ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด)์„ ๊ฐ€์ง€๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ์ ‘์ด‰๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ง€์ •๋œ ํŒจํ„ด์„ ๊ฐ€์ง€๋Š” ์ƒํ™ฉ์€ ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์–ด๋А ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ๋„์ „์ฒด์™€ ๊ทผ์ ‘ํ•˜๊ฑฐ๋‚˜ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ์ƒํ™ฉ์„ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.In operation 1510, the HMD may determine whether contact between the wearing parts is detected. For example, a situation in which the wearing parts are in contact may represent a situation in which the legs of the glasses are folded when the wearing parts are provided in the form of legs of glasses. According to one embodiment, the HMD detects a first touch input through a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearable parts, and a touch circuit disposed on the outer surface of another one of the wearable parts. When a second touch input is detected, it may be determined that the wearing parts are in contact. According to one embodiment, when the pattern of a touch input detected through a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of any one of the wearable parts has a designated pattern (e.g., a first pattern), the HMD makes contact with the wearable parts. It can be judged that it has been done. A situation in which the pattern of the touch input has the specified pattern is, for example, a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearable parts and a conductor disposed on the outer surface of the other one of the wearable parts. It can indicate a situation where one is close to or in contact with.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ ‘์ด‰์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์ง€ ์•Š์•˜๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 1510 - ์•„๋‹ˆ์˜ค), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 1510์„ ์žฌ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ ‘์ด‰์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋  ๋•Œ๊นŒ์ง€, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ ‘์ด‰์„ ์ง€์†์ ์œผ๋กœ ๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ • ์ฃผ๊ธฐ๋กœ ๋ชจ๋‹ˆํ„ฐ๋งํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the contact of the wearing parts is not detected (operation 1510 - No), the HMD may re-perform operation 1510. For example, the HMD may monitor the contact of the wearing parts continuously or at regular intervals until the contact of the wearing parts is detected.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ ‘์ด‰์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 1510 - ์˜ˆ), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 1520์—์„œ, ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ๋น„ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”์‹œํ‚ฌ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด์˜ ํ™”๋ฉด์„ ๋Œ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the contact of the wearing parts is detected (operation 1510 - Yes), the HMD may deactivate the display in operation 1520. For example, the HMD can turn off the screen of the display.

๋™์ž‘ 1530์—์„œ, HMD๋Š” HMD๊ฐ€ ์ผ€์ด์Šค์— ์•ˆ์ฐฉ๋˜์—ˆ๋Š”์ง€๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ผ€์ด์Šค๋Š” HMD๋ฅผ ์ˆ˜๋‚ฉํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , HMD๋ฅผ ์™ธ๋ถ€ ์ถฉ๊ฒฉ์œผ๋กœ๋ถ€ํ„ฐ ๋ณดํ˜ธํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ผ€์ด์Šค๋Š” HMD์˜ ์•ˆ์ฐฉ ์—ฌ๋ถ€๋ฅผ ํ™•์ธํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋Š” ์„ผ์„œ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ผ€์ด์Šค๋Š” ์ถฉ์ „ ๋‹จ์ž๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , HMD๊ฐ€ ์•ˆ์ฐฉ๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ถฉ์ „ ๋‹จ์ž์— HMD๊ฐ€ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ์ด ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ผ€์ด์Šค๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ HMD๋ฅผ ์ถฉ์ „ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.In operation 1530, the HMD may determine whether the HMD is seated in the case. The case can accommodate the HMD and protect the HMD from external shock. According to one embodiment, the case may include a sensor that can check whether the HMD is seated. According to one embodiment, the case may include a charging terminal, and when the HMD is seated, the HMD may be connected to the charging terminal. In this case, the case may charge the HMD.

์ƒ๊ธฐ HMD๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ผ€์ด์Šค์— ์•ˆ์ฐฉ๋˜์ง€ ์•Š์•˜๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 1530 - ์•„๋‹ˆ์˜ค), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 1520์„ ์žฌ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด์™€ ๋น„ํ™œ์„ฑํ™” ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ์œ ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the HMD is not seated in the case (operation 1530 - No), the HMD may re-perform operation 1520. For example, the HMD may remain inactive with the display.

์ƒ๊ธฐ HMD๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ผ€์ด์Šค์— ์•ˆ์ฐฉ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 1530 - ์˜ˆ), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 1540์—์„œ, ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™” ์ˆ˜์ค€์„ ๋‚ฎ์ถœ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์˜ˆ๋กœ, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๊ฐ€ ์ผ๋ฐ˜ ๋ชจ๋“œ์—์„œ ์ €์ „๋ ฅ ๋ชจ๋“œ๋กœ ๋™์ž‘ํ•˜๋„๋ก ์ œ์–ดํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์˜ˆ๋กœ, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ๊ตฌ๋™ ์ฃผํŒŒ์ˆ˜๋ฅผ ๋‚ฎ์ถœ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the HMD is seated in the case (operation 1530 - Yes), the HMD may lower the activation level of the processor in operation 1540. As an example, the HMD can control the processor to operate from a normal mode to a low-power mode. As another example, the HMD may lower the driving frequency of the processor.

๋„ 16๋Š” ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD์˜ ์ถฉ์ „๊ธฐ ์ง„์ž… ์‹œ HMD์˜ ์šด์šฉ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining a method of operating an HMD when the HMD enters a charger according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 16์„ ์ฐธ์กฐํ•˜๋ฉด, HMD(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ HMD(200), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ HMD(400), ๋„ 12์˜ HMD(1200) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 13์˜ HMD(1300))๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž๊ฐ€ ์ฐฉ์šฉํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋„๋ก ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410))์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๋Š” ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221, 222), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(421, 422), ๋„ 6์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(600), ๋„ 12์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(1210, 1220) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 13์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(1310, 1320))๋“ค์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋Š” ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 3์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(291, 292), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(491, 492), ๋„ 6์˜ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(613)(๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ์˜ ์ œ3 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(633)), ๋„ 12์˜ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1211) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 13์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1311))๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋Š” ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 6์˜ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(611)(๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ์˜ ์ œ1 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(631)) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 12์˜ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1221)) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„์ „์ฒด(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 13์˜ ๋„์ „์ฒด(1321))๊ฐ€ ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.Referring to Figure 16, the HMD (e.g., the HMD 200 in Figures 2 and 3, the HMD 400 in Figures 4 and 5, the HMD 1200 in Figure 12, or the HMD 1300 in Figure 13) is used by the user. A wearing portion (e.g., the main frame 210 in FIGS. 2 and 3 or the main frame 410 in FIGS. 4 and 5) is connected to a part of the main frame so that it can be worn. Wearing parts 221 and 222, wearing parts 421 and 422 of FIGS. 4 and 5, wearing parts 600 of FIG. 6, wearing parts 1210 and 1220 of FIG. 12 or wearing parts 1310 of FIG. 13, 1320)) may be included. At least one of the wearable parts includes a touch circuit disposed on the inner side (e.g., the touch circuits 291 and 292 in FIG. 3, the touch circuits 491 and 492 in FIGS. 4 and 5, and the first touch circuit in FIG. 6 ( 613) (or the third part 633 of the integrated touch circuit), the first touch circuit 1211 of FIG. 12, or the touch circuit 1311 of FIG. 13) can be used to detect the wearing state of the HMD. . In addition, at least one of the wearable parts has a touch circuit (e.g., the second touch circuit 611 of FIG. 6 (or the first part 631 of the integrated touch circuit) of FIG. 6 or the second touch circuit of FIG. 12) on the outer surface. (1221)) or a conductor (eg, conductor 1321 in FIG. 13) may be disposed.

๋™์ž‘ 1610์—์„œ, HMD๋Š” HMD๊ฐ€ ์ถฉ์ „๊ธฐ์— ์ง„์ž…ํ•˜์˜€๋Š”์ง€๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ถฉ์ „๊ธฐ์˜ ์ถฉ์ „ ๋‹จ์ž์— HMD๊ฐ€ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๋ฉด, HMD ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ถฉ์ „๊ธฐ๋Š” HMD๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ถฉ์ „๊ธฐ์— ์ง„์ž…ํ•˜์˜€๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.At operation 1610, the HMD may determine whether the HMD has entered the charger. For example, when the HMD is connected to the charging terminal of the charger, the HMD and the charger may determine that the HMD has entered the charger.

HMD๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ถฉ์ „๊ธฐ์— ์ง„์ž…ํ•˜์ง€ ์•Š์•˜๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 1610 - ์•„๋‹ˆ์˜ค), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 1610์„ ์žฌ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” HMD๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ถฉ์ „๊ธฐ์— ์ง„์ž…ํ•  ๋•Œ๊นŒ์ง€, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ถฉ์ „๊ธฐ๋กœ์˜ ์ง„์ž…์„ ์ง€์†์ ์œผ๋กœ ๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ • ์ฃผ๊ธฐ๋กœ ๋ชจ๋‹ˆํ„ฐ๋งํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the HMD has not entered the charger (operation 1610 - No), the HMD may re-perform operation 1610. For example, the HMD may monitor entry into the charger continuously or at regular intervals until the HMD enters the charger.

HMD๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ถฉ์ „๊ธฐ์— ์ง„์ž…ํ•˜์˜€๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 1610 - ์˜ˆ), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 1620์—์„œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ ‘์ด‰์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์—ˆ๋Š”์ง€๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ์ ‘์ด‰๋˜๋Š” ์ƒํ™ฉ์€ ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ์•ˆ๊ฒฝ์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฆฌ ํ˜•ํƒœ๋กœ ๋งˆ๋ จ๋œ ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ์•ˆ๊ฒฝ์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ์ ‘ํžˆ๋Š” ์ƒํ™ฉ์„ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์–ด๋А ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ์ ‘์ด‰๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์–ด๋А ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ง€์ •๋œ ํŒจํ„ด(์˜ˆ: ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด)์„ ๊ฐ€์ง€๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ์ ‘์ด‰๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ง€์ •๋œ ํŒจํ„ด์„ ๊ฐ€์ง€๋Š” ์ƒํ™ฉ์€ ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์–ด๋А ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ๋„์ „์ฒด์™€ ๊ทผ์ ‘ํ•˜๊ฑฐ๋‚˜ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ์ƒํ™ฉ์„ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the HMD has entered the charger (operation 1610 - Yes), the HMD may determine whether contact with the wearing parts has been detected in operation 1620. For example, a situation in which the wearing parts are in contact may represent a situation in which the legs of the glasses are folded when the wearing parts are provided in the form of legs of glasses. According to one embodiment, the HMD detects a first touch input through a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearable parts, and a touch circuit disposed on the outer surface of another one of the wearable parts. When a second touch input is detected, it may be determined that the wearing parts are in contact. According to one embodiment, when the pattern of a touch input detected through a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of any one of the wearable parts has a designated pattern (e.g., a first pattern), the HMD makes contact with the wearable parts. It can be judged that it has been done. A situation in which the pattern of the touch input has the specified pattern is, for example, a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of one of the wearable parts and a conductor disposed on the outer surface of the other one of the wearable parts. It can indicate a situation where one is close to or in contact with.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ ‘์ด‰์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 1620 - ์˜ˆ), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 1630์—์„œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ถฉ์ „๊ธฐ๋กœ๋ถ€ํ„ฐ ์ถฉ์ „ ์ „๋ ฅ์„ ์ˆ˜์‹ ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ถฉ์ „๊ธฐ๋Š” HMD๋ฅผ ์ถฉ์ „ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the contact of the wearing parts is detected (operation 1620 - Yes), the HMD may receive charging power from the charger in operation 1630. For example, the charger can charge an HMD.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ ‘์ด‰์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์ง€ ์•Š์•˜๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 1620 - ์•„๋‹ˆ์˜ค), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 1640์—์„œ, ์•Œ๋ฆผ์„ ์ œ๊ณตํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ ‘์ด‰์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์ง€ ์•Š์•˜๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด, ์•ˆ๊ฒฝ์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฆฌ๋“ค์ด ์ž˜ ํฌ๊ฐœ์ง€์ง€ ์•Š์€ ์ƒํƒœ๋กœ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ถฉ์ „๊ธฐ์— ์ง„์ž…ํ•˜์˜€๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ฆ‰, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ถฉ์ „๊ธฐ์˜ ์ถฉ์ „ ๋‹จ์ž์— HMD๊ฐ€ ๋ถˆ์™„์ „ํ•˜๊ฒŒ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ด์— ๋”ฐ๋ผ, HMD๋Š” HMD๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ถฉ์ „๊ธฐ์— ๋ถˆ์™„์ „ํ•˜๊ฒŒ ์‚ฝ์ž…๋˜์—ˆ์Œ์„ ์•Œ๋ฆฌ๋Š” ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ์ œ๊ณตํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ํ†ต์‹  ํšŒ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋œ ์™ธ๋ถ€ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(์˜ˆ: ์Šค๋งˆํŠธํฐ)๋กœ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ์ „์†กํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์™ธ๋ถ€ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ๋˜๋Š” ์Šคํ”ผ์ปค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ถœ๋ ฅํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ์Šคํ”ผ์ปค๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ถœ๋ ฅํ•˜๊ฑฐ๋‚˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ •๋ณด์— ๋Œ€์‘๋˜๋Š” ์‹ ํ˜ธ๋ฅผ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘๋ถ€(์˜ˆ: LED)๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ถœ๋ ฅํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ถฉ์ „๊ธฐ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ์Šคํ”ผ์ปค๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ถœ๋ ฅํ•˜๊ฑฐ๋‚˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ •๋ณด์— ๋Œ€์‘๋˜๋Š” ์‹ ํ˜ธ๋ฅผ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘๋ถ€(์˜ˆ: LED)๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ถœ๋ ฅํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that contact of the wearing parts is not detected (operation 1620 - No), the HMD may provide a notification in operation 1640. For example, if the HMD determines that no contact between the wearing parts is detected, it may determine that the glasses have entered the charger with the legs not properly stacked. That is, the HMD may determine that the HMD is incompletely connected to the charging terminal of the charger. Accordingly, the HMD can provide information indicating that the HMD has been incompletely inserted into the charger. According to one embodiment, the HMD may transmit the information to an external electronic device (e.g., a smartphone) connected through a communication circuit, and the external electronic device may output the information through at least one of a display or a speaker. . According to one embodiment, the HMD may output the information through a speaker or output a signal corresponding to the information through a light emitting unit (eg, LED). According to one embodiment, the charger may output the information through a speaker or output a signal corresponding to the information through a light emitting unit (eg, LED).

๋„ 17์€ ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ž์„ธ์™€ ๊ด€๋ จ๋œ HMD์˜ ์šด์šฉ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining a method of operating an HMD related to a wearing posture of the HMD according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 17์„ ์ฐธ์กฐํ•˜๋ฉด, HMD(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ HMD(200), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ HMD(400), ๋„ 12์˜ HMD(1200) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 13์˜ HMD(1300))๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž๊ฐ€ ์ฐฉ์šฉํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋„๋ก ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410))์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๋Š” ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221, 222), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(421, 422), ๋„ 6์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(600), ๋„ 12์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(1210, 1220) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 13์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(1310, 1320))๋“ค์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋Š” ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 3์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(291, 292), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(491, 492), ๋„ 6์˜ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(613)(๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ์˜ ์ œ3 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(633)), ๋„ 12์˜ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1211) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 13์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1311))๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋  ๋•Œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€๋ถ„์— ์ ‘์ด‰๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ ‘์ด‰์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์— ๋Œ€์‘๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ํš๋“ํ•˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํš๋“๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋Š” ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜(์˜ˆ: ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ์œ„์น˜), ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๋ฉด์ (์˜ˆ: ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ์ด ๋ฉด์ ), ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ(์˜ˆ: ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ๋ฐฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ) ๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜(์˜ˆ: ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜) ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜, ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๋ฉด์ , ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ ๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜ ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋กœ ํ‘œํ˜„๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํŒจํ„ด์œผ๋กœ ์ง€์นญ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜, ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๋ฉด์ , ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ ๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜ ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๊ฐ€ ๋‹ค๋ฅผ ๋•Œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ๋‹ค๋ฅด๋‹ค๊ณ  ํ‘œํ˜„๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.Referring to Figure 17, the HMD (e.g., the HMD 200 in Figures 2 and 3, the HMD 400 in Figures 4 and 5, the HMD 1200 in Figure 12, or the HMD 1300 in Figure 13) is used by the user. A wearing portion (e.g., the main frame 210 in FIGS. 2 and 3 or the main frame 410 in FIGS. 4 and 5) is connected to a part of the main frame so that it can be worn. Wearing parts 221 and 222, wearing parts 421 and 422 of FIGS. 4 and 5, wearing parts 600 of FIG. 6, wearing parts 1210 and 1220 of FIG. 12 or wearing parts 1310 of FIG. 13, 1320)) may be included. At least one of the wearable parts includes a touch circuit disposed on the inner side (e.g., the touch circuits 291 and 292 in FIG. 3, the touch circuits 491 and 492 in FIGS. 4 and 5, and the first touch circuit in FIG. 6 ( 613) (or the third part 633 of the integrated touch circuit), the first touch circuit 1211 of FIG. 12, or the touch circuit 1311 of FIG. 13) can be used to detect the wearing state of the HMD. . For example, when an HMD is worn on a user's head, a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearing units may be in contact with a portion of the head and may detect a touch input according to the contact. . Additionally, the HMD may acquire touch information corresponding to the touch input and detect the wearing state of the HMD using the acquired touch information. The touch information may include, for example, touch location (e.g., location of a touched touch cell among touch cells), touch area (e.g., total area of touched touch cells among touch cells), and touch type (e.g., touch among touch cells). It may include at least one of the arrangement type of the touch cells) or the number of touches (e.g., the number of touched touch cells among touch cells). The touch information may be referred to as a touch pattern expressed by at least one of touch location, touch area, touch type, or number of touches. For example, the touch information may be expressed as a different touch pattern when at least one of the touch position, touch area, touch type, or number of touches is different.

HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด์„ ๊ฐ€์ง€๋ฉด, HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด์€ ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜๊ฐ€ ์ œ1 ์œ„์น˜์ด๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๋ฉด์ ์ด ์ œ1 ํฌ๊ธฐ ์ด์ƒ์ด๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ๊ฐ€ ์ œ1 ํ˜•ํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ€์ง€๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜๊ฐ€ ์ œ1 ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜ ์ด์ƒ์ด๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ๊ทธ๋“ค์˜ ์กฐํ•ฉ์ธ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ์œ„์น˜์ธ ์ƒํƒœ๋Š”, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ๋ณต์ˆ˜ ๊ฐœ์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‹จ๋ถ€ ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๊ท€ ๋˜๋Š” ๊ท€์™€ ์ธ์ ‘ํ•œ ๊ด€์ž๋†€์ด ๋ถ€๋ถ„๊ณผ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๋ฉด์ ์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํฌ๊ธฐ ์ด์ƒ์ธ ์ƒํƒœ๋Š”, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ๋ณต์ˆ˜ ๊ฐœ์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ์ด ๋ฉด์ ์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํฌ๊ธฐ ์ด์ƒ์ธ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ˜•ํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ€์ง€๋Š” ์ƒํƒœ๋Š”, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ๋ณต์ˆ˜ ๊ฐœ์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ๋ฐฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ˜•ํƒœ์— ๋Œ€์‘๋˜๋Š” ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ˜•ํƒœ๋Š” ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ํ•œ ๋ณ€์ด ๊ธด ์‚ฌ๊ฐํ˜• ๋˜๋Š” ํƒ€์›ํ˜•์ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜ ์ด์ƒ์ธ ์ƒํƒœ๋Š”, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ๋ณต์ˆ˜ ๊ฐœ์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜ ์ด์ƒ์ธ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If the pattern of the touch input detected through the touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearable units has a first pattern, the HMD may determine that the HMD is worn on the user's head. The first pattern may be, for example, the touch position is a first position, the touch area is a first size or more, the touch shape has a first shape, the number of touches is a first number or more, or It can represent a combination state. According to one embodiment, when the touch position is the first position, at least one touch cell arranged in the end direction of the wearable part among the plurality of touch cells arranged on the inner surface of at least one of the wearable parts is used by the user. It may indicate contact with the ear or the part of the temple adjacent to the ear. According to one embodiment, the state in which the touch area is equal to or greater than the first size means that the total area of at least one touch cell contacted among the plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearing units is the first size. It can indicate an abnormal state. According to one embodiment, the state in which the touch shape has the first shape means that the arrangement shape of at least one touch cell contacted among the plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearable parts is the first shape. It can represent the state corresponding to the shape. The first shape may be, for example, a square or oval with one long side. According to one embodiment, the state in which the number of touches is greater than or equal to the first number means that the number of at least one touch cell contacted among a plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearing units is greater than or equal to the first number. It can indicate status.

HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด, ๋™์ž‘ 1710์—์„œ, HMD๋Š” HMD์˜ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ์™€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋ˆˆ ์‚ฌ์ด์˜ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํš๋“๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ์™€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ˆˆ ์‚ฌ์ด์˜ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ์‚ฐ์ถœํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๋ฉด์ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ ๋˜๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜ ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์— ๊ธฐ๋ฐ˜ํ•˜์—ฌ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ์™€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ˆˆ ์‚ฌ์ด์˜ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ์ด๋ ฅ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ์™€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ˆˆ ์‚ฌ์ด์˜ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ์ด๋ ฅ ์ •๋ณด๋Š” ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž๊ฐ€ ์ด์ „์— HMD๋ฅผ ์ฐฉ์šฉํ•˜์˜€์„ ๋•Œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜์˜€๋˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์— ๋Œ€์‘๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ฆ‰, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ์ด๋ ฅ ์ •๋ณด๋Š” ์ด์ „ ์‹œ์ ์— ํš๋“ํ•œ ๋˜๋Š” ์ด์ „ ์‹œ์ ๊นŒ์ง€ ์ถ•์ ํ•œ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the HMD is worn on the user's head, in operation 1710, the HMD may determine the distance between the lens of the HMD and the user's eyes. The HMD can calculate the distance between the lens and the eye using the acquired touch information. According to one embodiment, the HMD may determine the distance between the lens and the eye based on at least one of the touch location, the touch area, the touch type, or the number of touches. According to one embodiment, the HMD may determine the distance between the lens and the eye using history information of touch input detected through the touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearable parts. For example, the touch input history information may include touch information corresponding to a touch input detected through the touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearing parts when the user previously wore the HMD. You can. That is, the touch input history information may include the touch information acquired at a previous time or accumulated up to a previous time.

๋™์ž‘ 1720์—์„œ, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํŒ๋‹จ๋œ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ๊ธฐ์ค€ ๋ฒ”์œ„ ๋‚ด์— ํฌํ•จ๋˜๋Š”์ง€๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ์™€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ˆˆ ์‚ฌ์ด์˜ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ธฐ์ค€ ๋ฒ”์œ„ ๋‚ด์— ํฌํ•จ๋˜๋Š”์ง€๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.In operation 1720, the HMD may determine whether the determined distance is within a reference range. For example, the HMD may determine whether the distance between the lens and the eye is within the reference range.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ํŒ๋‹จ๋œ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ธฐ์ค€ ๋ฒ”์œ„ ๋‚ด์— ํฌํ•จ๋œ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 1720 - ์˜ˆ), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 1730์—์„œ, ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ํ‘œ์‹œํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ์™€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ˆˆ ์‚ฌ์ด์˜ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ธฐ์ค€ ๋ฒ”์œ„ ๋‚ด์— ํฌํ•จ๋œ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ •์ƒ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ด์— ๋”ฐ๋ผ, HMD๋Š” HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ๋™์ž‘์„ ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด์˜ ํ™”๋ฉด์— ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋™์ž‘์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ํ‘œ์‹œํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the determined distance is within the reference range (operation 1720 - Yes), the HMD may display information through the display in operation 1730. For example, if it is determined that the distance between the lens and the eye is within the reference range, the HMD may determine that the HMD is normally worn on the user's head. Accordingly, in order to perform an operation according to wearing the HMD, the HMD may display information according to the operation on the screen of the display.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ํŒ๋‹จ๋œ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ธฐ์ค€ ๋ฒ”์œ„ ๋‚ด์— ํฌํ•จ๋˜์ง€ ์•Š๋Š”๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 1720 - ์•„๋‹ˆ์˜ค), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 1740์—์„œ, ์•Œ๋ฆผ์„ ์ œ๊ณตํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ์™€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ˆˆ ์‚ฌ์ด์˜ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ธฐ์ค€ ๋ฒ”์œ„ ๋‚ด์— ํฌํ•จ๋˜์ง€ ์•Š๋Š”๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ๋น„์ •์ƒ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ด์— ๋”ฐ๋ผ, HMD๋Š” HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ๋น„์ •์ƒ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋˜์—ˆ์Œ์„ ์•Œ๋ฆฌ๋Š” ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ์ œ๊ณตํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด์˜ ํ™”๋ฉด์— ํ‘œ์‹œํ•˜๊ฑฐ๋‚˜ ์Šคํ”ผ์ปค๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ถœ๋ ฅํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ดํ›„, HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 1720์„ ์žฌ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ •์ƒ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋˜๋Š”์ง€๋ฅผ ์ง€์†์ ์œผ๋กœ ๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ • ์ฃผ๊ธฐ๋กœ ๋ชจ๋‹ˆํ„ฐ๋งํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the determined distance is not within the reference range (operation 1720 - No), the HMD may provide a notification in operation 1740. For example, if it is determined that the distance between the lens and the eye is not within the reference range, the HMD may determine that the HMD is abnormally worn on the user's head. Accordingly, the HMD can provide information indicating that the HMD is abnormally worn on the user's head. For example, the HMD can display the information on the display screen or output it through speakers. Afterwards, the HMD may re-perform operation 1720. For example, the HMD can continuously or at regular intervals monitor whether the HMD is properly worn on the user's head.

๋„ 18์€ ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ž์„ธ์™€ ๊ด€๋ จ๋œ HMD์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์šด์šฉ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining another method of operating an HMD related to the wearing posture of the HMD according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 18์„ ์ฐธ์กฐํ•˜๋ฉด, HMD(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ HMD(200), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ HMD(400), ๋„ 12์˜ HMD(1200) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 13์˜ HMD(1300))๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž๊ฐ€ ์ฐฉ์šฉํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋„๋ก ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410))์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๋Š” ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221, 222), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(421, 422), ๋„ 6์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(600), ๋„ 12์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(1210, 1220) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 13์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(1310, 1320))๋“ค์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋Š” ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 3์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(291, 292), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(491, 492), ๋„ 6์˜ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(613)(๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ์˜ ์ œ3 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(633)), ๋„ 12์˜ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1211) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 13์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1311))๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋  ๋•Œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€๋ถ„์— ์ ‘์ด‰๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ ‘์ด‰์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์— ๋Œ€์‘๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ํš๋“ํ•˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํš๋“๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋Š” ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜(์˜ˆ: ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ์œ„์น˜), ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๋ฉด์ (์˜ˆ: ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ์ด ๋ฉด์ ), ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ(์˜ˆ: ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ๋ฐฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ) ๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜(์˜ˆ: ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜) ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜, ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๋ฉด์ , ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ ๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜ ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋กœ ํ‘œํ˜„๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํŒจํ„ด์œผ๋กœ ์ง€์นญ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜, ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๋ฉด์ , ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ ๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜ ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๊ฐ€ ๋‹ค๋ฅผ ๋•Œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ๋‹ค๋ฅด๋‹ค๊ณ  ํ‘œํ˜„๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.Referring to Figure 18, the HMD (e.g., the HMD 200 in Figures 2 and 3, the HMD 400 in Figures 4 and 5, the HMD 1200 in Figure 12, or the HMD 1300 in Figure 13) is used by the user. A wearing portion (e.g., the main frame 210 in FIGS. 2 and 3 or the main frame 410 in FIGS. 4 and 5) is connected to a part of the main frame so that it can be worn. Wearing parts 221 and 222, wearing parts 421 and 422 of FIGS. 4 and 5, wearing parts 600 of FIG. 6, wearing parts 1210 and 1220 of FIG. 12 or wearing parts 1310 of FIG. 13, 1320)) may be included. At least one of the wearable parts includes a touch circuit disposed on the inner side (e.g., the touch circuits 291 and 292 in FIG. 3, the touch circuits 491 and 492 in FIGS. 4 and 5, and the first touch circuit in FIG. 6 ( 613) (or the third part 633 of the integrated touch circuit), the first touch circuit 1211 of FIG. 12, or the touch circuit 1311 of FIG. 13) can be used to detect the wearing state of the HMD. . For example, when an HMD is worn on a user's head, a touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearing units may be in contact with a portion of the head and may detect a touch input according to the contact. . Additionally, the HMD may acquire touch information corresponding to the touch input and detect the wearing state of the HMD using the acquired touch information. The touch information may include, for example, touch location (e.g., location of a touched touch cell among touch cells), touch area (e.g., total area of touched touch cells among touch cells), and touch type (e.g., touch among touch cells). It may include at least one of the arrangement type of the touch cells) or the number of touches (e.g., the number of touched touch cells among touch cells). The touch information may be referred to as a touch pattern expressed by at least one of touch location, touch area, touch type, or number of touches. For example, the touch information may be expressed as a different touch pattern when at least one of the touch position, touch area, touch type, or number of touches is different.

HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด์„ ๊ฐ€์ง€๋ฉด, HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด์€ ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜๊ฐ€ ์ œ1 ์œ„์น˜์ด๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๋ฉด์ ์ด ์ œ1 ํฌ๊ธฐ ์ด์ƒ์ด๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ๊ฐ€ ์ œ1 ํ˜•ํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ€์ง€๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜๊ฐ€ ์ œ1 ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜ ์ด์ƒ์ด๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ๊ทธ๋“ค์˜ ์กฐํ•ฉ์ธ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ์œ„์น˜์ธ ์ƒํƒœ๋Š”, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ๋ณต์ˆ˜ ๊ฐœ์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‹จ๋ถ€ ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๊ท€ ๋˜๋Š” ๊ท€์™€ ์ธ์ ‘ํ•œ ๊ด€์ž๋†€์ด ๋ถ€๋ถ„๊ณผ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๋ฉด์ ์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํฌ๊ธฐ ์ด์ƒ์ธ ์ƒํƒœ๋Š”, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ๋ณต์ˆ˜ ๊ฐœ์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ์ด ๋ฉด์ ์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํฌ๊ธฐ ์ด์ƒ์ธ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ˜•ํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ€์ง€๋Š” ์ƒํƒœ๋Š”, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ๋ณต์ˆ˜ ๊ฐœ์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ๋ฐฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ˜•ํƒœ์— ๋Œ€์‘๋˜๋Š” ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ˜•ํƒœ๋Š” ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ํ•œ ๋ณ€์ด ๊ธด ์‚ฌ๊ฐํ˜• ๋˜๋Š” ํƒ€์›ํ˜•์ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜ ์ด์ƒ์ธ ์ƒํƒœ๋Š”, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ๋ณต์ˆ˜ ๊ฐœ์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜ ์ด์ƒ์ธ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If the pattern of the touch input detected through the touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearable units has a first pattern, the HMD may determine that the HMD is worn on the user's head. The first pattern may be, for example, the touch position is a first position, the touch area is a first size or more, the touch shape has a first shape, the number of touches is a first number or more, or It can represent a combination state. According to one embodiment, when the touch position is the first position, at least one touch cell arranged in the end direction of the wearable part among the plurality of touch cells arranged on the inner surface of at least one of the wearable parts is used by the user. It may indicate contact with the ear or the part of the temple adjacent to the ear. According to one embodiment, the state in which the touch area is equal to or greater than the first size means that the total area of at least one touch cell contacted among the plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearing units is the first size. It can indicate an abnormal state. According to one embodiment, the state in which the touch shape has the first shape means that the arrangement shape of at least one touch cell contacted among the plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearable parts is the first shape. It can represent the state corresponding to the shape. The first shape may be, for example, a square or oval with one long side. According to one embodiment, the state in which the number of touches is greater than or equal to the first number means that the number of at least one touch cell contacted among a plurality of touch cells disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearing units is greater than or equal to the first number. It can indicate status.

HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด, ๋™์ž‘ 1810์—์„œ, HMD๋Š” HMD์˜ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ์™€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋ˆˆ ์‚ฌ์ด์˜ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํš๋“๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ์™€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ˆˆ ์‚ฌ์ด์˜ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ์‚ฐ์ถœํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๋ฉด์ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ ๋˜๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜ ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์— ๊ธฐ๋ฐ˜ํ•˜์—ฌ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ์™€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ˆˆ ์‚ฌ์ด์˜ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ์ด๋ ฅ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ์™€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ˆˆ ์‚ฌ์ด์˜ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ์ด๋ ฅ ์ •๋ณด๋Š” ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž๊ฐ€ ์ด์ „์— HMD๋ฅผ ์ฐฉ์šฉํ•˜์˜€์„ ๋•Œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜์˜€๋˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์— ๋Œ€์‘๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ฆ‰, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ์ด๋ ฅ ์ •๋ณด๋Š” ์ด์ „ ์‹œ์ ์— ํš๋“ํ•œ ๋˜๋Š” ์ด์ „ ์‹œ์ ๊นŒ์ง€ ์ถ•์ ํ•œ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the HMD is worn on the user's head, in operation 1810, the HMD may determine the distance between the HMD's lenses and the user's eyes. The HMD can calculate the distance between the lens and the eye using the acquired touch information. According to one embodiment, the HMD may determine the distance between the lens and the eye based on at least one of the touch location, the touch area, the touch type, or the number of touches. According to one embodiment, the HMD may determine the distance between the lens and the eye using history information of touch input detected through the touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearable parts. For example, the touch input history information may include touch information corresponding to a touch input detected through the touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearing parts when the user previously wore the HMD. You can. That is, the touch input history information may include the touch information acquired at a previous time or accumulated up to a previous time.

๋™์ž‘ 1820์—์„œ, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํŒ๋‹จ๋œ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ๊ธฐ์ค€ ๋ฒ”์œ„ ๋‚ด์— ํฌํ•จ๋˜๋Š”์ง€๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ์™€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ˆˆ ์‚ฌ์ด์˜ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ธฐ์ค€ ๋ฒ”์œ„ ๋‚ด์— ํฌํ•จ๋˜๋Š”์ง€๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.In operation 1820, the HMD may determine whether the determined distance is within a reference range. For example, the HMD may determine whether the distance between the lens and the eye is within the reference range.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ํŒ๋‹จ๋œ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ธฐ์ค€ ๋ฒ”์œ„ ๋‚ด์— ํฌํ•จ๋œ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 1820 - ์˜ˆ), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 1830์—์„œ, ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ํ‘œ์‹œํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ์™€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ˆˆ ์‚ฌ์ด์˜ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ธฐ์ค€ ๋ฒ”์œ„ ๋‚ด์— ํฌํ•จ๋œ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ •์ƒ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ด์— ๋”ฐ๋ผ, HMD๋Š” HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ๋™์ž‘์„ ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด์˜ ํ™”๋ฉด์— ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋™์ž‘์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ํ‘œ์‹œํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the determined distance is within the reference range (operation 1820 - Yes), the HMD may display information through the display in operation 1830. For example, if it is determined that the distance between the lens and the eye is within the reference range, the HMD may determine that the HMD is normally worn on the user's head. Accordingly, in order to perform an operation according to wearing the HMD, the HMD may display information according to the operation on the screen of the display.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ํŒ๋‹จ๋œ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ธฐ์ค€ ๋ฒ”์œ„ ๋‚ด์— ํฌํ•จ๋˜์ง€ ์•Š๋Š”๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 1820 - ์•„๋‹ˆ์˜ค), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 1840์—์„œ, ๋ Œ์ฆˆ์˜ ์ดˆ์ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ์กฐ์ •ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์˜ˆ๋กœ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํŒ๋‹จ๋œ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ธฐ์ค€ ๋ฒ”์œ„๋ณด๋‹ค ์ž‘์œผ๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ์™€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ˆˆ ์‚ฌ์ด์˜ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ๊ฐ€๊น๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ด ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, HMD๋Š” ๋ Œ์ฆˆ์˜ ์ดˆ์ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ€๊น๊ฒŒ ์กฐ์ •ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์˜ˆ๋กœ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํŒ๋‹จ๋œ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ธฐ์ค€ ๋ฒ”์œ„๋ณด๋‹ค ํฌ๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ์™€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ˆˆ ์‚ฌ์ด์˜ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ๋ฉ€๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ด ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, HMD๋Š” ๋ Œ์ฆˆ์˜ ์ดˆ์ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ๋ฉ€๊ฒŒ ์กฐ์ •ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ดํ›„, HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 1820์„ ์žฌ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ •์ƒ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋˜๋Š”์ง€๋ฅผ ์ง€์†์ ์œผ๋กœ ๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ • ์ฃผ๊ธฐ๋กœ ๋ชจ๋‹ˆํ„ฐ๋งํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the determined distance is not within the reference range (operation 1820 - No), the HMD may adjust the focal length of the lens in operation 1840. For example, if the determined distance is smaller than the reference range, the HMD may determine that the distance between the lens and the eye is close. In this case, the HMD can closely adjust the focal length of the lens. As another example, if the determined distance is greater than the reference range, the HMD may determine that the distance between the lens and the eye is long. In this case, the HMD can adjust the focal length of the lens to a greater distance. Afterwards, the HMD may re-perform operation 1820. For example, the HMD can continuously or at regular intervals monitor whether the HMD is properly worn on the user's head.

๋„ 19์€ ๋ณธ ๊ฐœ์‹œ์˜ ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ž์„ธ์™€ ๊ด€๋ จ๋œ HMD์˜ ๋˜ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์šด์šฉ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining another method of operating an HMD related to a wearing posture of the HMD according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

๋„ 19๋ฅผ ์ฐธ์กฐํ•˜๋ฉด, HMD(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ HMD(200), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ HMD(400), ๋„ 12์˜ HMD(1200) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 13์˜ HMD(1300))๋Š” ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž๊ฐ€ ์ฐฉ์šฉํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋„๋ก ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(210) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ๋ฉ”์ธ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„(410))์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๋Š” ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221, 222), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(421, 422), ๋„ 6์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(600), ๋„ 12์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(1210, 1220) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 13์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(1310, 1320))๋“ค์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์€ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 3์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(291, 292), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(491, 492), ๋„ 6์˜ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(613)(๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ์˜ ์ œ3 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(633)), ๋„ 12์˜ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1211) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 13์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1311))๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋  ๋•Œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€๋ถ„์— ์ ‘์ด‰๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ ‘์ด‰์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋‹ค์‹œ ๋งํ•ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ œ1 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ ‘์ด‰์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ œ2 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ ‘์ด‰์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.Referring to Figure 19, the HMD (e.g., the HMD 200 in Figures 2 and 3, the HMD 400 in Figures 4 and 5, the HMD 1200 in Figure 12, or the HMD 1300 in Figure 13) is used by the user. A wearing portion (e.g., the main frame 210 in FIGS. 2 and 3 or the main frame 410 in FIGS. 4 and 5) is connected to a part of the main frame so that it can be worn. Wearing parts 221 and 222, wearing parts 421 and 422 of FIGS. 4 and 5, wearing parts 600 of FIG. 6, wearing parts 1210 and 1220 of FIG. 12 or wearing parts 1310 of FIG. 13, 1320)) may be included. The wearable parts include touch circuits disposed on the inner side (e.g., touch circuits 291 and 292 in Figure 3, touch circuits 491 and 492 in Figures 4 and 5, and first touch circuit 613 in Figure 6 ( Alternatively, the wearing state of the HMD can be detected using the third part 633 of the integrated touch circuit, the first touch circuit 1211 of FIG. 12, or the touch circuit 1311 of FIG. 13). For example, when the HMD is worn on the user's head, the touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the wearing parts may contact a portion of the head and detect a touch input according to the contact. In other words, the first touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the first wearable part among the wearable parts detects the first touch input according to the contact, and the second touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the second wearable part among the wearable parts. Can detect a second touch input according to the contact.

๋™์ž‘ 1910์—์„œ, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ๊ฐ๊ฐ์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ œ1 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•œ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์— ๋Œ€์‘๋˜๋Š” ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ œ2 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•œ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์— ๋Œ€์‘๋˜๋Š” ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.In operation 1910, the HMD may determine the wearing state of each of the wearing parts. For example, the HMD determines the wearing state of the first wearable part using the first touch information corresponding to the first touch input detected through the first touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the first wearable part among the wearable parts. And, the wearing state of the second wearing part can be determined using second touch information corresponding to the second touch input detected through the second touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the second wearing part among the wearing parts.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋Š” ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜(์˜ˆ: ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ์œ„์น˜), ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๋ฉด์ (์˜ˆ: ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ์ด ๋ฉด์ ), ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ(์˜ˆ: ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ๋ฐฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ) ๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜(์˜ˆ: ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€์˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜) ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜, ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๋ฉด์ , ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ ๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜ ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๋กœ ํ‘œํ˜„๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํŒจํ„ด์œผ๋กœ ์ง€์นญ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์œ„์น˜, ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๋ฉด์ , ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ ๋˜๋Š” ํ„ฐ์น˜ ๊ฐœ์ˆ˜ ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜๊ฐ€ ๋‹ค๋ฅผ ๋•Œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ๋‹ค๋ฅด๋‹ค๊ณ  ํ‘œํ˜„๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The first touch information and the second touch information include, for example, a touch location (e.g., the position of a touched touch cell among touch cells), a touch area (e.g., the total area of a touched touch cell among touch cells), and touch It may include at least one of a shape (e.g., arrangement form of touched touch cells among touch cells) or the number of touches (e.g., number of touch cells among touch cells). The first touch information and the second touch information may be referred to as a touch pattern expressed by at least one of a touch location, touch area, touch shape, or number of touches. For example, when the first touch information and the second touch information are different in at least one of the touch location, touch area, touch type, or number of touches, the touch patterns may be expressed as being different.

๋™์ž‘ 1920์—์„œ, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์œ„์น˜์˜ ํŽธ์ฐจ๊ฐ€ ๊ธฐ์ค€ ๋ฒ”์œ„ ๋‚ด์— ํฌํ•จ๋˜๋Š”์ง€๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์œ„์น˜๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์œ„์น˜๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์œ„์น˜๋Š” HMD์˜ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ์™€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋ˆˆ ์‚ฌ์ด์˜ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ์— ๋Œ€์‘๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์œ„์น˜๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋ˆˆ ์ชฝ์œผ๋กœ ๋‹น๊ฒจ์ ธ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋œ ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ์™€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ˆˆ ์‚ฌ์ด์˜ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๋Š” ๊ธฐ์ค€ ๋ฒ”์œ„๋ณด๋‹ค ์ž‘๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์œ„์น˜๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋ˆˆ๊ณผ ๋ฉ€๊ฒŒ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋œ ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ์™€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ˆˆ ์‚ฌ์ด์˜ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๋Š” ๊ธฐ์ค€ ๋ฒ”์œ„๋ณด๋‹ค ํด ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์œ„์น˜์˜ ํŽธ์ฐจ๋Š” ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์œ„์น˜๊ฐ€ ์ œ1 ์œ„์น˜์ด๊ณ  ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์œ„์น˜๊ฐ€ ์ œ2 ์œ„์น˜์ธ ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ์œ„์น˜์™€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ์œ„์น˜์˜ ์ฐจ์ด ๊ฐ’์— ๋Œ€์‘๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.In operation 1920, the HMD may determine whether the deviation of the wearing positions of the wearing parts is within a reference range. According to one embodiment, the HMD may determine the wearing position of the first wearing part using the first touch information, and determine the wearing position of the second wearing part using the second touch information. The wearing position may correspond to the distance between the lens of the HMD and the user's eyes. For example, when the wearing positions of the wearing parts are pulled toward the user's eyes, the distance between the lens and the eye is smaller than the reference range, and when the wearing positions of the wearing parts are worn far from the user's eyes, the The distance between the lens and the eye may be greater than the reference range. In addition, the deviation of the wearing positions of the wearing parts may be, for example, when the wearing position of the first wearing part is the first position and the wearing position of the second wearing part is the second position, the first position and the second position. It can correspond to the difference value of .

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์œ„์น˜์˜ ํŽธ์ฐจ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ธฐ์ค€ ๋ฒ”์œ„ ๋‚ด์— ํฌํ•จ๋œ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 1920 - ์˜ˆ), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 1930์—์„œ, ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ํ‘œ์‹œํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์œ„์น˜์˜ ํŽธ์ฐจ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ธฐ์ค€ ๋ฒ”์œ„ ๋‚ด์— ํฌํ•จ๋œ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ •์ƒ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ด์— ๋”ฐ๋ผ, HMD๋Š” HMD์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ๋™์ž‘์„ ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด์˜ ํ™”๋ฉด์— ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋™์ž‘์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ํ‘œ์‹œํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the deviation of the wearing position is within the reference range (operation 1920 - Yes), the HMD may display information through the display in operation 1930. For example, if it is determined that the deviation of the wearing positions of the wearing parts is within the reference range, the HMD may determine that the HMD is normally worn on the user's head. Accordingly, in order to perform an operation according to wearing the HMD, the HMD may display information according to the operation on the screen of the display.

์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์œ„์น˜์˜ ํŽธ์ฐจ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ธฐ์ค€ ๋ฒ”์œ„ ๋‚ด์— ํฌํ•จ๋˜์ง€ ์•Š๋Š”๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด(๋™์ž‘ 1920 - ์•„๋‹ˆ์˜ค), HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 1940์—์„œ, ์•Œ๋ฆผ์„ ์ œ๊ณตํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์œ„์น˜์˜ ํŽธ์ฐจ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ธฐ์ค€ ๋ฒ”์œ„ ๋‚ด์— ํฌํ•จ๋˜์ง€ ์•Š๋Š”๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด, HMD๋Š” HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ๋น„์ •์ƒ์ ์œผ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ์‚๋šค์–ด์ง€๊ฒŒ) ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ด์— ๋”ฐ๋ผ, HMD๋Š” HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ๋น„์ •์ƒ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋˜์—ˆ์Œ์„ ์•Œ๋ฆฌ๋Š” ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ์ œ๊ณตํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด์˜ ํ™”๋ฉด์— ํ‘œ์‹œํ•˜๊ฑฐ๋‚˜ ์Šคํ”ผ์ปค๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ถœ๋ ฅํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ดํ›„, HMD๋Š” ๋™์ž‘ 1920์„ ์žฌ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, HMD๋Š” HMD๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ •์ƒ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋˜๋Š”์ง€๋ฅผ ์ง€์†์ ์œผ๋กœ ๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ • ์ฃผ๊ธฐ๋กœ ๋ชจ๋‹ˆํ„ฐ๋งํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.If it is determined that the deviation of the wearing position is not within the reference range (operation 1920 - No), the HMD may provide a notification in operation 1940. For example, if it is determined that the deviation of the wearing positions of the wearing parts is not within the reference range, the HMD may determine that the HMD is worn abnormally (eg, crookedly) on the user's head. Accordingly, the HMD can provide information indicating that the HMD is abnormally worn on the user's head. For example, the HMD can display the information on the display screen or output it through speakers. Afterwards, the HMD may re-perform operation 1920. For example, the HMD can continuously or at regular intervals monitor whether the HMD is properly worn on the user's head.

์ƒ์ˆ ํ•œ ๋ฐ”์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด, ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ HMD(200), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ HMD(400), ๋„ 12์˜ HMD(1200) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 13์˜ HMD(1300))์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ ๊ฐ์ง€ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์€, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„์˜ ์–‘ ๋‹จ๋ถ€์— ๊ฐ๊ฐ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๊ณ  ์ผ ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ์—ฐ์žฅ๋œ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 2 ๋ฐ ๋„ 3์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(221, 222), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(421, 422), ๋„ 6์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(600), ๋„ 12์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(1210, 1220) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 13์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€(1310, 1320))๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 3์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(291, 292), ๋„ 4 ๋ฐ ๋„ 5์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(491, 492), ๋„ 6์˜ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(613)(๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ์˜ ์ œ3 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(633)), ๋„ 12์˜ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1211) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 13์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1311))๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 7์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 730, ๋„ 8์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 830, ๋„ 10์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 1030 ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 11์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 1130), ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ๊ฐ์ง€์— ์‘๋‹ตํ•˜์—ฌ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์— ๋Œ€์‘๋˜๋Š” ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด์— ๊ธฐ๋ฐ˜ํ•˜์—ฌ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.As described above, according to various embodiments, a head mounted display device (e.g., the HMD 200 of FIGS. 2 and 3, the HMD 400 of FIGS. 4 and 5, the HMD 1200 of FIG. 12, or the HMD 1200 of FIG. 13 The method of detecting the wearing state of the HMD (1300) includes wearing parts (e.g., wearing parts 221 and 222 in FIGS. 2 and 3) that are respectively connected to both ends of the frame of the head mounted display device and extend in one direction. , at least one of the wearing parts 421 and 422 of FIGS. 4 and 5, the wearing part 600 of FIG. 6, the wearing parts 1210 and 1220 of FIG. 12, or the wearing parts 1310 and 1320 of FIG. 13. A first touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of the wearing part (e.g., the touch circuits 291 and 292 in FIG. 3, the touch circuits 491 and 492 in FIGS. 4 and 5, and the first touch circuit 613 in FIG. 6). An operation of detecting a first touch input through (or the third part 633 of the touch circuit formed integrally), the first touch circuit 1211 of FIG. 12, or the touch circuit 1311 of FIG. 13 (e.g., FIG. Operation 730 of 7, operation 830 of FIG. 8, operation 1030 of FIG. 10, or operation 1130 of FIG. 11), and in response to detection of the first touch input, based on the first touch information corresponding to the first touch input This may include an operation of determining a wearing state of the head mounted display device.

๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ ๊ฐ์ง€ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์€, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ๊ฐ์ง€ ์ „์—, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 6์˜ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(611)(๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ์˜ ์ œ1 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(631)) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 12์˜ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1221))๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 7์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 710), ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ๊ฐ์ง€์— ์‘๋‹ตํ•˜์—ฌ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™” ์ˆ˜์ค€์„ ๋†’์ด๋Š” ๋™์ž‘(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 7์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 720), ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด์— ๊ธฐ๋ฐ˜ํ•˜์—ฌ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๊ฐ€ ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ๋™์ž‘(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 7์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 740)์„ ๋” ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to various embodiments, a method of detecting a wearing state of a head mounted display device includes, before detecting the first touch input, a second touch circuit disposed on the outer surface of at least one of the wearing parts (e.g., in FIG. 6). An operation of detecting a second touch input through the second touch circuit 611 (or the first portion 631 of the touch circuit formed integrally) or the second touch circuit 1221 of FIG. 12 (e.g., of FIG. 7) Operation 710), an operation of increasing the activation level of the processor of the head mounted display device in response to detection of the second touch input (e.g., operation 720 of FIG. 7), and an operation of increasing the activation level of the processor of the head mounted display device based on the first touch information. When the wearing state of the display device is determined, an operation of activating the display of the head mounted display device (eg, operation 740 of FIG. 7) may be further included.

๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ ๊ฐ์ง€ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์€, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ๊ฐ์ง€ ์ „์—, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 6์˜ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(611)(๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ์˜ ์ œ1 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(631)) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 12์˜ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1221))๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 8์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 810), ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ๊ฐ์ง€์— ์‘๋‹ตํ•˜์—ฌ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™” ์ˆ˜์ค€์„ ๋†’์ด๊ณ  ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ๋™์ž‘(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 8์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 820), ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ๊ฐ์ง€ ํ›„ ์ง€์ •๋œ ์‹œ๊ฐ„ ๋‚ด์— ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์ง€ ์•Š์œผ๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ๋น„ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ๋™์ž‘์„ ๋” ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to various embodiments, a method of detecting a wearing state of a head mounted display device includes, before detecting the first touch input, a second touch circuit disposed on the outer surface of at least one of the wearing parts (e.g., in FIG. 6). An operation of detecting a second touch input through the second touch circuit 611 (or the first portion 631 of the touch circuit formed integrally) or the second touch circuit 1221 of FIG. 12 (e.g., of FIG. 8 Operation 810), in response to detection of the second touch input, increasing the activation level of the processor of the head mounted display device and activating the display of the head mounted display device (e.g., operation 820 of FIG. 8), and If the first touch input is not detected within a specified time after detecting the second touch input, the method may further include deactivating the display.

๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ ๊ฐ์ง€ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์€, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด์—์„œ ์ œ2 ํŒจํ„ด์œผ๋กœ ๋ณ€๊ฒฝ๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์‹œ์Šคํ…œ์˜ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”๋ฅผ ์œ ์ง€ํ•˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ๋น„ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ๋™์ž‘(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 9์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 920), ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด์—์„œ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํŒจํ„ด์œผ๋กœ ๋ณ€๊ฒฝ๋œ ์ƒํƒœ์—์„œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํŒจํ„ด์—์„œ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด์œผ๋กœ ๋ณ€๊ฒฝ๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ๋™์ž‘(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 9์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 960)์„ ๋” ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to various embodiments, a method for detecting a wearing state of a head mounted display device maintains activation of the system of the head mounted display device when the pattern of the first touch input changes from a first pattern to a second pattern, An operation of deactivating the display of the head mounted display device (e.g., operation 920 of FIG. 9), and a pattern of the first touch input in a state where the pattern of the first touch input is changed from the first pattern to the second pattern. When the second pattern is changed to the first pattern, an operation of activating the display (eg, operation 960 of FIG. 9) may be further included.

๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ ๊ฐ์ง€ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์€, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ๊ฐ์ง€ ์ „์—, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 6์˜ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(611)(๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ์˜ ์ œ1 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(631)) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 12์˜ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1221)) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„์ „์ฒด(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 13์˜ ๋„์ „์ฒด(1321))๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 10์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 1010), ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™” ์ˆ˜์ค€์„ ๋†’์ด๋Š” ๋™์ž‘(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 10์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 1020), ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด์— ๊ธฐ๋ฐ˜ํ•˜์—ฌ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๊ฐ€ ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ๋™์ž‘(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 10์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 1040)์„ ๋” ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to various embodiments, a method of detecting a wearing state of a head mounted display device includes, before detecting the first touch input, a second touch circuit disposed on an outer surface of at least one of the first touch circuit and the wearable portion. (e.g., the second touch circuit 611 of FIG. 6 (or the first part 631 of the touch circuit formed integrally) or the second touch circuit 1221 of FIG. 12) or a conductor (e.g., the conductor of FIG. 13) An operation of detecting separation of the worn parts using a sieve 1321 (e.g., operation 1010 of FIG. 10), and an operation of increasing the activation level of the processor of the head mounted display device when the worn parts are separated (e.g., operation 1010 of FIG. : Operation 1020 of FIG. 10), and when the wearing state of the head mounted display device is determined based on the first touch information, operation of activating the display of the head mounted display device (e.g., operation 1040 of FIG. 10). More may be included.

๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ ๊ฐ์ง€ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์€, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ๊ฐ์ง€ ์ „์—, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 6์˜ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(611)(๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ์˜ ์ œ1 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(631)) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 12์˜ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1221)) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„์ „์ฒด(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 13์˜ ๋„์ „์ฒด(1321))๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 11์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 1110), ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™” ์ˆ˜์ค€์„ ๋†’์ด๊ณ  ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ๋™์ž‘(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 11์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 1120), ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋œ ํ›„ ์ง€์ •๋œ ์‹œ๊ฐ„ ๋‚ด์— ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์ง€ ์•Š์œผ๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ๋น„ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ๋™์ž‘์„ ๋” ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to various embodiments, a method of detecting a wearing state of a head mounted display device includes, before detecting the first touch input, a second touch circuit disposed on an outer surface of at least one of the first touch circuit and the wearable portion. (e.g., the second touch circuit 611 of FIG. 6 (or the first part 631 of the touch circuit formed integrally) or the second touch circuit 1221 of FIG. 12) or a conductor (e.g., the conductor of FIG. 13) An operation of detecting separation of the worn parts using a sieve 1321 (e.g., operation 1110 of FIG. 11). When the worn parts are separated, the activation level of the processor of the head mounted display device is increased and the head mounted display device is activated. The method may further include activating the display of the display device (e.g., operation 1120 of FIG. 11 ), and deactivating the display if the first touch input is not detected within a specified time after the wearable parts are separated. there is.

๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ ๊ฐ์ง€ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์€, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 6์˜ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(611)(๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ์˜ ์ œ1 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(631)) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 12์˜ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1221)) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„์ „์ฒด(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 13์˜ ๋„์ „์ฒด(1321))๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ ‘์ด‰์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 14์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 1410), ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ์ ‘์ด‰๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ๋น„ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”์‹œํ‚ค๊ณ  ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™” ์ˆ˜์ค€์„ ๋‚ฎ์ถ”๋Š” ๋™์ž‘(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 14์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 1420)์„ ๋” ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to various embodiments, a method of detecting a wearing state of a head mounted display device includes the first touch circuit and a second touch circuit disposed on an outer surface of at least one of the wearing parts (e.g., the second touch in FIG. 6). Using the circuit 611 (or the first portion 631 of the integrated touch circuit or the second touch circuit 1221 of FIG. 12) or a conductor (e.g., the conductor 1321 of FIG. 13), An operation to detect contact of the wearable parts (e.g., operation 1410 of FIG. 14), and when the wearable parts are contacted, an operation to deactivate the display of the head mounted display device and lower the activation level of the processor of the head mounted display device. (e.g. operation 1420 of FIG. 14) may be further included.

๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ ๊ฐ์ง€ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์€, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 6์˜ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(611)(๋˜๋Š” ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ์˜ ์ œ1 ๋ถ€๋ถ„(631)) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 12์˜ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ(1221)) ๋˜๋Š” ๋„์ „์ฒด(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 13์˜ ๋„์ „์ฒด(1321))๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ ‘์ด‰์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 15์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 1510), ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ์ ‘์ด‰๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ๋น„ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ๋™์ž‘(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 15์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 1520), ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜๊ฐ€ ์ผ€์ด์Šค์— ์•ˆ์ฐฉ๋˜์—ˆ๋Š”์ง€ ์—ฌ๋ถ€๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 15์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 1530), ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ผ€์ด์Šค์— ์•ˆ์ฐฉ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™” ์ˆ˜์ค€์„ ๋‚ฎ์ถ”๋Š” ๋™์ž‘(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 15์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 1540)์„ ๋” ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to various embodiments, a method of detecting a wearing state of a head mounted display device includes the first touch circuit and a second touch circuit disposed on an outer surface of at least one of the wearing parts (e.g., the second touch in FIG. 6). Using the circuit 611 (or the first portion 631 of the integrated touch circuit or the second touch circuit 1221 of FIG. 12) or a conductor (e.g., the conductor 1321 of FIG. 13), An operation of detecting contact of the wearable parts (e.g., operation 1510 of FIG. 15), an operation of deactivating the display of the head mounted display device when the wearable parts are contacted (e.g., operation 1520 of FIG. 15), and the head mount An operation of determining whether the display device is seated in the case (e.g., operation 1530 of FIG. 15), and if it is determined that the head mounted display device is seated in the case, an operation of lowering the activation level of the processor of the head mounted display device. (e.g. operation 1540 of FIG. 15) may be further included.

๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ ๊ฐ์ง€ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์€, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜๊ฐ€ ์ถฉ์ „๊ธฐ์˜ ์ถฉ์ „ ๋‹จ์ž์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜์—ˆ๋Š”์ง€๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 16์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 1610), ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ ๋˜๋Š” ๋„์ „์ฒด๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ ‘์ด‰์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 16์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 1620), ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ์ ‘์ด‰๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜๋ฅผ ์ถฉ์ „ํ•˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 16์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 1630), ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ์ ‘์ด‰๋˜์ง€ ์•Š์œผ๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ถฉ์ „๊ธฐ์— ๋ถˆ์™„์ „ํ•˜๊ฒŒ ์‚ฝ์ž…๋˜์—ˆ์Œ์„ ์•Œ๋ฆฌ๋Š” ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ์ œ๊ณตํ•˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 16์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 1630)์„ ๋” ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to various embodiments, a method of detecting a wearing state of a head mounted display device includes an operation of determining whether the head mounted display device is connected to a charging terminal of a charger (e.g., operation 1610 of FIG. 16), the first touch circuit, and An operation of detecting contact between the wearing parts using a second touch circuit or a conductor disposed on the outer surface of at least one of the wearing parts (e.g., operation 1620 of FIG. 16), when the wearing parts are contacted , an operation of charging the head-mounted display device (e.g., operation 1630 of FIG. 16), and an operation of providing information indicating that the head-mounted display device is incompletely inserted into the charger if the wearing parts are not in contact (e.g. : Operation 1630 of FIG. 16) may be further included.

๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ ๊ฐ์ง€ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์€, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด์— ๊ธฐ๋ฐ˜ํ•˜์—ฌ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ์™€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋ˆˆ ์‚ฌ์ด์˜ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 17์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 1710 ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 18์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 1810), ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํŒ๋‹จ๋œ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ๊ธฐ์ค€ ๋ฒ”์œ„ ๋‚ด์— ํฌํ•จ๋˜๋Š”์ง€๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 17์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 1720 ๋˜๋Š” ๋„ 18์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 1820), ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํŒ๋‹จ๋œ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ธฐ์ค€ ๋ฒ”์œ„ ๋‚ด์— ํฌํ•จ๋˜์ง€ ์•Š์•˜๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ๋น„์ •์ƒ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋˜์—ˆ์Œ์„ ์•Œ๋ฆฌ๋Š” ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ์ œ๊ณต(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 17์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 1740)ํ•˜๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ์˜ ์ดˆ์ ๊ฑฐ๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ์กฐ์ •ํ•˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 18์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 1840)์„ ๋” ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to various embodiments, a method for detecting a wearing state of a head mounted display device includes the operation of determining the distance between the lens of the head mounted display device and the user's eyes based on the first touch information (e.g., in FIG. 17 Operation 1710 or operation 1810 of FIG. 18), an operation of determining whether the determined distance is within the reference range (e.g., operation 1720 of FIG. 17 or operation 1820 of FIG. 18), and an operation of determining whether the determined distance is within the reference range. If it is determined that it is not included, information is provided indicating that the head mounted display device is abnormally worn on the head (e.g., operation 1740 of FIG. 17), or an operation of adjusting the focal length of the lens (e.g., operation of FIG. 18) 1840) may be further included.

๋‹ค์–‘ํ•  ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„์˜ ์ผ๋‹จ๋ถ€์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๋Š” ์ œ1 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€ ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„์˜ ํƒ€๋‹จ๋ถ€์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๋Š” ์ œ2 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ œ3 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๊ณ , ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ ๊ฐ์ง€ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์€, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋œ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์— ๋Œ€์‘๋˜๋Š” ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด์— ๊ธฐ๋ฐ˜ํ•˜์—ฌ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์œ„์น˜๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 19์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 1910), ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ3 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋œ ์ œ3 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์— ๋Œ€์‘๋˜๋Š” ์ œ3 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด์— ๊ธฐ๋ฐ˜ํ•˜์—ฌ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์œ„์น˜๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 19์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 1910), ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์œ„์น˜์™€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์œ„์น˜์˜ ํŽธ์ฐจ๊ฐ€ ๊ธฐ์ค€ ๋ฒ”์œ„ ๋‚ด์— ํฌํ•จ๋˜๋Š”์ง€๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 19์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 1920), ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํŽธ์ฐจ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ธฐ์ค€ ๋ฒ”์œ„ ๋‚ด์— ํฌํ•จ๋˜์ง€ ์•Š์•˜๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ๋น„์ •์ƒ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋˜์—ˆ์Œ์„ ์•Œ๋ฆฌ๋Š” ์ •๋ณด๋ฅผ ์ œ๊ณตํ•˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘(์˜ˆ: ๋„ 19์˜ ๋™์ž‘ 1940)์„ ๋” ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to various embodiments, the wearing parts include a first wearing part connected to one end of the frame and a second wearing part connected to the other end of the frame, and the first touch circuit is connected to the first wearing part. A method for detecting a wearing state of a head mounted display device comprising a second touch circuit disposed on an inner surface and a third touch circuit disposed on an inner surface of the second wearing unit, the second touch circuit detected through the second touch circuit. An operation of determining a wearing position of the first wearing unit based on second touch information corresponding to the touch input (e.g., operation 1910 of FIG. 19), and a third touch input corresponding to the third touch input detected through the third touch circuit. 3 An operation of determining the wearing position of the second wearing part based on touch information (e.g., operation 1910 of FIG. 19), and whether the difference between the wearing position of the first wearing part and the wearing position of the second wearing part is within a reference range. An operation of determining (e.g., operation 1920 of FIG. 19), if it is determined that the deviation is not within the reference range, an operation of providing information indicating that the head mounted display device is abnormally worn on the head (e.g., operation 1920 of FIG. Operation 1940 of 19 may further be included.

๋ณธ ๋ฌธ์„œ์— ๊ฐœ์‹œ๋œ ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ๋“ค์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜๋Š” ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ํ˜•ํƒœ์˜ ์žฅ์น˜๊ฐ€ ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜๋Š”, ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค๋ฉด, ํœด๋Œ€์šฉ ํ†ต์‹  ์žฅ์น˜(์˜ˆ: ์Šค๋งˆํŠธํฐ), ์ปดํ“จํ„ฐ ์žฅ์น˜, ํœด๋Œ€์šฉ ๋ฉ€ํ‹ฐ๋ฏธ๋””์–ด ์žฅ์น˜, ํœด๋Œ€์šฉ ์˜๋ฃŒ ๊ธฐ๊ธฐ, ์นด๋ฉ”๋ผ, ์›จ์–ด๋Ÿฌ๋ธ” ์žฅ์น˜, ๋˜๋Š” ๊ฐ€์ „ ์žฅ์น˜๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋ณธ ๋ฌธ์„œ์˜ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜๋Š” ์ „์ˆ ํ•œ ๊ธฐ๊ธฐ๋“ค์— ํ•œ์ •๋˜์ง€ ์•Š๋Š”๋‹ค.Electronic devices according to various embodiments disclosed in this document may be of various types. Electronic devices may include, for example, portable communication devices (e.g., smartphones), computer devices, portable multimedia devices, portable medical devices, cameras, wearable devices, or home appliances. Electronic devices according to embodiments of this document are not limited to the above-described devices.

๋ณธ ๋ฌธ์„œ์˜ ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ๋“ค ๋ฐ ์ด์— ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋œ ์šฉ์–ด๋“ค์€ ๋ณธ ๋ฌธ์„œ์— ๊ธฐ์žฌ๋œ ๊ธฐ์ˆ ์  ํŠน์ง•๋“ค์„ ํŠน์ •ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ๋“ค๋กœ ํ•œ์ •ํ•˜๋ ค๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์ด ์•„๋‹ˆ๋ฉฐ, ํ•ด๋‹น ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์˜ ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ๋ณ€๊ฒฝ, ๊ท ๋“ฑ๋ฌผ, ๋˜๋Š” ๋Œ€์ฒด๋ฌผ์„ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์œผ๋กœ ์ดํ•ด๋˜์–ด์•ผ ํ•œ๋‹ค. ๋„๋ฉด์˜ ์„ค๋ช…๊ณผ ๊ด€๋ จํ•˜์—ฌ, ์œ ์‚ฌํ•œ ๋˜๋Š” ๊ด€๋ จ๋œ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ์— ๋Œ€ํ•ด์„œ๋Š” ์œ ์‚ฌํ•œ ์ฐธ์กฐ ๋ถ€ํ˜ธ๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์•„์ดํ…œ์— ๋Œ€์‘ํ•˜๋Š” ๋ช…์‚ฌ์˜ ๋‹จ์ˆ˜ ํ˜•์€ ๊ด€๋ จ๋œ ๋ฌธ๋งฅ์ƒ ๋ช…๋ฐฑํ•˜๊ฒŒ ๋‹ค๋ฅด๊ฒŒ ์ง€์‹œํ•˜์ง€ ์•Š๋Š” ํ•œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์•„์ดํ…œ ํ•œ ๊ฐœ ๋˜๋Š” ๋ณต์ˆ˜ ๊ฐœ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋ณธ ๋ฌธ์„œ์—์„œ, "A ๋˜๋Š” B", "A ๋ฐ B ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜", "A ๋˜๋Š” B ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜", "A, B ๋˜๋Š” C", "A, B ๋ฐ C ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜", ๋ฐ "A, B, ๋˜๋Š” C ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜"์™€ ๊ฐ™์€ ๋ฌธ๊ตฌ๋“ค ๊ฐ๊ฐ์€ ๊ทธ ๋ฌธ๊ตฌ๋“ค ์ค‘ ํ•ด๋‹นํ•˜๋Š” ๋ฌธ๊ตฌ์— ํ•จ๊ป˜ ๋‚˜์—ด๋œ ํ•ญ๋ชฉ๋“ค ์ค‘ ์–ด๋А ํ•˜๋‚˜, ๋˜๋Š” ๊ทธ๋“ค์˜ ๋ชจ๋“  ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•œ ์กฐํ•ฉ์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. "์ œ1", "์ œ2", ๋˜๋Š” "์ฒซ์งธ" ๋˜๋Š” "๋‘˜์งธ"์™€ ๊ฐ™์€ ์šฉ์–ด๋“ค์€ ๋‹จ์ˆœํžˆ ํ•ด๋‹น ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ๋ฅผ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ํ•ด๋‹น ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ์™€ ๊ตฌ๋ถ„ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ์œผ๋ฉฐ, ํ•ด๋‹น ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ๋“ค์„ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์ธก๋ฉด(์˜ˆ: ์ค‘์š”์„ฑ ๋˜๋Š” ์ˆœ์„œ)์—์„œ ํ•œ์ •ํ•˜์ง€ ์•Š๋Š”๋‹ค. ์–ด๋–ค(์˜ˆ: ์ œ1) ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ๊ฐ€ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ(์˜ˆ: ์ œ2) ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ์—, "๊ธฐ๋Šฅ์ ์œผ๋กœ" ๋˜๋Š” "ํ†ต์‹ ์ ์œผ๋กœ"๋ผ๋Š” ์šฉ์–ด์™€ ํ•จ๊ป˜ ๋˜๋Š” ์ด๋Ÿฐ ์šฉ์–ด ์—†์ด, "์ปคํ”Œ๋“œ" ๋˜๋Š” "์ปค๋„ฅํ‹ฐ๋“œ"๋ผ๊ณ  ์–ธ๊ธ‰๋œ ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ๊ทธ๊ฒƒ์€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์–ด๋–ค ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ์— ์ง์ ‘์ ์œผ๋กœ(์˜ˆ: ์œ ์„ ์œผ๋กœ), ๋ฌด์„ ์œผ๋กœ, ๋˜๋Š” ์ œ 3 ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•˜์—ฌ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์„ ์˜๋ฏธํ•œ๋‹ค.The various embodiments of this document and the terms used herein are not intended to limit the technical features described in this document to specific embodiments, and should be understood to include various changes, equivalents, or replacements of the embodiments. In connection with the description of the drawings, similar reference numbers may be used for similar or related components. The singular form of a noun corresponding to an item may include one or more of the above items, unless the relevant context clearly indicates otherwise. As used herein, โ€œA or Bโ€, โ€œat least one of A and Bโ€, โ€œat least one of A or Bโ€, โ€œA, B or Cโ€, โ€œat least one of A, B and Cโ€, and โ€œA Each of phrases such as โ€œat least one of , B, or Cโ€ may include any one of the items listed together in the corresponding phrase, or any possible combination thereof. Terms such as "first", "second", or "first" or "second" may be used simply to distinguish one element from another, and may be used to distinguish such elements in other respects, such as importance or order) is not limited. One (e.g. first) component is said to be "coupled" or "connected" to another (e.g. second) component, with or without the terms "functionally" or "communicatively". When mentioned, it means that any of the components can be connected to the other components directly (e.g. wired), wirelessly, or through a third component.

๋ณธ ๋ฌธ์„œ์˜ ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ๋“ค์—์„œ ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋œ ์šฉ์–ด "๋ชจ๋“ˆ"์€ ํ•˜๋“œ์›จ์–ด, ์†Œํ”„ํŠธ์›จ์–ด ๋˜๋Š” ํŽŒ์›จ์–ด๋กœ ๊ตฌํ˜„๋œ ์œ ๋‹›์„ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ์œผ๋ฉฐ, ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค๋ฉด, ๋กœ์ง, ๋…ผ๋ฆฌ ๋ธ”๋ก, ๋ถ€ํ’ˆ, ๋˜๋Š” ํšŒ๋กœ์™€ ๊ฐ™์€ ์šฉ์–ด์™€ ์ƒํ˜ธ ํ˜ธํ™˜์ ์œผ๋กœ ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋ชจ๋“ˆ์€, ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ๋œ ๋ถ€ํ’ˆ ๋˜๋Š” ํ•˜๋‚˜ ๋˜๋Š” ๊ทธ ์ด์ƒ์˜ ๊ธฐ๋Šฅ์„ ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•˜๋Š”, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ถ€ํ’ˆ์˜ ์ตœ์†Œ ๋‹จ์œ„ ๋˜๋Š” ๊ทธ ์ผ๋ถ€๊ฐ€ ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค๋ฉด, ์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ๋ชจ๋“ˆ์€ ASIC(application-specific integrated circuit)์˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ๋กœ ๊ตฌํ˜„๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.The term โ€œmoduleโ€ used in various embodiments of this document may include a unit implemented in hardware, software, or firmware, and is interchangeable with terms such as logic, logic block, component, or circuit, for example. It can be used as A module may be an integrated part or a minimum unit of the parts or a part thereof that performs one or more functions. For example, according to one embodiment, the module may be implemented in the form of an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC).

๋ณธ ๋ฌธ์„œ์˜ ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ๋“ค์€ ๊ธฐ๊ธฐ(machine)(์˜ˆ: ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101))์— ์˜ํ•ด ์ฝ์„ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋Š” ์ €์žฅ ๋งค์ฒด(storage medium)(์˜ˆ: ๋‚ด์žฅ ๋ฉ”๋ชจ๋ฆฌ(136) ๋˜๋Š” ์™ธ์žฅ ๋ฉ”๋ชจ๋ฆฌ(138))์— ์ €์žฅ๋œ ํ•˜๋‚˜ ์ด์ƒ์˜ ๋ช…๋ น์–ด๋“ค์„ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๋Š” ์†Œํ”„ํŠธ์›จ์–ด(์˜ˆ: ํ”„๋กœ๊ทธ๋žจ(140))๋กœ์„œ ๊ตฌํ˜„๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค๋ฉด, ๊ธฐ๊ธฐ(์˜ˆ: ์ „์ž ์žฅ์น˜(101))์˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ(์˜ˆ: ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ(120))๋Š”, ์ €์žฅ ๋งค์ฒด๋กœ๋ถ€ํ„ฐ ์ €์žฅ๋œ ํ•˜๋‚˜ ์ด์ƒ์˜ ๋ช…๋ น์–ด๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋ช…๋ น์„ ํ˜ธ์ถœํ•˜๊ณ , ๊ทธ๊ฒƒ์„ ์‹คํ–‰ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ด๊ฒƒ์€ ๊ธฐ๊ธฐ๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ˜ธ์ถœ๋œ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋ช…๋ น์–ด์— ๋”ฐ๋ผ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๊ธฐ๋Šฅ์„ ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•˜๋„๋ก ์šด์˜๋˜๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์„ ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•˜๊ฒŒ ํ•œ๋‹ค. ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ•˜๋‚˜ ์ด์ƒ์˜ ๋ช…๋ น์–ด๋“ค์€ ์ปดํŒŒ์ผ๋Ÿฌ์— ์˜ํ•ด ์ƒ์„ฑ๋œ ์ฝ”๋“œ ๋˜๋Š” ์ธํ„ฐํ”„๋ฆฌํ„ฐ์— ์˜ํ•ด ์‹คํ–‰๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋Š” ์ฝ”๋“œ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๊ธฐ๊ธฐ๋กœ ์ฝ์„ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋Š” ์ €์žฅ ๋งค์ฒด๋Š”, ๋น„์ผ์‹œ์ (non-transitory) ์ €์žฅ ๋งค์ฒด์˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ๋กœ ์ œ๊ณต๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์—ฌ๊ธฐ์„œ, '๋น„์ผ์‹œ์ '์€ ์ €์žฅ ๋งค์ฒด๊ฐ€ ์‹ค์žฌ(tangible)ํ•˜๋Š” ์žฅ์น˜์ด๊ณ , ์‹ ํ˜ธ(signal)(์˜ˆ: ์ „์ž๊ธฐํŒŒ)๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•˜์ง€ ์•Š๋Š”๋‹ค๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์„ ์˜๋ฏธํ•  ๋ฟ์ด๋ฉฐ, ์ด ์šฉ์–ด๋Š” ๋ฐ์ดํ„ฐ๊ฐ€ ์ €์žฅ ๋งค์ฒด์— ๋ฐ˜์˜๊ตฌ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์ €์žฅ๋˜๋Š” ๊ฒฝ์šฐ์™€ ์ž„์‹œ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์ €์žฅ๋˜๋Š” ๊ฒฝ์šฐ๋ฅผ ๊ตฌ๋ถ„ํ•˜์ง€ ์•Š๋Š”๋‹ค.Various embodiments of this document are one or more stored in a storage medium (e.g., built-in memory 136 or external memory 138) that can be read by a machine (e.g., electronic device 101). It may be implemented as software (e.g., program 140) including instructions. For example, a processor (e.g., processor 120) of a device (e.g., electronic device 101) may call at least one command among one or more commands stored from a storage medium and execute it. This allows the device to be operated to perform at least one function according to the at least one instruction called. The one or more instructions may include code generated by a compiler or code that can be executed by an interpreter. A storage medium that can be read by a device may be provided in the form of a non-transitory storage medium. Here, 'non-transitory' only means that the storage medium is a tangible device and does not contain signals (e.g. electromagnetic waves), and this term refers to cases where data is semi-permanently stored in the storage medium. There is no distinction between temporary storage cases.

์ผ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ๋ณธ ๋ฌธ์„œ์— ๊ฐœ์‹œ๋œ ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ๋“ค์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์€ ์ปดํ“จํ„ฐ ํ”„๋กœ๊ทธ๋žจ ์ œํ’ˆ(computer program product)์— ํฌํ•จ๋˜์–ด ์ œ๊ณต๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ปดํ“จํ„ฐ ํ”„๋กœ๊ทธ๋žจ ์ œํ’ˆ์€ ์ƒํ’ˆ์œผ๋กœ์„œ ํŒ๋งค์ž ๋ฐ ๊ตฌ๋งค์ž ๊ฐ„์— ๊ฑฐ๋ž˜๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ปดํ“จํ„ฐ ํ”„๋กœ๊ทธ๋žจ ์ œํ’ˆ์€ ๊ธฐ๊ธฐ๋กœ ์ฝ์„ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋Š” ์ €์žฅ ๋งค์ฒด(์˜ˆ: compact disc read only memory(CD-ROM))์˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ๋กœ ๋ฐฐํฌ๋˜๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ๋˜๋Š” ์–ดํ”Œ๋ฆฌ์ผ€์ด์…˜ ์Šคํ† ์–ด(์˜ˆ: ํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์Šคํ† ์–ดTM)๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ๋˜๋Š” ๋‘ ๊ฐœ์˜ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž ์žฅ์น˜๋“ค(์˜ˆ: ์Šค๋งˆํŠธ ํฐ๋“ค) ๊ฐ„์— ์ง์ ‘, ์˜จ๋ผ์ธ์œผ๋กœ ๋ฐฐํฌ(์˜ˆ: ๋‹ค์šด๋กœ๋“œ ๋˜๋Š” ์—…๋กœ๋“œ)๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜จ๋ผ์ธ ๋ฐฐํฌ์˜ ๊ฒฝ์šฐ์—, ์ปดํ“จํ„ฐ ํ”„๋กœ๊ทธ๋žจ ์ œํ’ˆ์˜ ์ ์–ด๋„ ์ผ๋ถ€๋Š” ์ œ์กฐ์‚ฌ์˜ ์„œ๋ฒ„, ์–ดํ”Œ๋ฆฌ์ผ€์ด์…˜ ์Šคํ† ์–ด์˜ ์„œ๋ฒ„, ๋˜๋Š” ์ค‘๊ณ„ ์„œ๋ฒ„์˜ ๋ฉ”๋ชจ๋ฆฌ์™€ ๊ฐ™์€ ๊ธฐ๊ธฐ๋กœ ์ฝ์„ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋Š” ์ €์žฅ ๋งค์ฒด์— ์ ์–ด๋„ ์ผ์‹œ ์ €์žฅ๋˜๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ์ž„์‹œ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์ƒ์„ฑ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to one embodiment, methods according to various embodiments disclosed in this document may be provided and included in a computer program product. Computer program products are commodities and can be traded between sellers and buyers. The computer program product may be distributed in the form of a machine-readable storage medium (e.g. compact disc read only memory (CD-ROM)), or through an application store (e.g. Play Store TM ) or on two user devices (e.g. It can be distributed (e.g. downloaded or uploaded) directly between smart phones) or online. In the case of online distribution, at least a portion of the computer program product may be at least temporarily stored or temporarily created in a machine-readable storage medium, such as the memory of a manufacturer's server, an application store's server, or a relay server.

๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ๋“ค์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ธฐ์ˆ ํ•œ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ๋“ค์˜ ๊ฐ๊ฐ์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ(์˜ˆ: ๋ชจ๋“ˆ ๋˜๋Š” ํ”„๋กœ๊ทธ๋žจ)๋Š” ๋‹จ์ˆ˜ ๋˜๋Š” ๋ณต์ˆ˜์˜ ๊ฐœ์ฒด๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ์œผ๋ฉฐ, ๋ณต์ˆ˜์˜ ๊ฐœ์ฒด ์ค‘ ์ผ๋ถ€๋Š” ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ์— ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋  ์ˆ˜๋„ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ๋“ค์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ์ „์ˆ ํ•œ ํ•ด๋‹น ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ๋“ค ์ค‘ ํ•˜๋‚˜ ์ด์ƒ์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ๋“ค ๋˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘๋“ค์ด ์ƒ๋žต๋˜๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ๋˜๋Š” ํ•˜๋‚˜ ์ด์ƒ์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ๋“ค ๋˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘๋“ค์ด ์ถ”๊ฐ€๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋Œ€์ฒด์ ์œผ๋กœ ๋˜๋Š” ์ถ”๊ฐ€์ ์œผ๋กœ, ๋ณต์ˆ˜์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ๋“ค(์˜ˆ: ๋ชจ๋“ˆ ๋˜๋Š” ํ”„๋กœ๊ทธ๋žจ)์€ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ๋กœ ํ†ตํ•ฉ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ด๋Ÿฐ ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ํ†ตํ•ฉ๋œ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ณต์ˆ˜์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ๋“ค ๊ฐ๊ฐ์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ์˜ ํ•˜๋‚˜ ์ด์ƒ์˜ ๊ธฐ๋Šฅ๋“ค์„ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ†ตํ•ฉ ์ด์ „์— ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ณต์ˆ˜์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ๋“ค ์ค‘ ํ•ด๋‹น ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ์— ์˜ํ•ด ์ˆ˜ํ–‰๋˜๋Š” ๊ฒƒ๊ณผ ๋™์ผ ๋˜๋Š” ์œ ์‚ฌํ•˜๊ฒŒ ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋‹ค์–‘ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ๋“ค์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด, ๋ชจ๋“ˆ, ํ”„๋กœ๊ทธ๋žจ ๋˜๋Š” ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ์— ์˜ํ•ด ์ˆ˜ํ–‰๋˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘๋“ค์€ ์ˆœ์ฐจ์ ์œผ๋กœ, ๋ณ‘๋ ฌ์ ์œผ๋กœ, ๋ฐ˜๋ณต์ ์œผ๋กœ, ๋˜๋Š” ํœด๋ฆฌ์Šคํ‹ฑํ•˜๊ฒŒ ์‹คํ–‰๋˜๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋™์ž‘๋“ค ์ค‘ ํ•˜๋‚˜ ์ด์ƒ์ด ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์ˆœ์„œ๋กœ ์‹คํ–‰๋˜๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ์ƒ๋žต๋˜๊ฑฐ๋‚˜, ๋˜๋Š” ํ•˜๋‚˜ ์ด์ƒ์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ๋™์ž‘๋“ค์ด ์ถ”๊ฐ€๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to various embodiments, each component (e.g., module or program) of the above-described components may include a single or plural entity, and some of the plurality of entities may be separately placed in other components. there is. According to various embodiments, one or more of the components or operations described above may be omitted, or one or more other components or operations may be added. Alternatively or additionally, multiple components (eg, modules or programs) may be integrated into a single component. In this case, the integrated component may perform one or more functions of each component of the plurality of components in the same or similar manner as those performed by the corresponding component of the plurality of components prior to the integration. . According to various embodiments, operations performed by a module, program, or other component may be executed sequentially, in parallel, iteratively, or heuristically, or one or more of the operations may be executed in a different order, or omitted. Alternatively, one or more other operations may be added.

Claims (15)

ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์— ์žˆ์–ด์„œ,In the head mounted display device, ์ œ1 ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ํ–ฅํ•˜๋Š” ์ œ1 ๋ฉด๊ณผ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์˜ ๋ฐ˜๋Œ€ ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์ธ ์ œ2 ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ํ–ฅํ•˜๋Š” ์ œ2 ๋ฉด์„ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๋Š” ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„;a frame including a first surface facing in a first direction and a second surface facing in a second direction opposite to the first direction; ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ๋ฉด์„ ํ†ตํ•ด ์™ธ๋ถ€๋กœ ๋…ธ์ถœ๋˜๋Š” ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด;a display exposed to the outside through the second surface; ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„์˜ ์–‘ ๋‹จ๋ถ€์— ๊ฐ๊ฐ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๊ณ  ์ผ ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ์—ฐ์žฅ๋œ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค; ๋ฐWearing parts each connected to both ends of the frame and extending in one direction; and ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„ ๋˜๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๊ณ ,Comprising a processor disposed inside at least one of the frame or the wearing portion, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ๊ฐ๊ฐ์€, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜๊ฐ€ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ž์˜ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์— ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋  ๋•Œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€๋ถ„์— ์ ‘์ด‰๋˜๋Š” ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋Œ€ํ–ฅํ•˜๋Š” ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์„ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๊ณ ,Each of the wearing units includes an inner surface that is in contact with a portion of the head when the head mounted display device is worn on the user's head, and an outer surface that faces the inner surface, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋Š”, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋˜๋Š” ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๋Š” ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜.At least one of the wearing parts includes a first touch circuit disposed on the inner surface. ์ฒญ๊ตฌํ•ญ 1์— ์žˆ์–ด์„œ,In claim 1, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜๋Š” ์•ˆ๊ฒฝ ํ˜•ํƒœ๋กœ ๋งˆ๋ จ๋˜๊ณ ,The head mounted display device is provided in the form of glasses, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์•ˆ๊ฒฝ์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฆฌ๋“ค์„ ๊ตฌ์„ฑํ•˜๋Š” ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜.A head mounted display device wherein the wearing parts constitute legs of the glasses. ์ฒญ๊ตฌํ•ญ 1์— ์žˆ์–ด์„œ,In claim 1, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์€ ์ผ์ฒด๋กœ ๋ ์˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ๋กœ ๋งˆ๋ จ๋˜์–ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋จธ๋ฆฌ์˜ ์ผ๋ถ€๋ถ„์„ ๋‘˜๋Ÿฌ์‹ธ๋Š” ํ˜•ํƒœ๋กœ ์กฐ์—ฌ์ง€๋Š” ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜.A head mounted display device in which the wearing parts are integrally provided in the form of a band and tightened to surround a portion of the head. ์ฒญ๊ตฌํ•ญ 1์— ์žˆ์–ด์„œ,In claim 1, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋Š” ๋ณต์ˆ˜ ๊ฐœ์˜ ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์…€๋“ค์ด ์ธ์ ‘ํ•˜์—ฌ ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ํ˜•ํƒœ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ€์ง€๋Š” ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜.The first touch circuit is a head mounted display device in which a plurality of touch cells are arranged adjacent to each other. ์ฒญ๊ตฌํ•ญ 1์— ์žˆ์–ด์„œ,In claim 1, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์œผ๋กœ๋ถ€ํ„ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด๊นŒ์ง€ ์—ฐ์žฅ๋˜์–ด ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋˜๋Š” ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜.The first touch circuit is arranged to extend from the inner side to the outer side. ์ฒญ๊ตฌํ•ญ 1์— ์žˆ์–ด์„œ,In claim 1, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋Š”, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋˜๋Š” ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๊ณ ,At least one of the wearing parts includes a second touch circuit disposed on the outer surface, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„์˜ ์ผ๋‹จ๋ถ€์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๋Š” ์ œ1 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€ ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„์˜ ํƒ€๋‹จ๋ถ€์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๋Š” ์ œ2 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๊ณ ,The wearing parts include a first wearing part connected to one end of the frame and a second wearing part connected to the other end of the frame, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋˜๊ณ ,The first touch circuit is disposed on the inner surface of the first wearing part, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋˜๋Š” ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜.The second touch circuit is a head mounted display device disposed on the outer surface of the second wearing unit. ์ฒญ๊ตฌํ•ญ 1์— ์žˆ์–ด์„œ,In claim 1, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋Š”, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋˜๋Š” ๋„์ „์ฒด๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๊ณ ,At least one of the wearing parts includes a conductor disposed on the outer surface, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„์˜ ์ผ๋‹จ๋ถ€์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๋Š” ์ œ1 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€ ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„์˜ ํƒ€๋‹จ๋ถ€์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๋Š” ์ œ2 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๊ณ ,The wearing parts include a first wearing part connected to one end of the frame and a second wearing part connected to the other end of the frame, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋˜๊ณ ,The first touch circuit is disposed on the inner surface of the first wearing part, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋„์ „์ฒด๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋˜๋Š” ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜.A head mounted display device wherein the conductor is disposed on the outer surface of the second wearing part. ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ ๊ฐ์ง€ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์— ์žˆ์–ด์„œ,In the method of detecting the wearing state of a head mounted display device, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„์˜ ์–‘ ๋‹จ๋ถ€์— ๊ฐ๊ฐ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๊ณ  ์ผ ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ์—ฐ์žฅ๋œ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ๋‚ด์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘; ๋ฐdetecting a first touch input through a first touch circuit disposed on the inner surface of at least one of the wearable parts respectively connected to both ends of the frame of the head mounted display device and extending in one direction; and ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ๊ฐ์ง€์— ์‘๋‹ตํ•˜์—ฌ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์— ๋Œ€์‘๋˜๋Š” ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด์— ๊ธฐ๋ฐ˜ํ•˜์—ฌ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘์„ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๋Š” ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ ๊ฐ์ง€ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•.In response to detection of the first touch input, a method for detecting a wearing state of a head mounted display device comprising determining a wearing state of the head mounted display device based on first touch information corresponding to the first touch input. . ์ฒญ๊ตฌํ•ญ 8์— ์žˆ์–ด์„œ,In claim 8, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ๊ฐ์ง€ ์ „์—, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘;Before detecting the first touch input, detecting a second touch input through a second touch circuit disposed on an outer surface of at least one of the wearable parts; ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ๊ฐ์ง€์— ์‘๋‹ตํ•˜์—ฌ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™” ์ˆ˜์ค€์„ ๋†’์ด๋Š” ๋™์ž‘; ๋ฐIn response to detection of the second touch input, increasing the activation level of the processor of the head mounted display device; and ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด์— ๊ธฐ๋ฐ˜ํ•˜์—ฌ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๊ฐ€ ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ๋™์ž‘์„ ๋” ํฌํ•จํ•˜๋Š” ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ ๊ฐ์ง€ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•.When the wearing state of the head mounted display device is determined based on the first touch information, the method of detecting the wearing state of the head mounted display device further includes activating a display of the head mounted display device. ์ฒญ๊ตฌํ•ญ 8์— ์žˆ์–ด์„œ,In claim 8, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ๊ฐ์ง€ ์ „์—, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘;Before detecting the first touch input, detecting a second touch input through a second touch circuit disposed on an outer surface of at least one of the wearable parts; ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ๊ฐ์ง€์— ์‘๋‹ตํ•˜์—ฌ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™” ์ˆ˜์ค€์„ ๋†’์ด๊ณ  ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ๋™์ž‘; ๋ฐIn response to detection of the second touch input, increasing the activation level of the processor of the head mounted display device and activating the display of the head mounted display device; and ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ๊ฐ์ง€ ํ›„ ์ง€์ •๋œ ์‹œ๊ฐ„ ๋‚ด์— ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์ง€ ์•Š์œผ๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ๋น„ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ๋™์ž‘์„ ๋” ํฌํ•จํ•˜๋Š” ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ ๊ฐ์ง€ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•.A method of detecting a wearing state of a head mounted display device further comprising deactivating the display if the first touch input is not detected within a specified time after detecting the second touch input. ์ฒญ๊ตฌํ•ญ 8์— ์žˆ์–ด์„œ,In claim 8, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด์—์„œ ์ œ2 ํŒจํ„ด์œผ๋กœ ๋ณ€๊ฒฝ๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์‹œ์Šคํ…œ์˜ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”๋ฅผ ์œ ์ง€ํ•˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ๋น„ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ๋™์ž‘; ๋ฐWhen the pattern of the first touch input changes from the first pattern to the second pattern, maintaining activation of the system of the head mounted display device and deactivating the display of the head mounted display device; and ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด์—์„œ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํŒจํ„ด์œผ๋กœ ๋ณ€๊ฒฝ๋œ ์ƒํƒœ์—์„œ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด์ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ2 ํŒจํ„ด์—์„œ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํŒจํ„ด์œผ๋กœ ๋ณ€๊ฒฝ๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ๋™์ž‘์„ ๋” ํฌํ•จํ•˜๋Š” ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ ๊ฐ์ง€ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•.When the pattern of the first touch input is changed from the first pattern to the second pattern, and the pattern of the first touch input is changed from the second pattern to the first pattern, an operation of activating the display A method for detecting a wearing state of a head mounted display device further comprising: ์ฒญ๊ตฌํ•ญ 8์— ์žˆ์–ด์„œ,In claim 8, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ๊ฐ์ง€ ์ „์—, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ ๋˜๋Š” ๋„์ „์ฒด๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘;Before detecting the first touch input, detecting separation of the wearable parts using the first touch circuit and a second touch circuit or conductor disposed on an outer surface of at least one of the wearable parts; ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™” ์ˆ˜์ค€์„ ๋†’์ด๋Š” ๋™์ž‘; ๋ฐincreasing the activation level of a processor of the head mounted display device when the wearable parts are separated; and ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ •๋ณด์— ๊ธฐ๋ฐ˜ํ•˜์—ฌ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ๊ฐ€ ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ๋™์ž‘์„ ๋” ํฌํ•จํ•˜๋Š” ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ ๊ฐ์ง€ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•.When the wearing state of the head mounted display device is determined based on the first touch information, the method of detecting the wearing state of the head mounted display device further includes activating a display of the head mounted display device. ์ฒญ๊ตฌํ•ญ 8์— ์žˆ์–ด์„œ,In claim 8, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์˜ ๊ฐ์ง€ ์ „์—, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ ๋˜๋Š” ๋„์ „์ฒด๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘;Before detecting the first touch input, detecting separation of the wearable parts using the first touch circuit and a second touch circuit or conductor disposed on an outer surface of at least one of the wearable parts; ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™” ์ˆ˜์ค€์„ ๋†’์ด๊ณ  ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ๋™์ž‘; ๋ฐWhen the wearable parts are separated, increasing the activation level of the processor of the head mounted display device and activating the display of the head mounted display device; and ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋œ ํ›„ ์ง€์ •๋œ ์‹œ๊ฐ„ ๋‚ด์— ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ์ž…๋ ฅ์ด ๊ฐ์ง€๋˜์ง€ ์•Š์œผ๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ๋น„ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ๋™์ž‘์„ ๋” ํฌํ•จํ•˜๋Š” ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ ๊ฐ์ง€ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•.A method of detecting a wearing state of a head mounted display device further comprising deactivating the display if the first touch input is not detected within a specified time after the wearing parts are separated. ์ฒญ๊ตฌํ•ญ 8์— ์žˆ์–ด์„œ,In claim 8, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ ๋˜๋Š” ๋„์ „์ฒด๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ ‘์ด‰์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘; ๋ฐAn operation of detecting contact between the wearable parts using the first touch circuit and a second touch circuit or conductor disposed on an outer surface of at least one of the wearable parts; and ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ์ ‘์ด‰๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ๋น„ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”์‹œํ‚ค๊ณ  ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™” ์ˆ˜์ค€์„ ๋‚ฎ์ถ”๋Š” ๋™์ž‘์„ ๋” ํฌํ•จํ•˜๋Š” ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ ๊ฐ์ง€ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•.When the wearing parts are contacted, the method of detecting a wearing state of a head mounted display device further comprising deactivating the display of the head mounted display device and lowering the activation level of the processor of the head mounted display device. ์ฒญ๊ตฌํ•ญ 8์— ์žˆ์–ด์„œ,In claim 8, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ œ1 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค ์ค‘ ์ ์–ด๋„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€์˜ ์™ธ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ ์ œ2 ํ„ฐ์น˜ ํšŒ๋กœ ๋˜๋Š” ๋„์ „์ฒด๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์˜ ์ ‘์ด‰์„ ๊ฐ์ง€ํ•˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘;An operation of detecting contact between the wearable parts using the first touch circuit and a second touch circuit or conductor disposed on an outer surface of at least one of the wearable parts; ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ฐฉ์šฉ๋ถ€๋“ค์ด ์ ‘์ด‰๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด๋ฅผ ๋น„ํ™œ์„ฑํ™”์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ๋™์ž‘;Deactivating the display of the head mounted display device when the wearable parts are contacted; ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜๊ฐ€ ์ผ€์ด์Šค์— ์•ˆ์ฐฉ๋˜์—ˆ๋Š”์ง€ ์—ฌ๋ถ€๋ฅผ ํŒ๋‹จํ•˜๋Š” ๋™์ž‘; ๋ฐAn operation of determining whether the head mounted display device is seated in a case; and ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ผ€์ด์Šค์— ์•ˆ์ฐฉ๋˜์—ˆ๋‹ค๊ณ  ํŒ๋‹จ๋˜๋ฉด, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ํ”„๋กœ์„ธ์„œ์˜ ํ™œ์„ฑํ™” ์ˆ˜์ค€์„ ๋‚ฎ์ถ”๋Š” ๋™์ž‘์„ ๋” ํฌํ•จํ•˜๋Š” ํ—ค๋“œ ๋งˆ์šดํŠธ ๋””์Šคํ”Œ๋ ˆ์ด ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์ฐฉ์šฉ ์ƒํƒœ ๊ฐ์ง€ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•.When it is determined that the head mounted display device is seated in the case, the method of detecting a wearing state of a head mounted display device further comprising lowering the activation level of a processor of the head mounted display device.
PCT/KR2023/014648 2022-09-26 2023-09-25 Head-mounted display apparatus, and method for detecting wearing state thereof Ceased WO2024071903A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR20220121798 2022-09-26
KR10-2022-0121798 2022-09-26
KR1020220138584A KR20240043031A (en) 2022-09-26 2022-10-25 Head-mounted display apparatus and method for detecting wearing state thereof
KR10-2022-0138584 2022-10-25

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024071903A1 true WO2024071903A1 (en) 2024-04-04

Family

ID=90478655

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/KR2023/014648 Ceased WO2024071903A1 (en) 2022-09-26 2023-09-25 Head-mounted display apparatus, and method for detecting wearing state thereof

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2024071903A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, โ€  Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20110194029A1 (en) * 2010-02-05 2011-08-11 Kopin Corporation Touch sensor for controlling eyewear
KR20130029070A (en) * 2010-07-20 2013-03-21 ์— ํŒŒ์ด์–ด ํ…Œํฌ๋†€๋กœ์ง€ ๋””๋ฒจ๋กญ๋จผํŠธ ์—˜์—˜์”จ Augmented reality proximity sensing
KR20150043816A (en) * 2013-10-15 2015-04-23 ์—˜์ง€์ „์ž ์ฃผ์‹ํšŒ์‚ฌ Glass type terminal having three-dimensional input appatatus and screen control method thereof
KR102028761B1 (en) * 2013-07-26 2019-10-04 ๋งˆ์ดํฌ๋กœ์†Œํ”„ํŠธ ํ…Œํฌ๋†€๋กœ์ง€ ๋ผ์ด์„ผ์‹ฑ, ์—˜์—˜์”จ Head Mounted Display and controlling method thereof
KR20210104886A (en) * 2018-12-27 2021-08-25 ์Šค๋ƒ… ์ธ์ฝ”ํฌ๋ ˆ์ดํ‹ฐ๋“œ Fade-in user interface display based on finger distance or hand proximity

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, โ€  Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20110194029A1 (en) * 2010-02-05 2011-08-11 Kopin Corporation Touch sensor for controlling eyewear
KR20130029070A (en) * 2010-07-20 2013-03-21 ์— ํŒŒ์ด์–ด ํ…Œํฌ๋†€๋กœ์ง€ ๋””๋ฒจ๋กญ๋จผํŠธ ์—˜์—˜์”จ Augmented reality proximity sensing
KR102028761B1 (en) * 2013-07-26 2019-10-04 ๋งˆ์ดํฌ๋กœ์†Œํ”„ํŠธ ํ…Œํฌ๋†€๋กœ์ง€ ๋ผ์ด์„ผ์‹ฑ, ์—˜์—˜์”จ Head Mounted Display and controlling method thereof
KR20150043816A (en) * 2013-10-15 2015-04-23 ์—˜์ง€์ „์ž ์ฃผ์‹ํšŒ์‚ฌ Glass type terminal having three-dimensional input appatatus and screen control method thereof
KR20210104886A (en) * 2018-12-27 2021-08-25 ์Šค๋ƒ… ์ธ์ฝ”ํฌ๋ ˆ์ดํ‹ฐ๋“œ Fade-in user interface display based on finger distance or hand proximity

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2022102954A1 (en) Wearable electronic device including display
WO2022059893A1 (en) Wearable electronic device including heat-dissipating structure
WO2023027300A1 (en) Electronic device, head-mounted display device, wearable device, and operation method thereof
WO2022092517A1 (en) Wearable electronic device comprising display, method for controlling display, and system comprising wearable electronic device and case
WO2022255682A1 (en) Wearable electronic device and method for controlling power path thereof
WO2023080420A1 (en) Wearable electronic device including variable ground
WO2023048466A1 (en) Electronic device and method for displaying content
WO2022191497A1 (en) Wearable electronic device comprising display
WO2023017986A1 (en) Method and electronic system for outputting video data and audio data
WO2023136533A1 (en) Interference cancellation method and electronic device for performing same
WO2023048462A1 (en) Electronic device which adjusts light transmittance of colorable lens and control method therefor
WO2024019273A1 (en) Electronic device for providing augmented reality and method by which electronic device compensates for image
WO2024071903A1 (en) Head-mounted display apparatus, and method for detecting wearing state thereof
WO2024076058A1 (en) Wearable electronic device comprising sensor and operation method thereof
WO2024101747A1 (en) Wearable electronic device including camera and operation method thereof
WO2024071681A1 (en) Method for providing image and wearable electronic device supporting same
WO2025042169A1 (en) Wearable device for performing call by using virtual object, and control method thereof
WO2024112017A1 (en) Head-worn electronic device and operation method thereof
WO2023229199A1 (en) Operating method for determining screen display mode of electronic device, and electronic device
WO2023080419A1 (en) Wearable electronic device and method for controlling electronic device by using vision information
WO2024043611A1 (en) Display module control method and electronic device for carrying out same
WO2024048937A1 (en) Wearable electronic device and charging system comprising same
WO2024101718A1 (en) Wearable electronic device comprising camera module
WO2025095557A1 (en) Apparatus and method for processing vision information by using image sensor
WO2024029858A1 (en) Display module control method, and electronic device performing the method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23873020

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 23873020

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1